Schenk

Instructions
4-0945231-273850A
Customer F.L. Smidth A/S

Reference 4-0945231-273850A
File no. Z606.00342/K
Order no. 5000433508
Serial no. electrics V088964.B01
Serial no. mechanics V088964.B01
file://C:\Dokumente und Einstellungen\csd3605\Lokale Einstellungen\Temp\wz9334\... 20.05.2010

Table of Contents
Reg. 1 Manuals Mechanics

BVH2190-GB Installation and Operating Instructions MULTIBELT ..
Reg. 2 Manuals Volumetric and Drive Controls
Reg. 3 Manuals Measuring and Automation Systems

BVH2007AA-GB Operating Instructions - Belt Weigher
BVH2214-GB INTECONT Plus - Operating Manual, Belt Weigher
Reg. 4 Techn. Spec. and Program Sheets

V088964.B01 TechDat Multibelt BEP 08 - 531.BC 01N01
Reg. 5 Mechanical Drawings

D607522_gb Multibelt BEP
Reg. 6 Electrical Diagrams

BVM2187-GB INTECONT PLUS, VEG 206xx with Prg. VBW 20600 for ..
Reg. 7 Accessories
Reg. 8 Certificates, Compliance Information
Reg. 9 Spareparts
Reg. 10 Order Specific Information

BVR2000AA-GB Guideline for Storage and Handling of Components a ..
file://C:\Dokumente und Einstellungen\csd3605\Lokale Einstellungen\Temp\wz9334\... 20.05.2010

1.
MANUALS MECHANICS
MULTIBELT Belt Weighers
Installation and Operating Instructions
we make processes work
BV-H2190 GB
Contacts, Copyright
Sales: Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 10 28

eMail: sales.process@schenck.net
Service: 24h Emergency hotline: +49 (0) 172 - 650 17 00

+49 (0) 171 - 255 11 95 (Beltweigher, Weighfeeder)
eMail: service.process@ schenck.net
Business Segments:
Heavy Duty Weighing & Feeding

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 26 23
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 32 70
eMail: bvh.process@schenck.net
Light Duty Weighing & Feeding

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 25 72
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 20 72
eMail: bvl.process@schenck.net
Vibrating Machines
Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 35 25
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 30 96
eMail: bvs.process@schenck.net
Transport & Logistics

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 24 48
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 13 69
eMail: bvt.process@schenck.net
Components & Spare Parts

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 17 58
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 36 32
eMail: bvk.process@schenck.net
Copyright 2005
SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH
Measuring and Process Technologies
Landwehrstrae 55, D-64293 Darmstadt
http://www.schenck-process.com
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of manual, regardless of method, without prior permission by
SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
Subject to change without prior notice.
BV-H2190 GB 0536 MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt
Contents
1 General Information ......................................................................... 1

1.1 Hints for Delivery...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Information on Documentation................................................................................. 1
2 Belt Weighers Overview ................................................................... 3
2.1 Single-idler Belt Weighers ....................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 BEM type........................................................................................................... 4
2.1.2 BEP type ........................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 BED type ........................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Multi-idler Belt Weighers.......................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 BMP type........................................................................................................... 7
2.2.1.1 BMP2 type .................................................................................................. 8
2.2.1.2 2BMP type .................................................................................................. 8
3 Planning-in Hints (The 10 Rules)..................................................... 9
3.1 General Information ................................................................................................. 9
3.1.1 Hints for Movable Conveyors .......................................................................... 10
3.2 The 10 Rules.......................................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 10
3.2.2 The Rules in Detail .......................................................................................... 11
4 Single-idler Belt Weigher BEM ...................................................... 22
4.1 Installation Instructions .......................................................................................... 22
4.1.1 Items Supplied................................................................................................. 22
4.1.2 Installation Prerequisites ................................................................................. 22
4.1.3 Displacing Measuring Modules ....................................................................... 23
4.1.4 Installation ....................................................................................................... 24
4.1.4.1 Prerequisites............................................................................................. 24
4.1.4.2 Mounting Measuring Modules .................................................................. 25
4.1.4.3 Mounting Carrying Idler Sets.................................................................... 27
4.1.4.4 Cabling ..................................................................................................... 28
4.1.5 Aligning............................................................................................................ 28
4.1.6 Acquiring Effective Platform Length ................................................................ 30
4.2 Operating Instructions............................................................................................ 31
4.2.1 Maintaining Belt Weigher ................................................................................ 31
4.2.1.1 Maintaining ............................................................................................... 32
4.2.1.2 Inspecting ................................................................................................. 32
4.2.1.2.1 Ensuring Proper Alignment of Carrying Idler Sets............................. 32
4.2.1.2.2 Checking Leaf Spring Parallel Guidance ........................................... 33
4.2.1.2.3 Checking Load Cell Signal................................................................. 34
4.2.1.2.4 Checking Load Cell............................................................................ 34
4.2.1.3 Repairing Belt Weigher............................................................................. 35
5 Single-idler Belt Weigher BEP....................................................... 37
5.1 Installation Instructions .......................................................................................... 37
5.1.1 Items Supplied................................................................................................. 37
5.1.2 Installation Prerequisites ................................................................................. 38
5.1.3 Installation ....................................................................................................... 38
5.1.3.1 Prerequisites:............................................................................................ 39
5.1.3.2 Mounting Weighed Idler Set ..................................................................... 41
5.1.3.3 Mounting Carrying Idler Sets.................................................................... 43
5.1.3.4 Aligning..................................................................................................... 44
5.1.3.5 Acquiring Effective Platform Length ......................................................... 46
5.1.4 Cabling ............................................................................................................ 46
5.2 Operating Instructions............................................................................................ 47
5.2.1 Maintaining ...................................................................................................... 47
5.2.2 Inspecting and Repairing ................................................................................ 47
5.2.2.1 Replacing Load Cell ................................................................................. 48
5.2.2.2 Replacing Leaf Springs ............................................................................ 49
MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions 0536 BV-H2190 GB

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt -I-
Contents
6 Single-idler Belt Weigher BED....................................................... 50

6.1 Installation Instructions ...........................................................................................50
6.1.1 Items Supplied .................................................................................................50
6.1.2 Installation Prerequisites..................................................................................50
6.1.3 Installation........................................................................................................51
6.1.3.1 Prerequisites .............................................................................................51
6.1.3.2 Mounting Belt Weigher on Belt Stringers ..................................................54
6.1.3.2.1 Mounting Load Cells...........................................................................55
6.1.3.3 Mounting Carrying Idler Sets.....................................................................56
6.1.3.4 Aligning Carrying Idler Sets.......................................................................57
6.1.3.5 Aligning Weighed Idler Set........................................................................58
6.1.3.6 Acquiring Effective Platform Length..........................................................60
6.1.4 Cabling .............................................................................................................60
6.2 Operating Instructions ............................................................................................61
6.2.1 Maintaining.......................................................................................................61
6.2.2 Inspecting and Repairing .................................................................................62
6.2.2.1 Replacing Load Cell ..................................................................................62
6.2.2.2 Replacing Leaf Springs .............................................................................63
7 Multi-idler Belt Weigher BMP......................................................... 64
7.1 Installation Instructions ...........................................................................................64
7.1.1 Items Supplied .................................................................................................64
7.1.2 Installation Prerequisites..................................................................................64
7.1.3 Installation........................................................................................................65
7.1.3.1 Prerequisites: ............................................................................................65
7.1.3.2 Mounting Weighed Idler Set(s)..................................................................67
7.1.3.3 Mounting Carrying Idler Sets.....................................................................71
7.1.3.4 Aligning......................................................................................................71
7.1.3.5 Acquiring Effective Platform Length..........................................................73
7.1.4 Cabling .............................................................................................................74
7.2 Operating Instructions ............................................................................................75
7.2.1 Maintaining.......................................................................................................75
7.2.2 Inspecting and Repairing .................................................................................76
7.2.2.1 Replacing Load Cell ..................................................................................76
7.2.2.2 Replacing Leaf Springs .............................................................................77
8 Speed Transducer (Option) ........................................................... 78
8.1 FGA20-RSLE Type.................................................................................................78
8.1.1 Installation Instructions ....................................................................................78
8.1.1.1 Installing Speed Transducer .....................................................................78
8.1.1.1.1 Further Installation Instructions ..........................................................79
8.1.1.2 Cabling ......................................................................................................79
8.1.2 Operating Instructions......................................................................................80
8.1.2.1 FGA 20-RSlE for Legal-for-trade Belt Weighers .......................................80
8.1.2.2 Maintenance..............................................................................................80
8.1.2.3 Inspection and Repair ...............................................................................81
8.2 FGA24A Type.........................................................................................................81
8.2.1 Installation Suggestions ...................................................................................81
8.2.1.1 Suitability ...................................................................................................82
8.2.1.2 Mounting Pole Wheel ................................................................................83
8.2.1.3 Mounting Proximity Switch ........................................................................83
9 Test Weight Suspension (Option) ................................................. 84
9.1 BEP, BMP Types....................................................................................................85
9.1.2 Installation and Setting Instructions .................................................................85
9.2 BED Type ...............................................................................................................86
9.2.2 Operating and Setting Instructions ..................................................................87

- II - SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt
General Information
1 General Information
1.1 Hints for Delivery

Inspection of incoming goods
" Carefully inspect packaging for any damage during transit.
" If damage is discovered, contact your carrier immediately and file a claim
for damages.
" Check items supplied for completeness. For information on items supplied,
please refer to the individual 'Items Supplied" items of Chapters 4 to 7.
Storage hints
Check to see whether the admissible limit temperatures of - 25 oC or + 55 oC can
possibly be exceeded:
" If no, store the items supplied in their genuine packaging in dry and clean
rooms whose relative humidity does not exceed 75%.
" If yes, remove load cell, (optional) speed transducer and terminal box, and
store the electronic components in rooms meeting the above requirements.
Additionally observe the

'Guideline for Storage and Handling of Components and Machines
Supplied'
(BV-R2000 AA).
1.2 Information on Documentation

This manual includes any information required for installation and operation of our
belt weighers:
Single-idler belt weighers: BEM, BEP and BED types
Multi-idler belt weighers BMP, 2BMP and BMP2 types
For general information on the belt weighers described in the present manual,
please refer to the 'Belt Weighers Overview' chapter.
" Application
" Construction
" Operating Principle
" Accuracy

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt -1-
General Information
The information is complete with significant technical data on every belt weigher type:
" Operating principle
" Dimensions
" Load cell type
" Possible belt widths
" Feed rates
" Accuracies
Optimal planning-in is essential for obtaining the specified data and ensuring proper
functioning of your belt weigher.
Before mounting, please read the

'Planning-in Hints (The 10 Rules)' item.
To every belt weigher type, a main chapter is dedicated comprising the following
information:
" Installation Instructions
" Operating and Setting Instructions

Identify your belt weigher type and refer to the relevant chapter.
If your belt weigher is equipped with optional devices, the variants of the particular
type as well as the relevant Installation and Operating Instructions are referenced
accordingly:
Speed measurement system: See chapter

'Speed Transducer (Option)'
Test weight system:: See chapter

'Test Weight Receptors (Option)'

-2- SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt
Belt Weighers Overview
2 Belt Weighers Overview

Belt weighers are components designed for installation in user's belt conveyor
systems. The systems are designed and documented so that the user can perform
installation and commissioning single-handedly. However, advanced mechanical skills
and utmost care are required to provide the proper environment for the belt weighers.
Proper mounting is an important consideration for system accuracy.

Therefore, we recommend to have commissioning and inspections
performed by a SCHENCK engineer.
Application
Used for continuous acquisition of feed rates and totalized amounts, the belt weighers
are designed for installation in continuously operating belt conveyor systems. There is
a broad range of applications:
" Throughput and consumption measurement in production plants
" Balancing of amounts fed in and out
" Reporting of load limits
" Batching in load-out stations
" Legal-for-trade weighing
" Prefeeder control

The rugged design of the system ensures a high degree of operating safety and
availability.
Construction
A standard belt weigher comprises:
" Weighing modules or weighing platform for accommodation of user's idler sets
" Overload protected load cell(s) with a high degree of protection
" Cable junction box for connection of sensors
" Fixing elements for the installation

For speed measurement, various speed transducers (e.g. frequency generators with
friction wheel) are available as options.
Operating Principle
Belt weighers are designed to acquire continuous material flows of varying strengths.
Load cells acquire the weight of the load on a certain belt section, and a speed
transducer measures the belt speed (up to approx. 6 m/s). The product of the two
measured variables results in the current feed rate. Totalization of feed rate results in
the material amount fed.
If belt speed acquisition is omitted (belt load measuring system), a constant speed
value must be transferred to the weighing electronics in form of a parameter.
However, this procedure has the potential to adversely affect weighing accuracy.

Accuracy
The stated accuracies assume that the belt weigher is mounted in suitable belt
conveyor systems and that the weighed idler set is installed and calibrated in
accordance with our installation and calibration instructions.
For accuracy data, please refer to the following documention:

BV-D2105 AA 'Definition of Belt Weigher System Accuracy'
2.1 Single-idler Belt Weighers

" Easy integration into user's belt stringers with no need to interrupt the
construction
" Belt tension forces absorbed by leaf spring parallel guidances
" Suitable for handling feed rates up to 15,000 t/hr
" Accuracies of up to 0.5 %
2.1.1 BEM type

Type: Fixation by welding
" Belt weigher of modular design, suitable for DIN

belt widths from 400 to 1400 mm
(exceptionally, up to 2000 mm)
" Easy installation
" 2 lateral weighed idler sets
" Components independent of belt width
" Load cell: PWS type (platform load cell)
" Feed rates up to approx. 4,000 t/hr
" Accuracy 1 % of nominal feed rate

2.1.2 BEP type
" Belt weigher with weighing platform, suitable for

DIN belt widths from 400 to 1400 mm
" Weighed idler set inside belt stringers
" Insensitive to crosswise belt stringers
instabilities caused by centrally displaced cross-
member
" Load cell:
o PWS type (platform load cell)
o RT.. types (ring-torsion load cells)
" Accuracy 0.5 % of nominal feed rate
" Acuracy 1 % of actual feed rate
" Legal-for-trade variants also available

2.1.3 BED type

The BED type comprises two weighing sections.

" 2 weighed idler sets inside belt stringers
instabilities caused by centrally displaced cross-
member
" Load cell:
o VBB type (shear beam)
" Accuracy 0.5 % of nominal feed rate
" Accuracy 1 % of actual feed rate
2.2 Multi-idler Belt Weighers

" Easy integration into user's belt stringers with no need to interrupt the
construction
" Belt tension forces absorbed by leaf spring parallel guidances
" Suitable for handling feed rates up to 15,000 t/hr
" Accuracies of up to 0.25 %
" Legal-for-trade variants also available

2.2.1 BMP type

The design of the BMP series is similar to that of the BEP series. The weighing
platform is designed to accommodate two carrying idler sets.
" Belt weigher with weighing platform suitable for

" Weighed idler set inside belt stringers
instabilities: extended weigh span
" Load cell:
o VBB type (shear beam)
" Acuracy 0.25 % of nominal feed rate
" Accuracy 0.5 % of actual feed rate

2.2.1.1 BMP2 type

" For higher belt widths (to increase the feed
rate), two BMP weighed idler sets are
arranged side by side.
" Dimensions of weighed idler sets identical with
those of the BMP type
" For feed rate, see BMP.
" For accuracy, see BMP.
2.2.1.2 2BMP type
" Belt weigher with weighing platform, suitable for DIN belt widths from 500 to
1400 mm
" To extend the weigh span (and increase accuracy), two BMP weighed idler
sets are arranged in a row.
" Dimensions of weighed idler sets identical with those of the BMP type
" Accuracy 0.25 % of actual feed rate

Planning-in Hints (The 10 Rules)
3 Planning-in Hints (The 10 Rules)

3.1 General Information
The specified accuracies assume that your belt weigher is regularly and carefully
maintained and calibrated in accordance with the instructions and planning-in hints
supplied.
Carefully plan the integration of the weighed idler set into your belt
conveyor system using the 10 rules. This is an important consideration
for obtaining the specified measuring accuracy.
General Information
The stricter these rules are followed, the lower is the risk of adversely affecting
functioning and measuring accuracy of your belt weigher.
To achieve highest accuracies (related to actual value), rules 4, 5, and 9 are of

special import. The weighed idler sets themselves are designed stable and rigid.
The installation, calibration and commissioning instructions for the individual weigher
types detail installation and alignment.
To be observed
" With legal-for-trade belt weighers, additionally observe the applicable

regulations of the Verification Ordinance.
" Never change belt stringers when using belt conveyors to DIN 22107.
" The accuracy of belt weighers without speed transducer (v-measurement)

varies as a function of belt speed.
" Verify accuracy by check measurements under load. Ensure that the check
amount is at least 10% of the hourly amount fed at nominal feed rate (Inom)
over at least one belt circuit.
" Ensure that the location of your belt weigher is fully accessible to installation
work.
" Particularly observe the relation

'Feed rate measuring accuracy' 'number of carrying idlers in the
weigher influential zone'
o Accuracies related to nominal value require the presence of 2

carrying idlers approach and retreat of weighed idler set.
o Accuracies related to actual value require the presence of 3

carrying idlers approach and retreat of weighed idler set.
Depending on type of weigher, the weighed idler set is equipped with one or multiple
carrying idler sets.

3.1.1 Hints for Movable Conveyors

Movable conveyors (mobile systems, crushers 1) are normally of light-weight design.
The lacking stiffness has the potential to cause additional issues (vibrations).
Here, the constancy of the slope is an important consideration for accuracy. With
stationary conveyors, the influence resulting from the slope is considered upon
calibration.
If the belt slope is changed with mobile conveyors (e.g. on vehicles) or in adjustable
conveyors (e.g. booms), there are two possibilities:
" Angle measurement and correction of measured value via cosine pendulum
(option)
" Calibration at mean slope and specification of accuracy at maximum

adjustment angle.
1
Ensure constant power supply.
3.2 The 10 Rules
3.2.1 Overview
No. Meaning
1 Install belt weigher in a straight belt section (horizontal or rising).

Ensure that the ascending or descending slope of the belt conveyor (angle of
2 inclination) is selected so that relative movements of the material are excluded.
Install belt weigher with sufficient distance from prefeeder, so that the material
3 flow is settled and no relative material movements can occur.
Ensure that the minimum distance of belt weigher from the belt pulley in a
4 troughed belt is given.
5 Depth and shape of troughing are important considerations for accuracy.
6 Ensure that the belt is fully troughed in the weigher influential zone.
Accurately align idler sets in the weigher influential zone.
7 Sets with offset idlers (viewed from above) have the potential to adversely
affect measuring accuracy.
8 Ensure that the belt stringers are mounted on a solid and level base.
9 Provide gravity take-up.
10 Safeguard your system against wind, weather, extreme temperature variations
and vibrations.

- 10 - SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt
3.2.2 The Rules in Detail
Please note:
For simplicity reasons, the measuring station in the following sketches
consists of one idler station only ("single-idler belt weigher"). All statements
anologously apply to multi-idler belt weighers that feature a measuring
station composed of multiple idler stations.
Rule 1: Install belt weigher in a straight belt section

(horizontal or rising).
" Ensure that the unloaded conveyor belt also fully rests on all carrying idlers,
i.e.
o in weigher influential zone
o and, if possible, in two further sets approach and retreat of weigher

influential zone.
" Garlands are not suitable.
The figures below show belt conveyor systems with typical belt weigher locations. The
circled numbers refer to a valuation scale (1= preferred to 7=unfavourable) used to
judge the influence of location on accuracy.

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt - 11 -
Horizontal belt conveyor
Rising belt conveyor
Belt conveyor with curved belt

Rule 2: Ensure that the ascending or descending slope of the belt conveyor
(angle of inclination) is selected so that relative movements of the
material are excluded.
" If conveyors are designed for adjustable slope, any change fully enters into
measurement as error (see 'Hints for Movable Conveyors' item).
Caution! Relative movements may occur:
o with fines and uniformly shaped materials
('grain size' max. 100 mm)
o with high belt speeds
o right downstream of feed units
o upon loading gaps.

Rule 3: Install belt weigher with sufficient distance from prefeeder, so that
the material flow is settled and no relative material movements can
occur.
" Ensure that the complete weigher influential zone is outside the prefeeder
area.
" The required distance is influenced by
o belt speed
o belt inclination
o type of material infeed, and
o material properties.
(*) Make sure the minimum distance corresponds to the belt travel per
second, however, to minimum 2 m.
" Arrange skirt boards in weigh span so that the weighing accuracy is not
affected.

Ensure that the minimum distance of belt weigher from the belt
Rule 4: pulley in a troughed belt is given.
Rule 5: Depth and shape of troughing are important considerations for

accuracy.
A flat belt (small belt troughing angle c+"increases the measuring accuracy.
A V-shaped belt (*) is unfavourable.
(*) Deep or V-shaped belts are suitable only if more approximate measurement will
suffice.

" Ensure that the belt always rests on the carrying idlers of the sets. This is best
achieved by
o small troughing
o flexible belt.
" Provide for high belt load.
" Ensure correct belt tracking and avoid off-centre load that could lead to belt
slip and inaccurate weighing results.

Rule 6: Ensure that the belt is fully troughed in the weigher influential zone.
" Avoid the use of belt conveyors whose pulleys are arranged higher than the
carrying idlers. If need be, increase distance between pulley and weigher
influential zone.

Rule 7: Accurately align idler sets in the weigher influential zone.

Sets with offset idlers (viewed from above) have the potential to
adversely affect measuring accuracy.
" Arrange carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone elevated by 3 to 5 mm.
" Secure aligned carrying idler sets against displacement and lowering.
" Mean the carrying idlers' out-of-round tolerance during alignment.
" Maximum admissible out-of-round tolerance = 0.2 mm; identify location of

mean out-of-round tolerance on idler shell on either side.

" Ensure that the spindles of the weighed and limiting idlers are perfectly level
viewed from above.
(also applies to V-shaped belts)
" Weighed and limiting idler sets with offset spindles do not produce any exact
weigh span.

Rule 8: Ensure that the belt stringers are mounted on a solid and level base.
" Ensure that the belt stringers impact points in the weigher influential zone are
welded.
" Select belt stringers and support so that the carrying idler alignment is
secured (see Rule 6). If need be, reinforce or shim belt stringers accordingly.
" Wire-rope-suspended belt conveyors are unsuitable for the installation of belt
weighers.
" Avoid vibrations in the weigher influential zone.
" Always install belt tracking idlers for correction of belt run outside the weigher
influential zone.

Rule 9: Provide gravity take-up.
" The potential measuring error increases along with varying belt tension.
Rule 10: Safeguard your system against wind, weather, extreme temperature
variations and vibrations.
" Wind falsifies the measurement.
" Direct insolation can excessively raise load cell temperature.
" Moisture, ice and snow give rise to material build-ups and cause misalignment
in the weigher influential zone.
" One-sided insolation of belt weigher has the potential to cause twisting and
temperature drifts.
" Protect foundation from strong vibrations.

Single-idler Belt Weigher BEM
4 Single-idler Belt Weigher BEM

Type: Fixation by welding
4.1 Installation Instructions

4.1.1 Items Supplied
Documentation
Manual BV-H2190
Dimensioned BEM drawing no. F008 401
drawing
Guideline 'Guideline for Storage and Handling of Components and
Machines Supplied' (BV-R2000 AA)
Mechanical Equipment
Qty Type Name Comments
1 pc. Measuring module with clamping plate R.H. type
1 pc. Measuring module with clamping plate L.H. type
1 pc. Speed transducer (*) Optional
with friction wheel and rocker
1 pc. Terminal box
for summation of load cell, transducer and weighing
electronics cables
1 set Compression screws Short
1 set Compression screws Long
1 set Shims Limiting blocks
for alignment of carrying idler sets in weigher influential Thick shims
zone Shims
(*) See 'Speed Transducer (Option)' item.
4.1.2 Installation Prerequisites
SAFETY HINT:
Ensure work protection at this device by using it as originally intended only, in
accordance with supply specification, and having it installed by skilled
technicians.
" Plan arrangement of weighed idler set in belt conveyor in accordance with
the 10 RULES. The latter ensure that the measuring accuracy will be
obtained. See 'Planning-in Hints (The 10 Rules)' item.
" The belt weigher is suitable for integration into belt conveyors in accordance
with DIN 22107 with 400-1400 mm belt widths, without any modification of belt
stringers.
" After adjustment of belt stringers, the belt weigher can also be integrated into
other types of conveyor.

4.1.3 Displacing Measuring Modules

4.1.4 Installation
4.1.4.1 Prerequisites
" Determine belt weigher location using the 10 RULES.

Make sure all checklist criteria have been kept:
Catchword Rules
Location in conveyor 1 2 3 4 5 10
Stability 78
Belt tension 9
Requirements of carrying idler sets 4 5 6
(profile, out-of-round tolerance)
" If the belt has already been applied, release tension, if need be, and lift off
from carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone using appropriate lifting
tackle. Raise belt so far that you can plug the measuring modules onto the
belt stringers at the proper time.
" Further prerequisites:
o If necessary, ready additional supports for use on belt stringers and in

measuring module area (see "Displacing Belt Weigher Measuring
Modules' item).
o Optional: use hole pattern if the speed transducer is to be bolted in

place (instead of being welded on).
o Debur ties of carrying idler sets in support points.
" For alignment of carrying idler sets in the weigher influential zone as well as
for later alignment and fixing of sets, use the parts of the shim set supplied.
" Mount hoist used to be able to raise belt in mounting area.
" Remove the carrying idler seat to be used for weighed idler set.

4.1.4.2 Mounting Measuring Modules
" Lift both measuring modules with proper sides onto belt stringers in the
provided displacement point. (Transit weight per measuring module = approx.
20 kg).
" Align both measuring modules square to belt stringers.
To perform welding work, and in order to protect the load cell,

connect the minus pole direct to the point of welding.
" Attach measuring modules to belt stringers using the clamping plates, and
align vertically using the compression bolts.
" Use the short or the long compression bolt sets, as the steel channel of the
belt conveyor may be situated.
" Shift carrying idler set on measuring module brackets.

Make sure they are mounted square to belt stringers.
" Evenly set measures H to 3 to 5 mm. This is the space between carrying idler
set bottom edge and belt stringers top edge.
Measure H serves as reference for the alignment of the two carrying

idler sets approach and retreat of weighed idler set.

" Use the compression bolts to carefully adjust the brackets for two-sided
support on the tie of the carrying idler set over the entire surface.
" When adjusting brackets for measure H, carefully tighten the

compression/tension bolts.
Secure all nuts using counter nuts.
" Mount transit restraints in depicted location to save them for later use.
To secure clamping, weld measuring modules in place in the area of the

non-painted surfaces of the module base plates.

4.1.4.3 Mounting Carrying Idler Sets
" Arrange carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone elevated by 3 to 5 mm.
" Place prepared carrying idler sets (troughing profile, out-of-round tolerance)
on belt stringers using the shims supplied.
" Align all idler sets in the weigher influential zone (also consider the adjacent
non-elevated carrying idler sets):
o Ensure squareness to belt stringers.
o Align sets relative to one another.
o Observe preset double idler spacing between the carrying idler sets
adjacent to the weighed idler set.
o VERY IMPORTANT: Make sure the two carrying idler sets adjacent to
the weighed idler set are parallel.
" Provisionally bolt carrying idler sets onto belt stringers.

4.1.4.4 Cabling
" Mount cable junction box on clamping plate of relevant measuring module on
the selected side. Use the provided mounting holes.
" For cable junction, please refer to the instructions given in Weighing
Electronics manual.
Also observe the following:
o Lead cables of load cells and (optional) speed transducer to cable
junction box (terminal box) in the protected areas of the belt stringers.
ATTENTION: Observe cable end lengths:
Load cell = 5 m
Transducer = 6 m
o Never shorten ready-to-connect cable ends; if need be, arrange in
loops.
o Pay heed to the local regulations.
o Check to see that the cable connector of the (optional) speed

transducer does not affect the positive contact of the friction wheel
with the return belt.
4.1.5 Aligning
" Align the carrying idler sets arranged in the weigher influential zone elevated
by 3 to 5 mm for max. 0.2 mm tolerance.
o Remove all idlers from carrying idler sets 1 and 2 and from the
weighed idler set.
o Tension six (*) 5-mm steel wires.
o Insert first idler in one of carrying idler sets 2, and align as described
below.
o Align one idler after the other terminating with the idlers of the
weighed idler set.
" Align every idler side with meaned out-of-round tolerance (mark on idler shell
turned towards the steel wires) by adjusting the spindle seat of the idler in the
carrying idler set on the particular idler side.
o To lower, refile idler side,
o To raise, shim idler side, e.g. by deposit welding with subsequent

refiling.

(*) Flat belt conveyors can be aligned with 2 steel wires only.
" Upon alignment, ensure that
o carrying idler sets adjacent to the weighed idler set are parallel
o all carrying idler sets are square to belt stringers in the weigher
influential zone
o idler spacing = 2 x L 5 mm.
" Affix carrying idler sets to belt stringers by welding shims and limiting blocks
in place.

" Before removing the steel wires, check bolted connections for tight fit, and re-
check idler alignment.
" Ensure that belt stringers and measuring module areas affected by welding
and other work are well protected from corrosion.
4.1.6 Acquiring Effective Platform Length

When installation is complete, acquire the effective platform length.
Measure spindle spacings a1 and a2 on

either side of your belt conveyor and
calculate effective platform length 'Ing' as
mean value:
Enter acquired value with proper unit into

the weighing electronics as shown in the
Electrical Equipment manual.

4.2 Operating Instructions

The measuring modules are designed on the principle of leaf spring parallel guidance.
Attached to the belt stringers, the modules support the base profile with load cell and
the leaf spring parallel guidance.
The leaf spring parallel guidance, in turn, supports the weighing profile transmitting the
measured load from the bracket of the carrying idler set onto the load cell without lever
ratio.
An overload protection with deflection for measurement S protects the load cell from
overload peaks (S = deflection for measurement from load cell to overload protection).
4.2.1 Maintaining Belt Weigher
SAFETY HINT:
Before performing maintenance, inspection and/or repair work, remove and
lock out power to the belt weigher.

4.2.1.1 Maintaining
" Regularly remove material build-ups in the earmarked area between

(1) tie of weighed idler set and hood of measuring modules
(2) tie of weighed idler set and belt stringers.
Material build-ups in the earmarked areas can cause shunt forces to

occur which adversely affects belt weigher accuracy.
" Do not remove build-ups recurring in other areas of the weighed idler set
because of the associated change in tare.
Measuring modules need not be maintained.
4.2.1.2 Inspecting
Inspect belt weigher each time your conveyor system is inspected.
4.2.1.2.1 Ensuring Proper Alignment of Carrying Idler Sets
(See also the "Alignment" paragraph of the 'Installation" item.)
" Raise conveyor belt in weigher influential zone.
" Align carrying idler sets arranged in weigher influential zone elevated by 3 to 5
mm to max. 0.2 mm tolerance.
o Remove all idlers from carrying idler sets 1 and 2 and from weighed
idler set.
o Exchange all idlers featuring an out-of-round tolerance over 0.2 mm.
o Remove materials build-ups from all idlers.
below.
weighed idler set.

o To lower, refile idler side,

refiling.
" Keep the carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone free from build-ups.
4.2.1.2.2 Checking Leaf Spring Parallel Guidance
The leaf spring thickness is adjusted to

the rated capacities of the load cells
used:
Rated capacity Leaf spring thickness
60 kg
100 kg 1 mm
150 kg
300 kg 2 mm
In perfect condition, both leaf springs must be totally plane. The upper leaf spring is
loaded by tensile forces; the lower, by compressive forces.
Damage to leaf springs with buckling of the lower leaf springs can occur only upon
measuring modules overload. In this case, the weighed idler set is no longer square to
conveyor belt.

4.2.1.2.3 Checking Load Cell Signal

" Ensure that check is performed by a skilled measuring and control
engineer !
" Ensure that the weighing electronics is ready to operate and the
conveyor cut off.
" Check load cell measured load

signal (totals output signal of both
load cells) in the load range
between preload and preload +
belt load using commercial
weights.
(For load cell rated capacity [kg]
and characteristic value [mV/V],
see load cell type plate.)
" Display load cell signal of preload.
" Stagger commercial weights on
weighed idler set, at best with
conveyor belt removed.
" Record load diagram as shown on
the left.
The measuring points connecting
line should result in a straight line.
If you note bigger deviations from straight line, follow these steps.
4.2.1.2.4 Checking Load Cell
" To begin with, stagger commercial weights on one side of the belt weigher.
" Record load diagram.
" Repeat on other side of belt weigher.
" Result: the measuring module featuring a big deviation from the straight line
requires further checking.
" Repeat the above steps with load cell connecting lines disconnected.
" Any damaged measuring module should now be clearly identified.
NOTE:
Errors in measurement can also be caused by torsional forces in belt stringers
transferred to the measuring modules via the weighed idler set. For reliable diagnosis,
remove the weighed idler set.
" Remove counter nuts and nuts of tension bolt.

ATTENTION: Mark side position to ensure proper reassembly.
" Check individual measuring modules by suspension of test weights, and a

damaged measuring module, if any, can be clearly identified.
Normally, a damaged measuring module cannot be repaired at site since devices and
gauges are required for reassembly. Therefore, mount new measuring module as
described below.

4.2.1.3 Repairing Belt Weigher
Replace damaged measuring

module.
Remove load cell cable.
Unscrew the 3 fixing bolts of

the base profile and remove
measuring module from
module base plate.
Mount new measuring

module as supplied.
Any new measuring module comes with a transit restraint protecting the load cell.
Carefully lift weighing profile and remove load cell transit restraint from the side.
Carefully lower weighing profile to prevent it from hitting the contact plate of the
measured load application.
Make sure the weighed idler set easily centers in bores when being plugged into the
weighing profiles on both sides.

Carefully run load cell cable and ensure protection to IP 65 of cable junction box.
Align idler sets as described at the 'Ensuring Proper Alignment of Carrying Idler Sets'
item.

Single-idler Belt Weigher BEP
5 Single-idler Belt Weigher BEP

Documentation
Manual BV-H2190
Dimensioned BEP drawing no. D607 522
drawing
Machines Supplied'
(BV-R2000 AA)
1 pc. Weighed idler set
2 pcs. Cross-member
1 pc. Terminal box
for summation of load cell, transducer and
weighing electronics cables
1 pc. Load cell
PWS type (platform load cell) or
VBB type (shear beam) or
RT.. type (ring-torsion load cell)
1 set Test weight receptors (**), comprising Optional
2 telescopic tubes
1 tubular cross-member For suspension of test weights
2 test weights
for alignment of carrying idler sets in Thick shims
weigher influential zone Shims
(*) see 'Speed Transducer (Option)' item
(**) see 'Test Weight Receptors (Option)' item

SAFETY HINT:
technicians.
with DIN 22107 with 400-1400 mm belt widths, without any modification of belt
stringers.
5.1.3 Installation
" Modify belt stringers as shown in the relevant dimensioned drawing.
" Displace weighed idler set using two cross-beams to DIN 1026.

5.1.3.1 Prerequisites:

Catchword Rules
Stability 78
Belt tension 9
" If the belt has already been applied, raise by at least 500 mm in the weigher
influential zone using appropriate lifting tackle, so that you can insert the belt
weigher from the side and align it at the proper time.
" Make sure the profiles of the carrying idler sets are identically shaped, so as
to provide the prerequisites specified at the 'Aligning' item.
Place carrying idler sets on a levelling plate and align using a ruler in place of
tensioned steel wires as described at the 'Aligning' item.
ATTENTION! Identify the locations so as to protect carrying idler sets and

idlers from being confused when being mounted as described at the 'Mounting
Carrying Idler Sets' item.
" Debur ties of carrying idler sets in support points.
" Shim carrying idler sets using the elements of the shim set supplied. Arrange
the carrying idler sets in the weigher influential zones elevated by 3 to 5 mm
as described at the 'Mounting Carrying Idler Sets' item .

" Recess the ends of the tie of the weighed idler set.
" To secure carrying idler alignment:
o Secure foundation against settlement.
o Anchor stringer supports in foundation.
o Provide reinforced belt stringers or additional supports, if required.
o Weld belt stringers impact points all around.
" Remove return belt cover plates in the weigher influential zone, or
" remove return belt cover plates in weighed idler set area, and disengage them
in carrying idler set support points.

5.1.3.2 Mounting Weighed Idler Set
To insert load cell (PWS, VBB or RT..) in weighed idler set:
" Remove transit restraint from weighed idler set.
" Carefully raise weighing yoke by approx. 5 mm and shim.
" Remove dummy plate.
" Insert load cell (PWS, VBB or RT..) complete with pre-mounted mount.
NOTE: The design of load transducers PWS and VBB differs from that of the
load cell RT. The operational overall height and the load transmission
elements are identical to the load cell RT. Fastening is done in the same spot
with a bolt M8 and a spring washer.

" PWS and VBB types only:
Ensure that no shunt forces occur between weighing yoke

and load cell; this would falsify the weighing result.
To do so, turn load cell so (angle W) that the screw heads cannot
come into contact with the weighing yoke. Angle W is of no import
for the weighing result.
" Carefully center load cell (PWS, VBB or RT..) relative to the load button, and
bolt in place.
Never grease load buttons of weighing yoke and load cell but clean
using a soft cloth.
" Carefully lower weighing yoke.
To perform welding work, and in order to protect the load cell,

connect the minus pole direct to the point of welding.
" To install weighed idler set, loosely bolt set to cross-members and place onto
belt stringers with correct side in direction of travel.

" Align weighed idler set square to belt stringers as specified in dimensioned
drawing and bolt:
" Weighed idler set to cross-members, and
" Cross-members to belt stringers.
" Arrange carrying idler sets in weigher influential zone elevated by 3 to 5 mm.
onto the premade shims on belt stringers.
" Place weighed idler set on its height-adjustable receptors and protect from
overbalancing.
" Align all idler sets in the weigher influential zone (also consider the adjacent
non-elevated carrying idler sets):
o VERY IMPORTANT: Make sure the two limiting idler sets adjacent to

5.1.3.4 Aligning
" Align the carrying idler sets arranged in the weigher influential zone elevated
by 3 to 5 mm for max. 0.2 mm tolerance.
o Remove all idlers from carrying idler sets 1 and 2 and from the
weighed idler set.
o Tension six (*) 0.5 mm steel wires.
below.
weighed idler set.
o To lower, refile idler side.

refiling.

influential zone
" Affix carrying idler sets to belt stringers by welding shims and limiting blocks
in place.
" Affix weighed idler set by welding it to its receptors.

5.1.3.5 Acquiring Effective Platform Length

When installation is complete, acquire the effective platform length.
Measure spindle spacings a1 and a2 on

either side of your belt conveyor and
calculate effective platform length 'Ing' as
mean value:

5.1.4 Cabling
" For details, please refer to the instructions given in Weighing Electronics
manual, and observe the following additional hints:
" Lead cables of load cells and (optional) speed transducer to cable junction
box mounted in a safe location.
o Load cell = 5 m
o Transducer = 6 m
" Never shorten ready-to-connect cable ends; if need be, arrange in loops.
" Connect (optional) speed transducer as shown the in circuit diagrams

supplied.
" Attach cables to stationary parts of construction directly approach and retreat
of connectors using sleeves. In-between, run cables in ducts or use sleeves.
" Check to see that the cable connector of the (optional) speed transducer does
not affect the positive contact of the friction wheel with the return belt.


The weighed idler set is designed on the principle of leaf spring parallel guidance.
Bolted to the two cross-members in three points, a rigid support frame serves for
accommodation of the load cell and the leaf spring parallel guidance used to restrain
the weighing yoke. Mounted on the load cell, the weighing yoke supports the weighed
idler set.
The SCHENCK load cell is hermetically sealed and service-free.
For type, please see load cell type plate and Belt Weigher Spec Sheet.
Explosion Protection
If the belt weigher operates in hazardous areas, Zones 1, 2 or 11 as
specified by DIN 57165, or VDE 0165, the load cell is protected to EEx
ibIIC T6.
5.2.1 Maintaining
If the weighing accuracy gives rise to doubt, first check the carrying idler sets for
proper alignment:
" Tension six 0.5-mm steel wires over the cleaned carrying idlers.
" Align individual carrying idlers as described at the 'Aligning' item.
" Replace idlers featuring an out-of-round tolerance > 0.2 mm.
" Keep carrying idlers in the weighing influential zone free from build-ups.
5.2.2 Inspecting and Repairing

" Proceed as described at the 'Maintaining' item.

5.2.2.1 Replacing Load Cell
(if required)
" Disconnect load cell cable in terminal box and remove from fixing points.
" Raise weighing yoke by approx. 5 mm and shim.
" Unscrew fixing bolt from load cell mount and remove from weighed idler set
from the side.
" Handle new load cell as described in the attached brochure.
" If need be, also replace load button before installing the new load cell.
" Introduce load cell complete with pre-installed mount.

(With PWS types: observe the 'Mounting Weighed Idler Set' item.)
" Carefully center load cell relative to load button, and bolt in place.
" If need be, align weighed idler set relative to the carrying idler sets in the
weigher influential zone as described at the 'Aligning' item.
" Run and affix load cell cable.

5.2.2.2 Replacing Leaf Springs
(if required)
" Always replace all 4 leaf springs.
" Ensure that the connecting surfaces of the parts to be bolted are metallically
clean and deburred.
" Before tightening bolts in steps, align weighing yoke
o centrically to the load cell load button
o vertically to the load cell load button
o axis-parallel to the weighed idler set support frame.
" Align weighed idler set relative to the carrying idler sets in the weigher
influential zone as described at the 'Aligning' item.
ATTENTION!
" Check effective platform length.
" If necessary, correct value in weighing electronics.

Single-idler Belt Weigher BED
6 Single-idler Belt Weigher BED

Documentation
Manual BV-H2190
Dimensioned BED drawing no. D608 600
drawing
Machines Supplied'
(BV-R2000 AA)
2 pcs. Weighing section
2 pcs. Cross-member
1 pc. Terminal box
2 pcs. Load cell
RT.. type (ring torsion load cell) or
VBB type (shear beam)
2 pcs. Test weight receptor (**) Optional
For suspension of test weights
(*) see 'Speed Transducer (Option)' item
(**) see 'Test Weight Receptors (Option)' item
SAFETY HINT:
technicians.

with DIN 22107 with 1600-2000 mm belt widths, without any modification of
belt stringers.
6.1.3 Installation
" Modify belt stringers as shown in the relevant dimensioned drawing.
" Displace weighed idler set using two cross-beams to DIN 1026.
6.1.3.1 Prerequisites

Catchword Rules
Stability 78
Belt tension 9
weigher from the side and align it at the proper time.
to provide the prerequisites given at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler Sets' item.
Place carrying idler set on a levelling plate and align using a ruler in place of
tensioned steel wires as described at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler Sets' item.



in weighed idler set support points.

6.1.3.2 Mounting Belt Weigher on Belt Stringers
" Install the two identical cross-members with distance 'A' = approx. 1080 mm in
the provided location on belt weigher and protect from overbalancing.
" Lift weighing sections and place between cross-members with correct sides in
direction of travel.
o Bolt loosely to cross-members, and
o adjust in height using the set screws so that the four holes are flush
with the cross-member bottom edge.
" Remove cross-member fixations to be able to bolt cross-members to the

weighing modules. (Unscrew again upon belt weigher alignment as described
at the "Aligning Carrying Idler Sets' item).

6.1.3.2.1 Mounting Load Cells
Insert load cells in weighing sections.
" Cut transit restraint straps and remove the dummy plates replacing the load
cells in the weighing sections.
" Lift compression bolts using a hex socket head spanner s = 6 mm so far that
you can insert the load cells from below complete with pre-assembled mounts.
Never grease load cell load buttons and compression bolt. Clean
using a soft cloth.
" Carefully bolt load cells in place using the central fixing bolts secured with
spring washers.
" Place a ruler along the leaf spring and set surfaces A and B to 0.5 mm
difference in height (compression bolt resting in place) using the compression
bolts on both weighing sections.
" Immediately secure each compression bolt using a counter nut (SW 24).
NOTE: The design of force transducers PWS and VBB differs from that of the

To perform welding work, and in order to protect the load cell, connect
the minus pole direct to the point of welding.
" Align belt weigher accurate and square to belt stringers, and bolt cross-
members to belt stringers.
" Arrange carrying idler sets in weigher influential zone elevated by 3 to 5 mm.
on the premade shims on belt stringers.
overbalancing.

" Align all idler sets in the influential zone (also consider the adjacent non-
elevated carrying idler sets):
6.1.3.4 Aligning Carrying Idler Sets
" Align the carrying idler sets arranged in the influential zone elevated by 3 to 5
mm to max. 0.2 mm tolerance.
o Remove all idlers from carrying idler sets 1 and 2, however, not from
the weighed idler set.
below.
o Align one idler after the other, terminating the procedure without the
idlers of the weighed idler set.

refiling.

6.1.3.5 Aligning Weighed Idler Set
" Lightly unscrew bolted connections between cross-member and weighing

sections and cross-member and belt stringers and remove the fixation
between weighed idler set and receptors. Now you can level weighing
sections and thus the weighed idler set relative to the tensioned steel wires
with finger-tip control so as to be free from tension.

" To do so, use the set screws on weighing sections.
ATTENTION!
o Ensure that the transversal and longitudinal axes of the weighing

sections have the same level. Check to see that the 4 alignment holes
are in the same position relative to the cross-members.
o Also ensure that the tie of the weighed idler set rests on the two
weighed idler receptors over their entire width.
Provide a 'spy' ( = 0.2 mm thick).
" To ensure proper alignment, re-check all bolted connections for tight fit, and
set screws for the rpesence of counter nuts.
" Align weighed idler set as described at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler Sets' item.
Ensure that
influential zone
" Affix carrying idler sets to belt stringers by welding limiting blocks and shims
in place.
" Attach the weighed idler set by four approx. 30 mm welds at the corners of
both weighed idler sets.


When installation is complete, acquire the effective platform length 'lng'.
Measure spindle spacings on either side of

your belt conveyor and calculate as mean
value:

6.1.4 Cabling
o Load cell = 5 m
o Transducer = 6 m
" Connect (optional) speed transducer as shown the in the circuit diagrams
supplied.


The belt weigher is designed on the principle of leaf spring parallel guidance.
Two weighing sections each equipped with a load cell measure the load exerted from
the weighed idler set direct.
The support frame of every weighing section accommodates the load cell and the leaf
spring parallel guidance used to restrain the weighed idler receptors.
The SCHENCK load cells of the RT.. type are hermetically sealed and service-free.
For exact type, see load cell type plate or Belt Weigher Spec Sheet.
6.2.1 Maintaining
proper alignment:
" Raise conveyor belt in weigher influential zone by approx. 500 mm.
" Align individual carrying idlers as described at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler
Sets' item.

" Keep carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone free from build-ups.

(if required)
" Unscrew fixing bolt from load cell mount.
" Raise weighed idler receptors by approx. 5 mm, secure in this position, and
remove load cell from weighing section from below.

" In case of doubt, also replace the compression bolt before mounting the new
load cell.
ATTENTION! Before replacing the compression bolt, always
o adjust weighed idler set in height as described at the 'Mounting Load

Cells' item
o align weighed idler set as described at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler

Sets' item.
" Introduce load cell complete with pre-installed mount and bolt in place using
fixing bolt and spring washer.
" Carefully lower weighed idler set.
influential zone as described at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler Sets' item.
(if required)
" Always replace all 4 leaf springs.
clean and deburred.
" Before tightening bolts in steps, align the weighed idler receptors of both
weighing sections relative to the weighed idler set:
o centrically
o vertically to the load cell load button.
influential zone as described at the 'Aligning Carrying Idler Sets' item.

Multi-idler Belt Weigher BMP
7 Multi-idler Belt Weigher BMP

Documentation
Manual BV-H2190
Dimensioned Type BMP drawing no. 676 300
drawing Type 2BMP drawing no. 677 954
Type BMP2 drawing no. 677 700
Machines Supplied' (BV-R2000 AA)
1 pc. Weighed idler set (*)
2 pcs. Side part (*)
2 pcs. Weighed idler receptor (*)
2 pcs. Cross-member (*)
1 set Screws
1 pc. Terminal box
1 pc. Load cell
RT.. type (ring-torsion load cell) or
VBB type (shear beam)
2 pcs. Test weight receptors (***) Optional
(telescopic tubes) For suspension of test weights
(*) pre-assembled in double number when two weighed idler sets are installed
(**) see 'Speed Transducer (Option)' item
(***) see 'Test Weight Receptors (Option)' item
SAFETY HINT:
technicians.

with DIN 22107.
7.1.3 Installation
Install one or two weighed idler set(s), as the belt width may be.
" Check against dimensioned drawing to see if belt stringers must be modified.
" Thoroughly follow the given installation instructions in order to ensure the belt
weigher's measuring accuracy. This is of special importance if your belt
weigher is going to be stamped.
7.1.3.1 Prerequisites:

Catchword Rules
Stability 78
Belt tension 9
weigher from the side and align at the proper time.
to provide the prerequisites given at the 'Aligning' item.
Place carrying idler set on a levelling plate and align using a ruler in place of
tensioned steel wires as described at the 'Aligning' item.



in weighed idler set support points.
7.1.3.2 Mounting Weighed Idler Set(s)
First mount load cell(s).
" Remove transit restraint angle (painted red), twist and bolt in place.
" Turn in compression bolt (SW 17) with counter nut (SW 24) until the fitting
dimension of load cell with mount is approximately reached.

" Carefully raise weighing yoke against leaf spring force by max. 5 mm to be
able to insert the load cell with pre-assembled mount. Center fixing bolts and
spring washer relative to compression bolt and bolt in place. Carefully lower
weighing yoke.
" Place a ruler along one of the leaf springs and set surfaces A and B to 0.5
mm difference in height (compression bolt resting in place) using the
compression bolt.
" Secure compression bolt using a counter nut.

NOTE: The design of force transducers PWS and VBB differs from that of the
To perform welding work, and in order to protect the load cell, connect
the minus pole direct to the point of welding.

Assemble weighed idler set; first bolt loosely outside the belt stringers.
" Belt weigher with one weighed idler set
" Belt weighers with two weighed idler sets normally come pre-assembled and
aligned.

Detail of 'A':
Mount weighed idler set(s) on belt stringers with correct side in direction of travel.
" Belt weighers with one weighed idler set, first loosely bolted.
" Align weighed idler set(s) as shown in dimensioned drawing and bolt the 4
screw heads in place on belt stringers.
" Place rulers in measuring positions [1] and [2].
" Level surfaces C-D, and E-F relative to each other using set screws (4) and
(5), however, without twisting the weighed idler set(s), i.e. ensure that
distance 'H' is almost the same in the 4 corner points.
" If only one weighed idler set is installed, additionally tighted bolts (1), (2) and
(3). If necessary, mean the difference in height between surfaces C-D, or E-F,
within the hole pattern of bolts (1) and (2) and set distance 'H' anew.

" Arrange carrying idler sets in weighing influential zone elevated by 3 to 5 mm.
on the premade shims on belt stringers.
overbalancing.
" Align all idler sets in the influential zone (also consider the adjacent non-
elevated carrying idler sets):
o Observe preset triple idler spacing between the carrying idler sets
7.1.3.4 Aligning
" Align the weighed and carrying idler sets arranged in the weigher influential
zone elevated by 3 to 5 mm to max. 0.2 mm tolerance.
o Remove all idlers from carrying idler sets 1 and 2.
o Set weighed idler set with nuts (4) and (5) to distance H + X, roughly
aligning the weighed idler set relative to carrying idler sets 3.

o Remove idlers from weighed idler sets.
below.
o Align idlers one after the other, terminating with the idlers of the
weighed idler set.
refiling.

o all carrying idler sets in the weigher influential zone are square to belt
stringers
" Affix carrying idler sets to belt stringers by welding limiting blocks and shims in
place.
" Attach the weighed idler set by welding it to the weighed idler receptors.

When installation is complete, acquire the effective platform length 'lng'.
Measure spindle spacings on either side of your belt conveyor and compute as mean
values:
a = (spindle spacing side a1 + side a2) / 2 =
__________
b = (spindle spacing side b1 + side b2) / 2 =

__________
c = (spindle spacing side c1 + side c2) / 2 =

__________

Effective platform length:
Enter acquired value with proper

unit into the weighing electronics
as shown in the Electrical
Equipment manual.
7.1.4 Cabling
o Load cell = 5 m
o Transducer = 6 m
" Connect (optional) speed transducer as shown the in the circuit diagrams
supplied.


Depending on belt width, one or two weighed idler set(s) are available. The weighed
idler set(s) are designed on the principle of leaf spring parallel guidance.
Bolted to the two cross-members in three points, a rigid support frame serves for
accommodation of load cell and leaf spring parallel guidance used to restrain the
weighing yoke. Mounted on the load cell, the weighing yoke supports the weighed
idler set.
The SCHENCK load cells of the RT.. type are hermetically sealed and service-free.
For exact type designation, see load cell type plate or Belt Weigher Spec Sheet.
Explosion Protection
If the belt weigher operates in hazardous areas, Zones 1, 2 or 11 as
specified by DIN 57165, or VDE 0165, the load cell is protected to EEx
ibIIC T6.
7.2.1 Maintaining
proper alignment:
" Align individual carrying idlers as described at the 'Aligning' item.
" Keep carrying idlers in the weighing influential zone free from build-ups.


(if required)
" Unscrew fixing bolt of load cell mount.
" Raise weighing yoke by approx. 5 mm, secure in this position, and remove
load cell from weighed idler set from below.
" In case of doubt, also replace the compression bolt before mounting the new
load cell.
ATTENTION! Before replacing the compression bolt:
o Adjust weighing yoke in height as described at the 'Mounting Weighed

Idler Set' item.
o Align weighed idler sets as described at the 'Aligning' item.
" Introduce load cell complete with pre-installed mount, carefully center load cell
relative to compression bolt, and bolt in place.
" If need be, align weighed idler set relative to the carrying idler sets in the
weigher influential zone as described at the 'Aligning' item.

(if required)
" Always replace all 4, or 8, leaf springs.
clean and deburred.
" Before tightening bolts in steps, align weighing yoke
o centrically to the load cell load button
o vertically to the load cell load button
o axis parallel to the weighed idler set support frame.
influential zone as described at the 'Aligning' item.
ATTENTION!
" Check effective platform length.
" If necessary, correct value in weighing electronics.

Speed Transducer (Option)
8 Speed Transducer (Option)
8.1 FGA20-RSLE Type

8.1.1 Installation Instructions
SAFETY HINTS:
" Ensure work protection at this device by having it installed by skilled
technicians and using it as originally intended only, in accordance with
supply specification, and by operating it in accordance with the
suggestions to follow.
" Ensure that the rocker joint cannot detach from belt stringers and
damage your belt weigher.
8.1.1.1 Installing Speed Transducer
The speed transducer of the FGA 20-RSLE type equipped with friction wheel and
rocker is designed to acquire the belt speed at the inside of the return belt.

" Mount speed transducer on weighed idler set direct or max. 5 m away.
" Avoid vibration of the return belt in speed transducer area. Arrange return idler
towards transducer in return belt direction of travel as shown in sketch.
" Ensure 1 mm maximum out-of-round tolerance of return idler.
" Remove build-ups from return idler and/or avoid build-ups, e.g. by using
rubber-coated idlers.
" To avoid slip between friction wheel and belt, keep belt interior clean using
appropriate devices, so as to avoid errors in measurement.
8.1.1.1.1 Further Installation Instructions
" Carefully align speed transducer with friction wheel relative to belt run. Slip
causes wear of the running ring.
" Securely bolt speed transducer with joint to the provided location on weighed
idler set or belt stringers or weld in place; ensure that rocker joint does not
detach from belt stringers and damage your belt conveyor.
" To ensure positive contact of friction wheel on return belt, check to see that
o loops of sensor cable in rocker spindle area are sufficiently long
o rocker joint freely moves
o friction wheel is perfectly level with return belt.
8.1.1.2 Cabling
" Connect cables as described in the Weighing Electronics manual and observe
the following additional hints:
" Run load cell and speed transducer cables to terminal box supplied using
cable ducts. Mount terminal box in a safe location.
ATTENTION!
Observe cable end lengths:
Load cell = 5 m
Transducer = 6 m
o Never shorten ready-to-connect cable ends; if need be, arrange in
loops.
o Pay heed to the local regulations.
Check to see that the speed transducer cable does not affect
the positive contact of friction wheel and return belt and
does not interfere with the rocker spindle.

8.1.2 Operating Instructions

Rolling on the interior of the return belt, the webs of the friction wheel dampen an
inductive proximity switch, thus causing the latter to output a pulse frequency
proportional to belt speed.
The number of pulses per belt meter is the speed characteristic vs-K used to
acquire the belt weigher's feed rate.
Enter this value into the weighing electronics in form of a parameter; for details, see
Weighing Electronics manual.
8.1.2.1 FGA 20-RSlE for Legal-for-trade Belt Weighers
The counter pulses of the second switch are

offset with respect to those of the first switch
by measure 'O'. The weighing electronics
continuously compares counter results and
reports error when a deviation is detected. T
is the pulse interval.
8.1.2.2 Maintenance
" Ensure free movement of the rocker joint; if necessary, dismount and clean.
" Check friction wheel rubber ring for wear, and replace if necessary.
" Ensure positive contact with return belt.

8.1.2.3 Inspection and Repair
Measure 'X': Mild steel variant (galvanized) = 2 ... 3 mm
Stainless steel variant = 1 ... 1.5 mm
" The friction wheel is mounted in sealed grooved ball bearings lubricated for
life. If you note bearing damage, replace speed transducer.
" When replacing proximity switch, ensure proper switching distance.
" When running sensor cable, observe the instructions given at the 'Installation
Instructions' item.
8.2 FGA24A Type

8.2.1 Installation Suggestions
SAFETY HINT:
Ensure work protection at this device by having it installed by skilled

technicians and using it as originally intended only, in accordance with supply
specification, and by operating it in accordance with the suggestions to follow.
The speed transducer of the FGA 24 A type is designed for measuring the belt speed
on the belt conveyor tail pulley.

8.2.1.1 Suitability
Make sure the

following prerequisite
is given:
DTr = Pulley diameter in [m]
tbelt = Belt thickness in [m]
Smallest frequency the weighing electronics can measure ("

fmin = 0.04 Hz with INTECONT and DISOCONT,
10% safety allowance for running message, etc. included)
24 = Number of pulses per pole wheel / belt pulley revolution
Related to the pulley diameters below and assuming 10 mm belt thickness, the
following minimum belt speeds Vbelt result:
Belt conveyor Comments
as per DIN
DTr [m] 0.200 0.250 0.315 0.400 0.500 0.630
22101
Vbelt [m/s] 0.15 0.19 0.23 0.30 0.37 0.46
determines
calibration
vs-characteristic [I/m] 36.38 29.38 23.51 18.63 14.98 11.94
accuracy
(*)
(*) Having been computed with 10 mm assumed belt thickness, the vs-characteristics
in table can only serve as mean values .

Decisive for feed rate determination

is the vs-characteristic (number of
pulses per belt meter) to be
computed using the formula on the
right, to be then entered into the
weighing electronics.
8.2.1.2 Mounting Pole Wheel
Best mount pole wheel on webs in the belt pulley protected area. Weld or bolt in place.
The pole wheel is equipped with a centre hole d=8mm serving for adjustment to the
required diameter. Ensure min. 20 mm distance from pulley bottom in order to prevent
the pulse quality from being affected.
8.2.1.3 Mounting Proximity Switch
Mount proximity switch on belt stringers using the mounting angle. The provided hole
pattern allows for universal arrangement; two possibilities are depicted in the figure.
Arrange switch centrally to pole wheel windows. Protect the switch cables from
mechanical damage by using cable ducts.

Test Weight Suspension (Option)
9 Test Weight Suspension (Option)

The weighed idler sets of the BEP, BED and BMP types are prepared for manual
suspension of test weights.
The test weight suspension lets you simulate the belt weigher's operating points with
the use of test weights in place of a material load.
ATTENTION
" Ensure that test weights are accurate to 1.
" Check to see that the weight value display of every single weight is easy-to-
read.
" Ensure that number and assignment of single weights are clearly identified.
" Remove test weights after test weighing.
" Select test weights in the range of 50 % to 80 % of belt load.
Check to see that no material is present in weighed idler set area.
Maintenance
" The test weight suspension is free from maintenance and requires no special
inspection.
" Before every test operation, remove lumpy material possibly jammed between
weighing sections. Do not remove overaged build-ups from belt weigher
components; this would only cause taring errors.

9.1 BEP, BMP Types

" Turn out threaded pins on either side of weigher, so that the telecopic tubes
can be pushed in.
" Twist telecopic tubes, turn threaded pins into guide grooves and counter.
In pushed-in state, the telecopic tubes rest inside the belt stringers; in pulled-
out state, the test weights can be suspended.
9.1.2 Installation and Setting Instructions
G= total of suspended test weights

Operating Principle
The test weight suspension lets you simulate the belt weigher's operating points
without material load on belt.
" Pull out telescopic tubes from both sides of the weighed idler set and suspend
the test weights supplied (or commercial units) in equal shares.
" Remove test weights when test weighing is complete.
" Push in telecopic tubes.
9.2 BED Type

The test weight equipment consists of two weld-on pieces and a number of test
weights.
To assemble, expertly weld the weld-on pieces to the faces of the weighed idler set tie
on either side as depicted above.
Consider the following:
" Weld the weld-on pieces in place best before aligning the weighed idler set.
The welding heat can cause deformation and deteriorate the accuracy of
alignment so that realignment is required.

9.2.2 Operating and Setting Instructions

The test weight equipment consists of
" two weld-on pieces welded to the weighed idler set as described above, and
" a number of test weights supplied upon request or readied by the user.
The test weights suspended on either side in equal shares = G/2 let you simulate the
belt weigher's measuring points without belt load.
Concerning the testing accuracy, please always heed the instructions given in the
Weighing Electronics manual and
" never remove overaged build-ups from belt weighers components because of
the change in tare.

Appendix
2BMP type 8
Acquiring Effective Platform Length 30, 46, 60, 73
Aligning 28, 44, 71
Aligning Carrying Idler Sets 57
Aligning Weighed Idler Set 58
BED type 6
BED Type 86
Belt Weighers Overview 3
BEM type 4
BEP type 5
BEP, BMP Types 85
BMP type 7
BMP2 type 8
Cabling 28, 46, 60, 74, 79
Checking Leaf Spring Parallel Guidance 33
Checking Load Cell 34
Checking Load Cell Signal 34
Displacing Measuring Modules 23
Ensuring Proper Alignment of Carrying Idler Sets 32
FGA 20-RSlE for Legal-for-trade Belt Weighers 80
FGA20-RSLE Type 78
FGA24A Type 81
Further Installation Instructions 79
General Information 1, 9
Hints for Delivery 1
Hints for Movable Conveyors 10
Information on Documentation 1
Inspecting 32
Inspecting and Repairing 47, 62, 76
Inspection and Repair 81
Inspection of incoming goods 1
Installation 24, 38, 51, 65
Installation and Setting Instructions 85
Installation Instructions 22, 37, 50, 64, 78, 85, 86
Installation Prerequisites 22, 38, 50, 64
Installation Suggestions 81
Installing Speed Transducer 78
Items Supplied 22, 37, 50, 64
Maintaining 32, 47, 61, 75
Maintaining Belt Weigher 31
Maintenance 80
Mounting Belt Weigher on Belt Stringers 54
Mounting Carrying Idler Sets 27, 43, 56, 71
Mounting Load Cells 55
Mounting Measuring Modules 25
Mounting Pole Wheel 83
Mounting Proximity Switch 83
Mounting Weighed Idler Set 41
Mounting Weighed Idler Set(s) 67
Multi-idler Belt Weigher BMP 64
Multi-idler Belt Weighers 6
Operating and Setting Instructions 87
Operating Instructions 31, 47, 61, 75, 80
Overview 10
Planning-in Hints (The 10 Rules) 9
Prerequisites 24, 51
Prerequisites: 39, 65
Repairing Belt Weigher 35
Replacing Leaf Springs 49, 63, 77
Replacing Load Cell 48, 62, 76
Single-idler Belt Weigher BED 50
Single-idler Belt Weigher BEM 22
Single-idler Belt Weigher BEP 37
Single-idler Belt Weighers 4
Speed Transducer (Option) 78
Storage hints 1

Appendix
Suitability 82
Test Weight Suspension (Option) 84
The 10 Rules 10
The Rules in Detail 11

Measuring and Process Technologies
SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH

D-64273 Darmstadt
Phone: +49 (0) 6151-32 10 28
Fax: +49 (0) 6151-32 11 72
E-Mail: sales.process@schenck.net
www.schenck-process.net
The Group
2.
MANUALS VOLUMETRIC AND DRIVE

CONTROLS
3.
MANUALS MEASURING AND AUTOMATION

SYSTEMS
INTECONT PLUS
Belt Weigher
Operating Instructions
DE Bedienungshinweise Bandwaage
GB Operating instructions Belt Weigher
FR Instructions de service Bascule Intgratice
IT Istruzioni per luso Bilancia per nastro
ES Instrucciones de uso Bscula de cinta
NL Bedieningsinstructie Bandweger
SE Manverhnvisningar Bandvg
NO Betjeningshenvisning Bndvekt
RU K
RS Vaga za traku Uputstva za upravljanje
HU Kezelsi tmutat Szlltszalag-mrleg
CZ Nvod k obsluze Psov vha
BG
BV-H2007AA
PASS Ein Service, auf den Sie zhlen knnen PASS - Service you can rely on
Schnell, umfassend, berall auf der Welt Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Qualitt und Zuverlssigkeit sind die Grundsteine unserer Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys
Unternehmensphilosophie. Darum setzen wir ein umfassendes philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
Servicekonzept einfach voraus, und zwar von der strengen concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
Qualittskontrolle, Installation und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur installation and commissioning through to seamless support
nahtlosen Untersttzung ber den gesamten Produktlebenszyklus. across the entire product life cycle.
Mit mehr als 30 Servicestandorten und ber 180 Servicespezialisten With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you
knnen Sie jederzeit auf uns zhlen, wo und wann immer Sie uns can count on us to be there whenever and wherever you need
brauchen. us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to
Es ist vllig egal, wo Sie sind, unsere Spezilisten sind da, um Sie mit advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal,
weltweit bestem, persnlichem und umfassendem Service zu beraten comprehensive service.
und zu untersttzen.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on
hand to analyse problems and failures.
Whrend der Geschftszeiten stehen Servicespezialisten aller Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck
Geschftsbereiche zur Analyse der Probleme und Ausflle bereit. Auf Process Location.
unserer Website www.schenckprocess.com finden Sie den
Schenck Process Standort in Ihrer Nhe.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive
Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best
Unser umfassendes Process Advanced Service System (PASS), das service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
an Ihre Anforderungen angepasst ist, bietet Ihnen den besten Service.
Sie suchen nach individuellen, mageschneiderten Servicelsungen? Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It
Dann ist unser modulares Servicesystem PASS genau das Richtige fr covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
Sie. Es umfasst das gesamte Servicespektrum, von einfachen through to full service. Interested?
Inspektionen bis hin zum vollstndigen Serviceprogramm. Then find out more about the individual components at
Interessiert? Weitere Informationen zu den einzelnen Bestandteilen www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
unseres Serviceangebots finden Sie auf unserer Website
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Kostenlose 24 h Notfall-Service-Hotline Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline

in Deutschland in Germany
Haben Sie einen Ausfall oder Probleme auerhalb der normalen Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office
Geschftszeiten? Unser Servicepersonal ist rund um die Uhr auf Abruf, hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to deal with
um Ausflle, Serviceterminplanung und andere Notflle zu behandeln. failures, service planning and other emergencies.
( +49 171 2 25 11 95 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment
( +49 172 6 50 17 00 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment
by Schenck Process GmbH, 2009

Pallaswiesenstrae 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
( +49 61 51-15 31 0
www.schenckprocess.com
Alle Informationen sind unverbindlich. Spezifikationsnderungen All information is given without obligation. All specifications are
vorbehalten. subject to change.
Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung Note: This is a translation of the original document.

Contents VBW
Contents
DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FRANAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ESPAOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SVENSKA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NORSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
MAGYAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 I

Schenck Process
VBW Contents
- Reserved for users notes -
II BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

Schenck Process
VBW
DEUTSCH
LAUFMELDUNG, BETRIEBSSTATUS H2
EREIGNISMELDUNGEN
Z1 = FOERDERMENGE
I = FOERDERSTAERKE kg/m
L2
QUITTIEREN
BETRIEBS-
BEREIT
{ POWER ON
CPU OK FUNKTION
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg
ABBRECHEN C1
-- I = 100 kg/h L3 L1
ALARM
L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX
EINGABE FUNKTION
AUS VORBEREITEN STARTEN
EIN S2
ZAEHLER UNTERE ANZEIGE EREIGNISMELDUNGEN
LOESCHEN VORWAEHLEN
FUNKTIONSVERTEILER
gB START/STOP Ein- bzw. Ausschalten wenn vorgewhlt
U SCROLL Untere Anzeige und Funktionen vorwhlen

1. Zhler Z2, Z3 4. Bandbeladung Q
T 2. Frderstrke I 5. Bandgeschwindigkeit v
3. Frderstrke Ir in %
i RESET Zhler lschen

1. Nr. des gewnschten Zhlers eingeben (1 oder 2 )
2. Mit Taste ENTER Eingabe besttigen
3. oder mit Taste ESCAPE Eingabe abbrechen
4. oder mit Taste DELETE falsche Eingabe lschen
G FUNCTION Funktionsverteiler und Ereignismeldungen aufrufen

1. Mit Tasten SCROLL gewnschte Funktion whlen.
Liegt ein Ereignis vor, ist schon die Funktion Ereignisse zeigen
vorgewhlt.
2. Mit ENTER Funktion aktivieren.
3. Mit den Tasten SCROLL knnen nacheinander alle vorliegenden
Ereignismeldungen eingesehen werden.
4. Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen mit ESCAPE.
O DELETE Ereignismeldungen quittieren, Eingaben lschen.
N ESCAPE Funktion abbrechen und Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen.
f ENTER Eingabe besttigen

Funktionen starten, z.B. Ereignisse anzeigen (siehe bei FUNCTION)
P DATA Eingabe vorbereiten, z.B. Parameter
INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 1

Schenck Process
VBW
Reserved for users notes
2 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

Schenck Process
VBW
ENGLISH
RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS H2
EVENT MESSAGES
Z1 = FEED AMOUNT
I = FEED RATE kg/m
L2
ACKNOWLEDGE
READY
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ABORT C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX START
STOP PREPARE
ENTRY FUNCTION
START
S2
RESET PRESELECT LOWER EVENT MESSAGES
COUNTER DISPLAY
FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR
gB START/STOP if preselected
U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions

(1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q
T (2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v
(3) Feed rate Ir in %
i RESET Reset counter(s)

(1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2).
(2) Use ENTER key to acknowledge
(3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input
(4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits
G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages

(1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function
If an event is available, Display Event function is preselected
(2) ENTER key lets you activate function
(3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other
(4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays
O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs
N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays
f ENTER Acknowledge input

start functions, e.g. Display Events (see FUNCTION)
P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
FRANAIS
SIGNALISATION DE MARCHE, ETAT DE FONCTIONNEMENT
H2
SIGNALISATION D'EVENEMENT
Z1 = QUANTITE TOLALISEE
I = DEBIT kg/m
L2
ACOUITTER
PRET AU
SERVICE
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ROMPRE C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FONCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX LANCER
PREPARER
ARRET FONCTION
L'ENTREE
MARCHE
S2
M.A.Z. PRESELECTIONNER SIGNALISATION D' EVENEMENTS
COMPTEUR AFFICHAGE
INFERIEUR
MENU DE FONCTION
gB START/STOP Marche ou Arrt si prdtermin
U SCROLL Slectionner laffichage infrieur et fonctions

1. Compteur Z2, Z3 4. Charge sur la bande Q
T 2. Dbit I 5. Vitesse de la bande v
3. Dbit Ir en %
i RESET Effacement compteur

1. Slectionner compteur dsir N. 1 ou 2
2. Avec la touche ENTER confirmer lentre
3. ou avec la touche ESCAPE interrompre lentre
4. ou avec la touche DELETE effacer les mauvaises entres
G FONCTION Slectionner le menu des fonctions et annonces vnements

1. Avec les touches SCROLL choisir la fonction souhaite
Si un vnement se prsente, la fonction indiquer vn. est dj
slectionne
2. Valider la fonction avec ENTER
3. Avec les touches SCROLL on peut consulter les annonces
dvnements existantes les unes aprs les autres
4. Retour aux affichages normaux avec ESCAPE
O DELETE Acquittement des annonces dvnements, effacement entre
N ESCAPE Arrter la fonction et retour aux affichages normaux
f ENTER Valider lentre

Dmarrer les fonctions, par ex. indiquer les vnements (voir sous
FONCTION)
P DATA Prparer une entre, par ex. Paramtre

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
ITALIANO
OPERAZ. IN CORSO. STATO FUNZ. H2

MESS. DI EVENTO
Z1 = QAT`TOTALIZZ.
kg/m
I = PORTATA
L2
CONFERMA
PRONTO
AL. FUNZ.
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg INTERR. C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNZIONI L3 L1
ALLARME L4
MIN kg/h
M
MAX AVVIO
OFF INTROD. FUNZIONI
ON VAL. IMP.
S2
AZZER. PREFISS. MESSAGGI EVENTO
TOTALIZZ. INDICAZ. IMP.
MENU INDIR. FUNZIONI
gB START/STOP Inserire o disinserire se selezionata
T SCROLL Selezionare display inferiore e funzioni

1. Totalizzatori Z2, Z3 4. Caricamento del nastro Q
2. Portata I 5. Velocit del nastro v
3. Portata Ir in %
i RESET Azzerare totalizzatore

1. Introdurre n del totalizzatore desiderato (1 o 2 )
2. Con il tasto ENTER confermare lintroduzione
3. oppure con il tasto ESCAPE interrompere lintroduzione
4. oppure con il tasto DELETE cancellare lintroduzione errata
G FUNCTION Richiamare il menu di indirizzamento funzioni e i messaggi di evento

1. Con i tasti SCROLL scegliere la funzione desiderata
In presenza di un evento gi prefissata la funzione Indicare eventi
2. Con ENTER attivare la funzione
3. Con i tasto SCROLL possibile fare visualizzare in successione
tutti i messaggi di evento presenti
4. Ritorno alle indicazioni normali con ESCAPE
O DELETE Confermare i messaggi di evento, cancellare le introduzioni
N ESCAPE Interrompere la funzione e ritornare alle indicazioni normali
f ENTER Confermare lintroduzion

Avviare le funzioni, ad es. visualizzare gli eventi (cf. sotto FUNCTION)
P DATA Preparare lintroduzione, ad es. parametri

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
ESPAOL
H2
MENSAJE DE FUNCIONAMIENTO, ESTADO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO,
AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS
Z1 = CANTIDAD TRASNPORTADA
kg/m
I = RENDIMIENTO
L2
CONFIRMAR
LISTO PARA
OPERACIN { POWER ON
CPU OK CANCELAR
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
FUNCIN L3
-- I = 100 kg/h L1
ALARM
L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX INICIAR
OFF PREPARAR
FUNCIN
ON ENTRADA
S2
BORRAR PRESELECCIONAR
CONTADOR INDICACIN ANTERIOR
AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS
DISTRIBUIDOR DE FUNCIONES
gB START/STOP Conexin o desconexin si se ha preseleccionado
U SCROLL Preseleccionar la indicacin inferior y las funciones

1. Contadores Z2, Z3 4. Carga de la cinta Q
T 2. Rendimiento I 5. Velocidad de cinta v
3. Rendimiento Ir en %
i RESET Borrar contador

1. Introducir N del contador deseado (1 o 2 )
2. Con la tecla ENTER confirmar la introduccin
3. o con la tecla ESCAPE cancelar la introduccin
4. o con la tecla DELETE borrar la introduccin errnea
G FUNCTION Activar el distribuidor de funciones y los avisos de acontecimientos

1. Seleccionar la funcin deseada con las teclas SCROLL
Si hay un acontecimiento, ya est preseleccionada la funcin
INDIC. ACONTECIM.
2. Activar la funcin con ENTER
3. Con las teclas SCROLL pueden examinarse uno tras otro todos los
avisos de acontecimientos existentes
4. Regreso a las indicaciones normales con ESCAPE
O DELETE Confirmar los avisos de acontecimientos, borrar las introducciones
N ESCAPE Cancelar la funcin y regresar a las indicaciones normales
f ENTER Confirmar la introduccin

Iniciar las funciones, p. ej. INDIC. ACONTECIM. (vase en FUNCTION)
P DATA Preparar la entrada, p. ej. parmetro

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
NEDERLANDS
Lopende melding, Bedrijfstoestand H2

Melding van gebeurtenissen
Z1 = transporthoeveelheid
kg/m
I = transportsterkte
L2
Kwiteren
Bedrijfsklaar
{ POWER ON
CPU OK Functie
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h stoppen L3 L1
L4
ALARM
kg/h
MIN
M
MAX Functie
Uit Ingave
voorbereiden starten
In
S2
Teller Onderste stand Storingsmelder
op nul kiezen
Functieverdeler
0 1 START/STOP In-uitschakelen wanneer gekozen
U SCROLL Onderste stand en functies kiezen

1. teller Z2,Z3 4. bandbelading Q
T 2. transportsterkte I 5. bandsnelheid v
3. transportsterkte in %
i RESET Teller op nul (wissen)
1. nummer van de gewenste teller ingeven (1 of 2)

2. met toets ENTER ingave bevestigen
3. of met toets ESCAPE ingaves stoppen
4. of met toets DELET foutieve ingave wissen
G FUNCTION Functieverdeler en storingsmelder oproepen

1. met de toets SCROLL de gewenste functie kiezen. Bij bepaalde
gebeurtenissen storingen), is de functie gebeurtenis tonen reeds
gekozen
2. met ENTER functie activeren
3. met de SCROLL toets kunnen n na n alle meldingen van
gebeurtenissen geraadpleegd worden
4. terug naar hoofdmenu met ESCAPE
O DELETE gebeurtenissen kwiteren, input wissen
N ESCAPE Functie stoppen en terug naar hoofdmenu
f ENTER Inputbevestigen, functie starten, bvb storingen tonen
P DATA Data input voorbereiden, bvb parameter

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
SVENSKA
DRIFTSMEDDELANDE, DRIFTSSTATUS H2
HNDELSEMEDDELANDEN
Z1 = MATNINGSMNGD
I = MATNINGSTJOCKLEK kg/m
L2
KVITTERA
DRIFTS-
KLAR { POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg AVBRYTA C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNKTION L3 L1
LARM
L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX STARTA
FRN FRBERED
INMATNING FUNKTION
TILL
S2
RKNARE VLJ HNDELSEMEDDELANDEN
RADERA UNDRE INDIKERING
FUNKTIONSFRDELARE
gB START/STOPP Till-resp. Frnkoppling om frutvalt
U SCROLL Frval av undre indikering och funktioner

1. Rknare Z2, Z3 4. Bandlast Q
T 2. Matningstjocklek I 5. Bandhastighet v
3. Matningstjocklek Ir i %
i RESET Radera rknare

1. Mata in nr. fr nskad rknare (1 eller 2 )
2. Med tangent ENTER bekrfta inmatning
3. eller med tangent ESCAPE avbryt inmatning
4. eller med tangent DELETE radera felaktig inmatning
G FUNCTION Ropa upp funktionsfrdelare och hndelsemeddelanden

1. Vlj nskad funktion med tangenterna SCROLL
Freligger en hndelse, r redan funktionen visa hndelser vald
2. Aktivera funktionen med ENTER
3. Med tangenterna SCROLL kan alla freliggande hndelsmeddelanden
lsas efter varandra.
4. terhopp till normalindikeringarna med ESCAPE
O DELETE Kvittera hndelsemeddelanden. radera inmatningar
N ESCAPE Avbrott av funktionen och terhopp till normalindikeringarna
f ENTER Bekrfta inmatningen

starta funktioner, t.ex. indikera
hndelser (se under FUNCTION)
P DATA Frbered inmatning, t.ex. parameter

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
NORSK
gB START/STOP Sl p el. av hvis det er forhndsvalgt
U SCROLL Forhndsvelge nedre angivelse og funksjoner

1. Teller Z2, Z3 4. Bndlasting Q
T 2. Transporttykkelse I 5. Bndhastighet v
3. Transporttykkelse Ir i %
i RESET Slette teller

1. Nr. til nsket teller tastes inn (1 eller 2 )
2. Med tasten ENTER bekreftes inntastingen
3. eller med tasten ESCAPE avbrytes inntastingen
4. eller med tasten DELETE slettes feil inntasting
G FUNCTION Fremkalle funksjonsfordeler og hendelsesmeldinger

1. Med tasten SCROLL velges nsket funksjon
Hvis det foreligger en hendelse, s er funksjonen vise hendelser
forhndsvalgt.
3. Med tasten SCROLL kan man lese alle foreliggende hendelsesmeldinger
etter hverandre.
4. Retur til normalangivelsene med ESCAPE2.
Med ENTER aktiveres funksjonen
O DELETE Kvittere hendelsesmeldinger, slette inntastinger
N ESCAPE Avbryte funksjon og returnere til normalangivelsene
f ENTER Bekrefte inntasting

Starte funksjoner, f.eks. slette hendelser (se ved FUNCTION)
P DATA Forberede inntasting, f.eks. parameter

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
,
H2

Z1 =
I = /
L2

{ POWER ON
CPU OK
/
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h L3 L1

L4

. M
.

.

S2

gB START/STOP
U SCROLL
1. Z2, Z3 4. Q
T 2. I 5. v
3. Ir %
i RESET
1. 1 2
2. ENTER
3. ESCAPE
4.
DELETE
G FUNCTION
1. SCROLL
(). ,
.
2. ENTER.
3. SCROLL
.
4. ESCAPE
O DELETE ,
N ESCAPE
f ENTER
, , (.
FUNCTION)
P DATA , ,

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
SRPSKI
PRIJAVA KRETANJA, STATUS POGONA H2

PRIJAVE DOGAAJA
Z1 = KOLIINA KOJA SE TRANSPORTUJE

I = INTENZITET TRANSPORTA kg/m
L2
KVITIRAT
I
SPREMAN ZA { POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
POGON o Z1 = 1500 kg FUNKCIJU C1
-- I = 100 kg/h PREKINUTI L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX PRIPREMITI FUNKCIJU
ISKLJUITI DAVANJE STARTOVATI
UKLJUITI PODATAKA
S2
OBRISATI PODATKE DONJI
POKAZIVA PRIJAVE DOGAAJA
BROJAA
PRETHODNO
RASPODELJIVA FUNKCIJA IZABRATI
gh START/STOP Ukljuiti odn. iskljuiti ako je prethodno izabrano
U SCROLL Donji pokaziva i funkcije prethodno izabrati
T
Donji pokaziva i funkcije prethodno izabrati
1. Broja Z2, Z3 4. Optereenje trake Q
2. Intenzitet transporta I 5. Brzina trake v
3. Intenzitet transporta Ir u %
i RESET Obrisati podatke brojaa

1. Dati podatke eljenog brojaa (1 ili 2)
2. Dirkom ENTER potvrditi davanje podataka
3. ili dirkom ESCAPE prekinuti davanje podataka
4. ili dirkom DELETE obrisati pogreno date podatake
G FUNCTION Raspodeljivae funkcija i prijave dogaaja pozvati

1. Dirkom SCROLL izabrati eljenu funkciju. Ako postoji neki dogaaj
funkcija Ereignisse zeigen je ve prethodno izabrana
2. ENTER-om aktivirati funkciju
3. Dirkama SCROLL mogu se pogledati uzastopce sve postojea
prijave dogaaja
4. Povratni skok ESCAPE-om ka normalnim pokazivaima
O DELETE Prijave dogaaja kvitirati, date podatke obrisati
N ESCAPE Funkciju prekinuti i povratni skok u normalne pokazivaef
f ENTER Davanje podataka potvrditi

Funkcije startovati, n.p. pokazati dogaaje (vidi kod FUNCTION)
P DATA Davanje podataka pripremiti, n.p. parametre

SCHENCK PROCESS
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
MAGYAR
FUTSJEL, ZEMLLAPOT H2
ESEMNYZENETEK
Z1 = SZLLTOTT MENNYISG
I = SZLLTTELJESTMNY
L2
NYUGTZS
ZEMKSZ { POWER ON
CPU OK FUNKCI
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h MEGSZAKTSA L3 L1
L4
RIASZTS
MIN M
MAX FUNKCI
KI BEVITEL
INDTSA
BE ELKSZTSE
S2
SZMLL ALS KIJELZ ESEMNYZENETEK
TRLS KIVLASZTSA
FUNKCIINTZ
gB START/STOP Be- ill. kikapcsols ha ki van vlasztva
U SCROLL Als kijelz s funkcik kivlasztsa

1. Szmll Z2, Z3 4. Szalagterhels Q
T 2. Szlltteljestmny I 5. Szalagsebessg v
3. Szlltteljestmny Ir %-ban
i RESET Szmll trls

1. A kvnt szmll szmnak bersa (1 vagy 2)
2. ENTER gombbal bevitel megerstse
3. vagy az ESCAPE gombbal bevitel megszaktsa
4. vagy a DELETE gombbal hibs bevitel trlse
G FUNCTION Funkciintz s esemnyzenetek felhvsa

1. A SCROLL gombokkal kivlasztjuk a kvnt funkcit
Ha van esemny, az Esemnyeket mutat funkci
mr ki van vlasztva
2. Az ENTER gombbal aktvra vltjuk a funkcit
3. A SCROLL gombokkal egyms utn megtekinthetjk
az sszes aktulis esemnyzenetet
4. Visszatrs a norml kijelzsekre az ESCAPE billentyvel
O DELETE Esemnyzenetek nyugtzsa, bevitel trlse
N ESCAPE Funkci megszaktsa s visszatrs a norml kijelzsekhez
f ENTER Bevitel megerstse

Funkcik indtsa, pl. Esemnyeket mutat (lsd a FUNCTION gombnl)
P DATA Bevitel elksztse, pl. paramter

SCHENCK PROCESS
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
ESKY
gB START/STOP Zapnut pop. Vypnut (je-li pedvoleno)
U SCROLL Pedvolba spodnho displeje a funkc

1. Potadlo Z2, Z3 4. Zaten psu Q
T 2. Dopravn sla I 5. Rychlost psu v
3. Dopravn sla Ir v %
i RESET Vymazn potadla
1. Zadejte . poadovanho potadla (1 nebo 2 )

2. Vloen daj potvrte pomoc klvesy ENTER
3. nebo zrute pomoc klvesy ESCAPE
4. nebo vymate pomoc klvesy DELETE
G FUNCTION Sputn funknho pepnae a hlen udlost

1. Pomoc klvesy SCROLL zvolte poadovanou funkci
V ppad existujc udlosti je funkce Zobrazen udlosti pedvolena
2. Pomoc ENTER aktivujte funkci
3. Pomoc klvesy SCROLL je mon prohldnout si vechna hlen
po sob
4. Zpt k standardnmu zobrazen pomoc klvesy ESCAPE
O DELETE Potvzen hlen udlost, vymazn dat
N ESCAPE Peruen funkce a nvrat ke standardnmu zobrazen
f ENTER Potvrzen vloench dat

Sputn funkc, nap. zobrazen udlost (viz. FUNCTION)
P DATA Pprava vloen dat, nap. parametry

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
gB START/STOP . . .
U SCROLL
1. Z2, Z3 4. Q
T 2. I 5. v
3. Ir %
i RESET
1. Nr. (1 2 )
2. ENTER
3. ESCAPE
4. DELETE
G FUNCTION
1. SCROLL
, Ereignisse zeigen
( )
2. ENTER
3. SCROLL
.
4. . ESCAPE
O DELETE ,
N ESCAPE
f ENTER
, . (
FUNCTION ()
P DATA , .

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ESPAOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FRANAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NORSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
INTECONT PLUS Belt Weigher
Operating Manual
BV-H2214GB
PASS - Service you can rely on.
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive
service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless
support across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and
wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in
worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures.
Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the
best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to
deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.
J +49 171 2 251195 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment
J +49 172 6 501700 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

J +49 61 51-15 31 0
All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change.
Note: Translation of the original instructions

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Contents
1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power ON 4
Signal Lamps 4
Normal Displays 5
Control In Normal Mode 5
Event Messages 6
Function Distributor 8
Display Test and Version Number 8
Batching Mode 9
Visual Make-up 11
Keyboard Mode 11
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe 12
Prefeeder 12
Printing 12
Zero Setting 16
Read Parameters 17
3 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7 Setting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Function Distributor 33
Calibrating Functions 34
Belt Circuit LB 34
Tare TW 35
Weight Check CW 36
Set Time 38
Simulation Mode 38
8 Service Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9. Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Preselect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Parameters Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10 Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
System Messages S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electrics E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Calibration C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Maximum H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Minimum L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
0837 11 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transmission to third parties and reproduction of

this documentation are not permitted. Schenck Technische CONTENTS
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
and copyrights.
Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB I - 1
VBW INTECONT PLUS
How To Operate Your INTECONT 85

Mechanical Prerequisites 86
Electrical Prerequisites 86
Enter Parameters 87
Functional Check 88
Calibration 89
Check Using Check Weight 89
Check Belt Speed 90
Check Using Material 90
Automatic Zero Setting 91
Belt Run Monitoring 91
Belt Influence Compensation BIC 92
Control for Point of Discharge CPD 92
Cosine Pendulum 93
Test Plug 93
12 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Start / Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Batching Without Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Batching With Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Data Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Base Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Weighing Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1. Effective Platform Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2. Check Weight QPRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3. Conveyor Belt Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Printer Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13 Replacement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP > INTECONT PLUS VEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
This manual applies to software version: VBW 20600-08
Edition : 0837
0837

CONTENTS Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
BV-H2214 GB I-2 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW
1 Overview
What Is The INTECONT: Display:
INTECONT PLUS is designed as measuring and 5 x 7 - dot matrix with 6 mm character height
evaluation system for
Upper display left : running message
Belt Weighers right : delivery rate in kg or t
Solids Flow Meters
Mass Flow Meters Lower display left : event messages
Mass Flow Feeders right : selectable
Weighfeeders feed rate, belt speed
Loss-in-weight Feeders etc.
Three system versions are available: Display can be changed over to American units.
1. Without option card (standard) LEDs:
2. With option card VFE 610V for additional 2 green and 3 red LEDs
input/outputs and printer Green LEDs : Ready
Red LEDs : Error or limit value
3. With option card for fieldbus messages
VSS021V : Modbus/S5
VPB 020V: Profibus Keyboard:
VCB020V: DeviceNet
VET020V: MODBUS/TCP Flexible membranes with tactile touch
VET022V: ETHERNET/IP
gB Start/stop measurement
This manual applies to belt weighers using the fully
equipped INTECONT variant. TU Preselect lower display
Select functions
i Reset counter
For Further Reading:
Fieldbus manual BVH2220
G FUNC Call function distributor and
event texts
SS-RK512 (3964R) FH 458
Modbus (Comp) FH 525 O DEL Acknowledge event messages
Delete input
O Z1 = 1 2 0 0 0 kg
E1 I = 1 0 0 0 kg/h
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Overview
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 1
VBW INTECONT PLUS
The basic diagram shows all inputs and outputs.

N ESC Abort function
f ENT Start function

Acknowledge input
P DAT Prepare input
B9 Enter parameters
KL Enter sign and decimal point
Some Definitions:
I = Feed rate in kg/hr or t/hr

Material amount discharged from belt
per unit time
O Z1 = 1500 kg
Z = Delivery rate in kg or t I= 100 kg/h
Material amount fed out = feed rate x feed time
V = Belt speed in m/s
Q = Belt load in kg/m

Material weight on one belt meter
Measuring Principle:
Belt load Q and speed V are continuously measured

and multiplied. L/C = Load cell for acquisition of belt load Q
The result is feed rate I used to determine delivery
rate. D = Speed transducer
I in kg/hr S = Belt circuit sensor for automatic belt

Q in kg/m influence compensation BIC
V in m/s (non-standard)
24 V = Power supply
Measurement techniques:
V = Speed transducer
n Precision AC voltage amplifier with continuous
correction of zero point and range Q = Load cell
n Highly resolving analog-to-digital converter ANALOG= Analog output selectable for feed rate,
The integrated method is designed to efficiently belt load, belt speed
suppress line voltage interferences.
SERIAL = Serial interfaces for printer and host
n 16-bit microcontroller computer
n Unlimited storage of counter readings, MIN = Relay output for limit value monitoring
configuration and calibration data. Open = MIN value exceeded down
0837

Overview Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
BV-H2214 GB 2 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW
MAX = Relay output for limit value monitoring

Open = MAX value exceeded up
Feed rate, belt load, or belt speed, can be
monitoring separately for excess of MIN
and MAX values.
FAULT = Relay output for alarms

Open = Alarm
FULL = Relay output for full feed in batching

mode
Closed = full feed
DRIBBLE = Relay output for dribble feed

Closed = dribble feed
MOTOR = Control output for belt drive

Closed = ON
PREF. = Control output for prefeeder

Closed = On
RELEASE Release signal for totalization

= H = Release
ON/OFF = Start scale and totalization.

High = ON
OFF = Stop
Low = STOP
COUNTER= Pulse output for connection of external

totalizing counter
For simple measuring tasks, with constant belt speed,

speed transducer D can be omitted.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Overview
VBW INTECONT PLUS
2 Control
Power ON Signal Lamps
During power failure
Counter readings
Counter pulses not yet output
Preselected normal displays
Service values, e.g. ON-time
Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg
E1 I = 0 kg/h
remain stored for an endless period of time.
The internal clock continues running for approx. 5
days.
After power-on, display and lamps are automatically

tested before version number of system is displayed
for some seconds to be then replaced by the normal a (green) POWER OK
displays. lights if all power supplies are OK.
b (green) CPU OK
lights if microprocessor is ready to
operate.
Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg X (red) ALARM
E1 I = 0 kg/h flashes if an Alarm event is
available.
In addition, an event code appears
in lower display line.
Message E1
MIN (red) MIN LIMIT VALUE
reports power failure and can be defined as ALARM or lights if feed rate limit value is
WARNING. exceeded down.
ALARM:
Red lamp and message E1 are
X MAX (red) MAX LIMIT VALUE
flashing. lights if feed rate limit value is
To start scale, first acknowledge exceeded up.
message.
WARNING:
Signal lamp X remains dark, READY:
message E1 does not flash. The two green signal lamps must be lit, and no Alarm
Start/stop scale automatically or in message available.
manual. No acknowledgement is
required.
O Lets you acknowledge event
message.
0837

Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Normal Displays Control In Normal Mode
Upper Display g Start totalization

Prerequisite : External release signal
Left Rotating point as running message. available (selectable)
Scale has started, totalized amount START source (B06)
and feed rate are acquired. set to OP or Keyboard
In stop state of scale (point stands Mode active.
still) only belt load and belt speed are Feature : Rotating point in left field
measured. of upper display
Right Totalizing counter Z1
Lower Display B Stop totalization

Feature : Point stands still
Belt load and belt speed continue
Left Event message, alphanumerically
being measured.
coded, e.g. E1 for power failure.
Right Selectable display
i Reset totalizing counters.
TU Select display This function has to be activated with
parameters A10 or A11.
1 Enter number of desired counter
(1 or 2).
O Z1 = 50 000 kg
Counter no. : _
Z2 = 60 0 kg/h
Counter 3 cannot be reset. In case of
overflow, counting resumes from 0.
f Acknowledge input.
N Correct faulty input or accidental use
of DELETE key.
TU Select lower display
(see Normal Display).
Counter Z2 Z2 = 6000 kg
Counter Z3 Z3 = 1000 kg O Acknowledge event messages.
Feed rate I = 1000 kg/hr G Call further functions, e.g. display
Feed rate Ir = 50.00 % 1) event messages, calibration.
Belt load Q = 10.000 kg/m
Belt load Qr = 50.0% 2) N Exit function distributor.
Belt speed V = 0.0500 m/s
Batching displays Zb, ZI, Zd, Nb 3)
1) related to nominal feed rate

2) related to nominal belt load
3) see Batching Mode.
Display formats and units of counters Z1, Z2, Z3 and I

can be selected separately.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
VBW INTECONT PLUS
n WARNING 2 Display permanent, not

Event Messages underscored
Definitions Acknowledgement:
None
All important scale functions are internally monitored,
n IGNORE No event monitoring, save
and faults are reported by event message.
MIN/MAX messages via contact
outputs and signal lamps.
For troubleshooting details, see Event Messages
item.
If several events occur at the same time, the most
significant event is displayed first.
Priority: Alarm, Warning 1, Warning 2
Z1 = 2500 kg
E1 I = 0 kg/h
Operation
O Acknowledge events of ALARM and

WARNING 1 classes after
Message E1 Power Failure elimination of fault. If several events
are available, acknowledge one
Group code (e.g. E) and number (e.g. 1) appear in left
after the other.
field of lower display.
In addition, an explanatory text can be called up.
The events are organized into 4 classes. The Display event texts:
assignment between event and class can be selected
using relevant parameter. G Call function distributor.
n ALARM Display is underscored and TU Scroll Show Event function into
flashes. lower display field.
Red signal lamp X flashes. f Select function.
Totalization stops, scale is

inoperable.
Start:
If cause of Alarm has been
removed and error message
acknowledged.
Acknowledgement:
If cause of Alarm has not been
removed, flashing stops but
message is still on display.
n WARNING 1 Display permanent and

underscored Totalization goes on.
Acknowledgement:
If cause of fault is still present,
underscores are faded out.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
H3 v > MAX
H4 L/C Input > MAX
1. Event S 2 = O 0 7 Minimum L L1 I < MIN

No Release L2 Load < MIN
L3 v < MIN
L4 L/C Input < MIN
Display shows I = Feed Rate
event name e.g. No Release V = Belt Speed

event code e.g. S2
and a note e.g. Parameter O07. L/C = Load Cell
The note informs the operator of relevant parameter. * Fault on device or cabling
TU Let you view various events.

N Return to normal displays.
Contact Outputs
List of Events
General Alarm available until acknowledged
The events are listed in accordance with display MIN/MAX Outputs independent of event class,
priority. active also in IGNORE class.
Limit values are reported as long
as event is available and only
System messages S1 Memory Error with active scale.
S2 No Release*
S3 Scale Maintenance ON
S4 Maintenance Interval
Electrics
S7 Simulation active
S9 Host Communication
Electrics E1 Power Failure

E2 Namur Error Tacho*
E3 Namur Error Sensor*
E6 Error Ext. Event
Material flow B1 Out of Tolerance

B4 BATCH Actual Value MAX
Calibration C C1 L/C Input *

C2 Tacho Input *
C3 Belt Skew
C4 Belt Drift
C5 Tare Correction > MAX
C7 ZERO Time
C8 Slip Error
C9 Tare Diff > MAX
Maximum H H1 I > MAX

0837 H2 Load > MAX

VBW INTECONT PLUS
B = If batching mode is selected, you can access

Function Distributor additional functions in main distributor.
The function distributor lets you call further functions, Abort Batch
or dialogs. Deselect Batch
Batch Number
G Call function distributor. Print Batch
If no event is available, display shows Make-up
function selected last. Next = Belt Empty
f Start function.
S = Calibrating functions protected by password.
N Return to normal display and/or Prompt is output after call of function.
abort function.
E = If an event is available
Z = Iif activated via parameter

Function
Moving through function distributor has no effect on
Display Events
weighing functions.
Display Test and Version Number

TU Scroll through function distributor
Lets you check displays and signal lamps.
Display Events E
G Call display test.
Test Display
1. Display elements flash
START/STOP Prefeeder Z
rhythmically.
Service Values TU 2. Version number is displayed for
Batch Number B
apr. 3 s.
Print Counter Readings
>0< Zero Set f Test terminates automatically.
START/STOP Keyboard Mode
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe
Programming
Calibrating Functions S
INTECONT PLUS
Read Parameters VBW 20600-00 2482
Enter Parameters S
Load Default Parameters S
Print Parameters
Status Report Example:
Tare S VBW : Belt Weigher
START/STOP Simulation 20600-00 : Version number
Check Weight S
Imp/Belt Circuit S
Set Time S
Programming and calibrating functions lead to further 0837

menus you can move through using cursor keys.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Select Batching Mode

Batching Mode
Selection of batching mode enables batching,
Additional Displays however, no batch is started yet.
Condition: scale OFF and function activated via
parameter A07.
G Call function distributor.

O Z1 = 2500 kg TU Scroll Select Batch into display
ZI = 400 kg
field.
f Select function.
Upper display : If batching mode is selected, a System prompts for input of batch setpoint.
totals sign is displayed left of If batch is selected from external PC, setpoint input is
running message. omitted.
Lower display : Use cursor keys to scroll 4 Enter Setpoint
additional values into display field.
Setpoint prompt is output automatically upon selection
U 1. Zb = Batch setpoint or can be started in manual when batch is complete
(scale OFF).
2. ZI = Batch actual value If batching mode is deselected or a batch is running,
Amount already no input is possible.
discharged When presetting batch setpoint via fieldbus
(Parameter I09 Batch Source = FB), no input is
3. Zd = Batch residual value possible either. This also applies to the input of batch
Amount not yet number and make-up setpoint.
discharged
P Prepare setpoint input.
Zd = Zb - ZI
19 Enter setpoint in kg or t
Max. 9 digits including decimal
4. Nb = Consecutive batch
point.
number The unit is that of counter 1.
Use Batch Number
function to set initial value.
. Setpoint Batch
Before a batch starts, ZI and Zd indicate the amounts Zb = . . . . . . kg
fed out during previous batch.
If you deselect batching mode (Deselect Batch functi-
on), displays are disabled but enabled again upon
next selection.
The display format corresponds to the format of

counter 1. f Acknowledge input.
N Abort input, old setpoint remains
stored.
O Delete faulty digits.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Start and Abort Make-up
Lets you add a selected amount of material to a batch

g Start batch, process starts. aborted or complete.
Prerequisites : Running batch complete, scale OFF.
Display ZI moves from 0 towards No batch printout.
setpoint
Display Zd moves from setpoint Display ZI : Batch actual setpoint resumes from
towards 0. achieved value.
B Abort batch. Display Zd : Batch residual value remains
unchanged.
Batching continues upon next start
command. Display Zbn : Make-up setpoint
Deselect Batch Display Zdn : Batch residual value of make-up

amount
Lets you deselect batching mode, i.e. mode is removed Zdn = Zbn - make-up amount
from active functions available. already fed.
Totals sign disappears from upper display, batching
You can scroll all displays into lower display field
values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb are no longer available, but
using cursor keys.
remain stored.
Zdn and Zbn are available only until start of next
Prerequisites : Batch complete, or aborted using batch.
Abort Batch function; scale OFF.
GT Call function distributor and select
GT Call function distributor, Make-up function.
select Deselect Batch function,
f Acknowledge.
and acknowledge.
f System prompts for input of
make-up setpoint Zbn in kg or t.
The units is that of Counter 1.
Use Select Batch function to reactivate batching
mode.
Old values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb can be viewed again. P Until start of make-up, setpoint Zbn
can be changed.
Abort Batch
gB Start or abort make-up
This function lets you abort a running batch, i.e.
batching immediately stops.
Batching mode remains selected.
New batch starts upon next start command, old batch If make-up batch is complete, normal batch starts
is not resumed. upon next start command.
Use Make-up function to complete old batch. For new make-up, call function again.
Abort Batch function also aborts make-up
GT Call function distributor and select operations.
Abort Batch function.
f Acknowledge.
You can also abort batch using the P02 contact.

0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Batch Number Nb
Visual Make-up
Select a number incrementing by 1 after start of every
new batch.
A batch report can be printed only if batch is complete
The consecutive number is printed in batch report and
(setpoint reached).
indicated in lower display line.
Belonging to previous batch, make-up operations are If an unspecified amount is to be batched using the
not counted. START/STOP keys, the results can be printed using a
little trick:
1. Call Select Batch function.
Batch Number function.
2. Enter very high batch setpoint,
f Acknowledge. e.g. 999999999 kg.
Prompt Nb = - is output. 3. Scroll batch actual value ZI into lower display field.
4. Start scale.
f Acquire input. 5. If desired amount ZI is reached, stop scale.
N Abort input. 6. Call Abort Batch function.
Old number remains stored. 7. Start printing
(see Print Batch).
Current number can be changed also while a batch is Make-up can be performed only before print
running. command. To start next batch, resume from item 4.
Next = Belt Empty

Keyboard Mode
One-off changeover to clearance mode.
Next batch is controlled via prefeeder. When batch is
complete, conveyor belt still performs approx. 1/2 belt This function lets you place the selected control
circuit. source for
Prerequisites : Scale OFF, Start/Stop, Batch setpoint

batch complete,
prefeeder control present and on the INTECONT keyboard. If you deselect Keyboard
active. Mode, the old source is active again. When changing
Batching mode without clearance. over from external source (e.g. serial) to keyboard, the
Start/Stop status remains stored; vice versa, the
external signal is active.
Next - Belt Empty function. GT Call function distributor and select
Start Keyboard Mode or Stop
f Acknowledge. Keyboard Mode functions.
g Start batch.
Display feature:
You will know Keyboard Mode by the rectangle in the
upper left display field.
Condition : This function has to be activated

with the parameter A06.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe Printing
This function lets you control your INTECONT using The printing functions are available only if the option
the EasyServe PC service tool. card is present.
GT Call function distributor and select Print Batch

Activate EasyServe function.
The batch report can be printed:
1. using Print Batch function
Enter communication parameters using Block R.
2. automatically after each complete batch
(Parameter J02 = YES).
Condition: This function has to be activated
with the parameter A09.
Start of printing disables the Make-up function for the
current batch.
Prerequisites : Batch complete, scale OFF.
Note: Upon power failure, the current
Print format : Order of sequence, line and column
status is stored, i.e. the Activate
divisions can be selected at will
EasyServe function needs not be
(Parameter Block J).
reselected.
Print Batch function.
Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole Start function.
SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix
connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485). N Abort printing.
See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.
Prefeeder Batch Nummer 40

20.11.02 16:49:41
Batch Setpoint 0.150 t
The Start/Stop Prefeeder function lets you activate or Batch Actual Val. 0.150 t
deactivate prefeeder. Select Start, and INTECONT Totalizer 1 0.806t
will control your prefeeder. In Stop state, material flow Totalizer 2 806.47 kg
is interrupted and scale can be tared. Zero Set beforer 19 min.
Events
Prerequisites : External prefeeder present and E1 Power Failure O01
controlled by INTECONT.
Activate function using parameter
N 01.
GT Call function distributor and select Batch Number: Consecutive number of batch
Start Prefeeder or Stop Prefeeder 20.11.02: Date and time
function. Batch Setpoint: Preset batch amount
f Start control signal. Batch Actual Val.: Amount batched (actual value)
Totalizer 1:
Totalizing counter 1
Totalizer 2: Totalizing counter 2

Zero Set before: Feeder run time after last taring or
zeroing operation (see Service
Values) 0837
Events : available during printing

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Print Counter Readings (FMZ), Quantity Report Print Events
This report is identical with the batch report, however, Parameter J03 lets you select/deselect printout of
the numerical values are identified as sub-totals by event messages.
the # symbol.
There are 3 options:
If no batching mode is selected, batch number, batch
setpoint and batch actual value are not printed. This 1. No printout (NO)
type of report figures as Quantity Report.
2. Print events (error)
Batch actual value [kg] # 998 #
etc. 3. Print events and counter readings (YES)
(see Printer Counter Readings)
Call:
1) Use Print Counter Readings function. 20.11.02 11:45:21 L2 W1 Load > MAX
Unlike the Print Batch function, printing is 20.11.02 11:59:01 L2 W1 Load < MIN
possible during running batch.
2) Printed automatically upon every event printout

(Parameter J03 = YES)
L2 :
Event code
Print Parameters W1 :
Error class, e.g. WARNING 1
Event has occurred
:
Print complete parameter list with current values. Cause removed, event acknowledged, if
:
Inputs differing from default values are identified by *. required.
The list is complete with all possible event messages Load<MIN: Explanation
and the current hardware assignment.
Event is displayed on INTECONT as long as

PARAMETER PRINTOUT available.
INTECONT PLUS VBW 20600-01 2482 For more information, see Event Messages item.
20.11.02 16:59:51
BLOCK A Dialog Behaviour

01 Language ENGLISH
02 Units SI
BLOCK B Rated Data

01 Feed Rate Unit kg/h
02 Nominal Feed Rate * 1,000 t/h
etc.

Print Parameters function.
f Start function.
N Abort printing at any time.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Print Zero Setting Results
The result of the automatic zero setting function can STATUS REPORT INTECONT PLUS
be printed automatically after every belt circuit. 25.11.02 13:37:12
Prerequisite:Parameter H 01 = YES (Auto Zero Active)
Software : VBW 20600-01 2482
Parameter H09 = YES Hardware version :1
Option card version :1
Station address :1
Tare correction is the total of all zero point changes; -------------------------------
Latest Report of: 25.11.02 12:13:13
total tare additionally includes the basic tare. ------------ -------------------
Values correspond to same-name parameters SPC values:
D 03/05. Zero Set before : 4086 min

Voltage ON-time : 68 h
Feeder ON-time : 68 h
Latest password entry of : 22.11.02 17:02:12
Latest matkor change : 15.11.02 15:02:34
K05 SPC Time :1h

K06 SPC Filter : 1.00 h
Print Zero Setting Results Feed rate
Mean value Imitt : 0.15 %
Variance : 0.09 %
Total Tare [kg/m] 50,23 Tare Correction T [kg/m] 1,56 Belt load Q MAX :0%
Time Q MIN :0%
Totalizer 3 : 510 t
Belt skew : 0.00 %
Belt Drift : 0.00 cm
Latest taring results (max. 5) T in % of Qnenn

22.11.02 16:04:05 : 12.99 %
21.11.02 16:11:22 : 30.75 %
21.11.02 16:10:53 : 33.40 %
22.11.02 16:05:22 : 12.99 %
22.11.02 16:04:43 : 12.99 %
Status Report
Test weight check of 16.06.03 16:23:17
25.11.02 09:06:28
The status report can be printed at any time. Set/Act 0.9643
Reported are previous events, calibration results, and N05 BIC Active NO
Events since power on
SPC measurement values, e.g. feed rate variance. 1 * H03 v> MAX
1 * C07 Set Time To Zero
1 * E01 Power Failure
SPC = Statistic Process Control
For individual data, see Service Values item.
GT Call function distributor and select Zero Set before:

Status Report function. Zero point corrected by taring program or
manual/automatic zero setting.
f Start function.
Voltage ON-time:
N Abort printing at any time. Total voltage ON-time.
Feeder ON-time:
Total ON-time of conveyor belt and INTECONT.
Last password entry on:

Date of last password input for start of a service function
or parameter change.
Latest matkor change:

The matkor parameter lets you change feed rate and
totalization range.
SPC time:
Measuring time for SPC values Qmax and TQ < MIN. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
SPC filter: Feed Rate Diagram

Filter time for SPC values mean value and variance
Printed automatically after status report, the feed rate
Mean value Imitt: diagram shows the current feed rate value in percent
Feed rate mean value exponentially filtered using the of nominal feed rate. The report period is determined
SPC filter time related to nominal feed rate. by Parameter K 05 SPC Time .
Variance:
Feed rate variance related to the square of nominal feed Feed Rate in Percent Pnenn
rate. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 %
Belt load QMAX: - 6h * 5,000 t/h

Maximum belt load during last few hours limited by SPC - 5h * 10,000 t/h
time related to nominal belt load. - 4h * 20,000 t/h
- 3h >
- 2h * 40,000 t/h
Time Q < MIN:
- 1h * 50,000 t/h
Total time during which belt load was below Qmin - 0h * 50,000 t/h
(Parameter F 05), evaluated over the past few hours
(SPC time).
Last taring results (max. 5):

Results (total tare) of last 5 zero point or tare corrections, The actual diagram resolution is higher than shown in
related to nominal belt load. sample.
Feed rate 50 dots for nominal feed rate
Test weight check on : Time : 32 dots for time K 05
Date and time of last check using check weight, Units : t/h, h
performed using Weight Check CW setting program. Initialisation : upon power-up and change of
Parameter K 05.
BIC active: Symbol > : Feed rate exceeds 140 %
indicates whether automatic belt influence
compensation is active, or not.
Events report:
lists number and type of events occurred after last
printout.
If no report has been printed yet, counting starts from
time of power-up.
Counter 3:
Totalizing counter 3
Belt skew:
indicates change in belt length in % of total belt length
(Parameter D06).
Belt drift:
indicates belt drift in cm.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Program complete:
Zero Setting
0. Dev. 70.2 %
The zero setting program is designed to acquire the belt Tarkor 1.12 %
weighers zero point error over one or multiple integer
belt circuits.
In normal mode, value is used to correct current
measuring result.
If no automatic mode is selected, use program in regular
intervals. Upper display: Deviation of zero point from
During zero setting, totalizing counters stop counting. previous zero setting operation in %
of nominal belt load.
Prerequisite:1. Conveyor belt totally unloaded. Dev = + : error increased
If necessary, abort program. Dev = - : error decreased.
User Start Prefeeder function, if Lower display: Deviation of zero point from basic
available. tare in % of nominal belt load.
Taring program corrects basic tare
2. Belt running, during calibration.
indicated automatically.
Acquire result, or view for information and reject.
3. No batch active; batching mode can
remain active. f Acquire result.
Scale zero point is corrected.
4. This function has to be activated with
the parameter A08. N Abort program.
Result is rejected.
Call:
G Call Zero Setting function and start. Restart prefeeder.
If belt is not running, program aborts Event messages:

TU and requests START.
1- C7 Zero setting time elapsed.
f Deselect message, if not desired.
Program running:
2- Value Excessive
Zeroing range exceeded; clean
scale and retare, if necessary.
0. >0< 70.2 % 3. Note:

Tarkor 1.12 % The function setting to zero can also be
started via the digital input P05. The
program is started by a positive flank of the
contact. The result is automatically accepted
if it is within the admissible zero setting limit
(5% of the nominal belt load). An
Upper display: Residual run time in % of total run
ackowledgement of the result is not
time.
necessary. The calibration program can only
Lower display: Zero point error in %, related to
be aborted in its active phase.
nominal belt load.
N Abort program at any time. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Read Parameters
Parameters are defined as variable characteristics or

data used to match INTECONT to the particular
application.
Parameter input is protected by password (see Enter
Parameters).
The Read Parameters function lets you view all
parameters without jeopardizing the operating
reliability.
The parameters are organized into function blocks A ,

B,... and consecutively numbered within a block.
GTf Scroll Programming function into

display field and acknowledge.
Tf Select Read Parameters
sub-function.
Display shows title of first parameter block.
Dialog Behaviour
Block: A
TU Scroll through parameter blocks

A, B,...
fT Scroll through parameters within a
block.
Nominal Feed Rate

B02 1000.0 kg/h
N Return to blocks.
For more information, see Enter Parameters.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
This page left intentionally blank
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
3 Control Overview
RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS H2

EVENT MESSAGES
Z1 = FEED AMOUNT
I = FEED RATE kg/m
L2
ACKNOWLEDGE
READY
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ABORT C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX START
STOP PREPARE
ENTRY FUNCTION
START
S2
RESET PRESELECT LOWER EVENT MESSAGES
COUNTER DISPLAY
FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR
gB Start/Stop if preselected
U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions.
(1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q
(2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v
T (3) Feed rate Ir in %
i RESET Reset counter(s)
(1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2).
(2) Use ENT key to acknowledge.
(3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input.
(4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits.
G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages
(1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function.

If an event is available, Display Event function is preselected.
(2) ENTER key lets you activate function.
(3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other.
(4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays.
O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs.

N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays.
f ENTER Acknowledge input, e.g. setpoint,
start functions, e.g. Display Events (see FUNCTION).
P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control Overview
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Control Overview Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
4 Operating Principle
A belt weigher is designed to continuously weigh the Belt Speed:

material amount transported on a conveyor belt.
A further measure for feed rate is belt speed v,
Belt Load: acquired with the use of speed transducer D and
translated into a corresponding pulse frequency.
The material is guided to a weighing platform If belt load is constant and more approximate
arranged under the belt and limited by 2 carrying accuracy will suffice, speed measurement can be
idlers. Via one or multiple weighed idlers, the platform omitted.
load excerts a force on load cell (L/C).
The deflection for measurement is 0.2 mm. The
weighed idlers are connected with the frame structure,
e.g. with the use of a leaf spring parallel system. Feed Rate:
INTECONT normalizes physical units kg/m and m/s.

Multiplication of the two values results in feed rate I.
I in kg/s
v in m/s
Q in kg/m
QB in kg
Leff in m
I in kg/h:
I in kg/h
Proportional to platform load, the load cell output As to the rest,
voltage is amplified and transferred to the INTECONT see above.
microprocessor with the use of an analog-to-digital
converter.
The white triangle indicates the load distribution on a
single-idler platform scale. Only half of the materials
weight force is applied to the weighed idler.
The translation of load ratio into platform length has

become accepted usage in weighing technology.
Leff = effective platform

length
Lg = total platform length
For weighing platforms equipped with multiple

weighed idlers, factor 1/2 is different.
Belt load in kg/m is thus:
QB = total load on
weighing platform.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Operating Principle
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Automatic Belt Influence Compensation (BIC): Batching:
In batching mode, a preselected material amount is

fed. When batch setpoint is reached, batching stops.
Batching can be controlled via conveyor belt drive or
material prefeeder.
Control via belt drive:
In this mode, the conveyor belt is still fully loaded after

complete batch.
Not even the best of conveyor belts is perfectly even;

particulary in welding points, the belt will be heavier
and stiffer. The figure above shows the relations over
one belt circuit in exaggerated fashion.
Therefore, a high accuracy can normally be ensured

only over entire belt circuits, i.e. over the mean value.
INTECONT is able to acquire and correct this
influence with the use of a belt circuit sensor and a
metal belt mark.
This considerably increases the scales short-term
accuracy.
To enable variations to be considered during 0 Start batch and conveyor belt.
operation, the belt influence is continuously
measured. The compensation adaptively follows up, 1 Abort batch
also if material is fed. or
Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD): 2 resume at any time.
3 Reduce belt speed, change over to dribble feed.
4 Stop conveyor belt.
5 Drive stops, batch setpoint is reached.
For constructional reasons, the weighing platform is

not directly located at the point of material discharge.
Therefore, if belt load varies, the feed rate measuring
result does not exactly correspond to the current feed
rate at the point of discharge.
A special speed-dependent delay elements shifts the
measurement to the discharge point.
To do so, no special load transducers are required;
however, the additional use of the automatic belt 0837
influence compensation is reasonable.

Operating Principle Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Control via prefeeder:
Batch complete, conveyor belt is empty.
0 Start batch and conveyor belt.

Open prefeeder.
1 Stop belt, if necessary; cut off belt and prefeeder

drive.
2 Resume batching.
3 Changeover to dribble feed is possible, but not

always reasonable.
4 Stop prefeeder if precalculated distance to

setpoint is reached.
5 Batch complete.
Conveyor belt continues running for approx. 1/2
belt circuit.
Dribble feed and cut-off point are self-optimizing, i.e.

they are automatically corrected after every batch.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Operating Principle
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Operating Principle Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
5. Technical Data
n Panel-mounting unit VEG 20600/20610 n Surface-mounting unit: with panel mounting unit
VEG 20...
Front panel : 96 x 288 mm
Panel cut-outs : 88 x 282, wall thickness n Wall-mounting housing
max. 10 mm
Mounting depth : min. 225 mm Measuring
(including 50 mm for systems : width x height x depth
connectors) 410x330x236mm
Protected to : IP 20, front to IP 65 Feeding
Material : plastic grey to RAL 7022 systems : width x height x depth
Display : fluorescent, 2 lines of 20 500x600x300mm
characters, 6 mm high Protected to : IP 65
Keyboard : flexible membranes with Material : steel sheet, 1.5 mm, grey
tactile touch Voltage supply : 90...264V/50Hz...60Hz
Signal lamps : LEDs, 2 x green, 3 x red Extension : Feed unit controller
Power supply : 24 V(DC) 50 % -25%,
n Environment
max. 1 A,
no fuse, pole-reversal Temperature : -25 C ... +45 C,
protective circuit tested to -40C
Ext. power supply : 90...264V/ 50HZ...60HZ Humidity : Class F (DIN 40 040) *
Interference :
immunity
to IEC 801
Z1 = 2500 kg Interference
I = 0 kg/h
suppression : to VDE 871, EN 55 011
Housing safety : to IEC 348

EC recommen-
dations : CE label
* Tropical version (class R) upon request
n Storage temperature
-40 C ... +60 C
n Connectors
Plug/screw connectors (Phoenix Combicon),

non-confusible
n Control outputs
Number : 8 N/O relay contacts

Base board : 3
Option card : 5
Load : max. 230 V(AC)
0837 8 A resistive load, 1 A
inductive

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Technical Data
VBW INTECONT PLUS
If error message CPU Not OK is output, all contacts n External totalizing pulse counter
open.
Frequency : max. 10 Hz
n Control Pulse length : selectable 50...1000 ms
Output : 24 V, max. 100 mA
Number : 5 optionally active low or active
Base card : 3 high,
Option card : 2 galvanically isolated,
Type : 24 V(DC) +/-30 %, 5 mA, short-circuit-proof, limited to
galvanically isolated apr. 350 mA,
negative amounts are stored
internally and must be
compensated by positive
n Control inputs (NAMUR) amounts before new pulse is
output.
Number : 2
This ensures integral
Type : NAMUR (DIN 19234),
accuracy also with minimal
short-circuit and cable
belt load.
breakage monitoring
n Serial printer interface
n Analog output
Number : 1 (option card)
Number : 2
Type : RS 232 (V24), max. 38400
Base card : 1
baud
Option card :
1
Data format : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no
Current : raise ...20 mA impressed parity
Raise : 0... <20 mA Isolation : galvanically non-isolated
Load : max. 500 ohms Connectors : Phoenix MSTB, contat
Reference : 0 V by user, spacing 3.5 mm, max.
galvanically isolated 1.5 mm2
Resolution : 12 bits +/- 1 d Character map : ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1)
If error message CPU Not OK is output, output n Load cell connection
signal turn 0 mA.
Voltage supply : +/- 6 V AC (+/-3 %)
(apr. 66 Hz
short-circuit-proof
n Analog input
Measuring cycle : 100ms
Number : 1 Resolution : 24 Bit
Current : raise ...20 mA impressed Load : R (load cell) = min. 80 ohms
Raise : 0... 20 mA Cable length : max. 30 % voltage drop,
Load : 500 ohms max. 500 m
Reference : 0 V internal, Measuring range : -20mV....+50mV
galvanically non isolated with VLW:
Resolution : 10 bits +/- 1/2 d -1.6mV...min. 32mV
Acuracy : <0.4% over entire
temperature range
0837

Technical Data Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
n Serial interface for service PC
Number : 1
Type : RS232; RS422 or RS 485
max. 19200 baud
Data format : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd
parity changeable to even or
no
Isolation : galvanically non-isolated
Connectors : Phoenix MSTB, contact
spacing 3.5 mm, max. 1.5
mm2 or 9-pole D-Sub HD20
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Technical Data
VBW INTECONT PLUS
This page left intentionally blank.
0837

Technical Data Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
6. Characteristics
n Power failure n Signal lamps (top down)
Scale data, calibration values, counter readings VOLTAGE OK (green)

and pulses pending remain stored after power PROCESSOR OK (green)
failure for an unlimited period of time. The internal ALARM (red)
clock continues running for approx. 5 days. MIN (red) MIN feed rate value
MAX (red) MAX feed rate value
n Dialog language
for error messages, operation, and service n Event messages
programs.
Events and faults are displayed in form of an
Select: DEUTSCH alphanumeric code. Call clear text of consecutive
ENGLISH events via keyboard.
FRANCAIS Events are organized into Alarms and Warnings,
ESPANOL with and without acknowledgement. Alarms stop
ITALIANO scale; warnings dont.
All alarms are additionally reported via relay
output.
n Units (selectable)
n Operating philosophy
SI units : kg , kg/h
t , t/h Operator prompting through multi-level menus.
m , cm Important configuration and calibration functions
are protected by password.
NON-SI units: lb , lb/h
t , t/h
f , inch n Belt speed
(see Parameter List) For simple applications, speed measurement can
be omitted.
n Start/Stop totalizing counter

n Zero setting
Select using Parameter B06.
Zero setting can be performed
n Displays 1- manually via keyboard
2- automatically, if belt is empty.
Upper display: Totalizing counter 1
Lower display: Totalizing counters 2 and 3 The maximum admissible zero setting elevation is
Feed rate absolute monitored.
Feed rate relative
Belt speed
Belt load absolute
Belt load relative
Batch data
Select for lower display using cursor keys.

0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Characteristics
VBW INTECONT PLUS
n Taring n MIN/MAX messages and outputs
Designed to zero the basic tare load, the taring 2 separately selectable limit values for monitoring
program on principle has the same function as the of signal lamps and relay outputs.
zero setting program. However, tare elevation is Any event can be reported by message.
not monitored, and the call is protected by
password. MIN/MAX for
(1) Feed rate
(2) Belt load
n Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) (3) Belt speed
Using an additional belt circuit sensor and a metal
Switching threshold, relay outputs and event class
belt mark, the dynamic zero point influence of the
can be defined individually for all 6 possibilities.
conveyor belt can be compensated during
operation (with and without material). n Display filter
This considerably increases the belt weighers Define individually for feed rate, belt load and belt
short-term accuracy. speed.
n Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD)

n Maintenance hints
A special speed-dependent delay element shifts
the point of measurement to the material Display event on screen.
discharge point where the material amount
discharged is acquired. (1) Voltage ON-time
(2) Scale ON-time

n Belt drift display
(3) Zero setting required
For prerequisites, see BIC.
n Statistic Process Control (SPC)
n Batching mode
Mean values, variances, maximum value storage,
(1) Without clearance of conveyor belt. zero settings tables, etc. are available in form of
Controlled is the belt drive motor. service values.
(2) With clearance of conveyor belt.

Controlled is the material prefeeder. n Adaptions
Cut-off point and start of dribble feed can be The electrical system needs not be redesigned,
adapted automatically in either case. adapted, etc.
n Zero drop out
Used to suppress totalization upon measurements

around zero, for counter to stop while belt is being
unloaded.
Deselect function, if not desired.
0837

Characteristics Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
n Calibration n Digital Outputs
Calibration as such is not necessary.

Number Name Default Value
All you have to do is enter some constructional
data on load cells, speed transducer, belt Q04 DO I-MIN DO4
inclination, etc. INTECONT uses these data to Q05 DO I-MAX DO2
compute all requisite display normalizations. Q01 DO ALARM DO3
Check, or recalibration, can be effected in two Q02 DO START Feeder
ways: Q03 DO START Scale DO1
Q11 DO Full Feed
Q12 DO Dribble Feed
a) Using material N15 DO Belt Skew
N16 DO Belt Drift
Enter check result into INTECONT, and N17 DO Belt Slip
measuring result will be corrected. Q06 DO Q-MIN
Q07 DO Q-MAX
b) Using check weight Q08 DO v-MIN
Q09 DO v-MAX
A special check program lets you check Q10 DO Batch Active
normalization, or if certain technical data are Q13 DOKeyboard Mode
not exactly known (lever ratio, belt inclination, B11 DO Pulse Counter
etc.), correct them.
In subsequent operation, this program can be

used to detect mechanical changes, e.g. platform
distorsion after settling of foundation.
n Digital inputs
Number Name Default Value

P03 DI Ackn. Events DI1
P01 Release DI3
B06 START Source (OP)
P02 DI Abort Batch
N04 Sensor Source DI6
B03 Tacho Source DI7
P04 DI Start
P05 DI Zero Set
N18 Freeze BIC
P06 DI Ext. Event
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Characteristics
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Characteristics Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
7 Setting Programs
Function Distributor Programming and Calibrating functions lead to further

menus you can move through using cursor keys.
The function distributor lets you access all setting B= If batching mode is selected, additional
programs. functions can be accessed in main distributor.
G Call function distributor.

If no event is available, function selected last Abort Batch
is displayed. Deselect Batch
Batch Number
f Start function. Print Batch
Make-up
Next = W/Belt Empty
N Return to normal displays, or
abort function.
S= Calibrating functions protected by password.
Prompt is output after call of function only
E= An event is available.
F u n ctions
Displa y Result s
Z= Activated via parameter.
Moving through function distributor has no effect on

weighing functions.
Move through function distributor.
TU
Display Results E
Display Check
START/STOP Feeder Z
Service Values
Batch Number B
Print Counter Readings
>0< Zero Set
START/STOP Keyboard Mode
START/STOP EasyServe
Programming
Calibration Functions S
Read Parameters
Enter Parameters S
Load Default Par. S
Print Parameters
Print Status Report
START/STOP Simulation
Tare S
Weight Check S
0837 Imp/Belt Circuit S
Set Time S

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Setting Programs
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Calibrating Functions Belt Circuit LB
There are 3 setting programs designed to ease initial Call setting program LB: IMP/BELT only
calibration and recalibration. (1) upon initial calibration
(1) Pulses/Belt Circuit LB (2) after mounting new belt or considerably varying
(2) Taring TW belt tension
(3) Weight Check CW (3) after having changed parameter B 04
Charact.Val. vs or B 05 Nominal Speed (in
Upon initial calibration, perform functions in the above case of scales with and without speed
order of sequence. measurement).
All functions can be reached using the CALIBRATION
function and are protected from unauthorized use by Program acquires the number of speed transducer
password. pulses for one belt circuit and uses the number of
pulses as belt circuit code for the following programs:
During program run until acknowledgement (a) Manual or automatic zero setting
(1) no totalization takes place (b) Taring TW
(2) analog outputs are set to offset values (c) Weight Check CW
(3) no event messages are suppressed
(4) all BIC functions are cut off. Upon initial calibration, first call setting program LB.
This also applies to scales without speed
The operating sequence is the same with all measurement.
programs.
G Call function distributor. Prerequisites : (1) Before calling program, measure

time of one belt circuit with
TUf Scroll CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS maximum possible accuracy and
into lower display field and enter into Parameter C 02.
acknowledge. (2) Deselect batching mode.
(3) Ensure conveyor belt is running.
B7f Enter password 07734.
Sequence:
Display shows a setting program, e.g. TW: Tare. Gf Function distributor, calibrating
functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions)
TU Scroll LB: Imp/Belt
Calibrating Functions into lower display field.
S5 TW. Tare
f Start.
N Abort at any time.
Start setting program.

Setting programs do not control belt drive and
N Return to normal displays. prefeeder.
For approx. 2 min., Calibration menu can be If any condition is not met, setting program aborts
f recalled without password input. and a corresponding message is output.
0837

Setting Programs Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Program running: Error message : If sensor is improperly recognized

(sensor pulses measured do not
correspond to parameter setting),
message Sensor Error is output
and setting program aborts. For
>. LB : 5.6 s
1500 Imp troubleshooting, see
Commissioning/Belt Run
Monitoring item.
Upper display : residual run time in seconds

Tare TW
Lower display : added speed transducer pulses
The taring program acquires the belt weighers zero

Program complete: point error over one or multiple integer belt circuits
and uses value to correct current measuring result in
normal mode.
On principle, taring program is identical with zero set-
ting program.
>. LB: v 0.095 m/s
451251 I/B
Tare : acquire basic tare (weight of
mechanical system, conveyor belt,
etc.) upon commissioning, service
and maintenance.
Set to zero : acquire zero point deviation during

Upper display : belt speed mean value over total run operation, e.g. contamination.
time
Lower display : Pulses/belt circuit total Unlike the zero setting program, the correction
amount of the taring program is unlimited.
After taring, the admissible correction amount of the
zeroing program relates to the new reference value.
f Accept result and enter into Prerequisites : (1) Conveyor belt totally unloaded.
Parameter D 06. Control prefeeder using the
N Reject result. START/STOP Feeder function.
(2) Clean mechanical scale system
in weighing area.
The sequence is the same if no speed measurement Normal deposits immediately
is provided. recurring during operation need
not be removed.
Special Messages: (3) Deselect batching mode.
(1) START if belt is not running (4) Ensure conveyor belt is running.
(2) ABORTED Corresponding hint is output
automatically.
Attention!
If a belt circuit sensor is present (N03 = YES), Sequence:

program sequence slightly differs.
Running Gf Function distributor, calibrating
message : E-PROG active (lower display) functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions)
Complete
message : ... - I/B
value flickers upon every belt circuit. TU Scroll TW: Tare
0837 Operation : as described above function into lower display field.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
f Start function. Weight Check CW

N Abort function at any time.
This program lets you check the INTECONT
measuring range.
Program running: Load weighing platform with a known check weight
and acquire platform load mean value over one or
multiple integer belt circuits.
TW: 9 0. 2 % INTECONT compares the result with defined setpoint
Tare 5 2. 3 5
and displays value. Automatic correction does not
take place.
Prerequisites : (1) Tare or zero set
(2) Enter check weight into
Parameter C 08.
Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time Select check weight between
Lower display : continuously meaned tare in % of 30...100 % of nominal platform
nominal belt load load Q0.
Program complete: Q0 = q0 * Leff

q0 = nominal belt load
Parameter D 01
>. Dev. 2.45 %
Tare 53.20 Leff = eff. platform length
Parameter C 05
(3) Apply check weight in proper

location.
(4) Select batching mode.
Upper display : deviation of tare value from previous (5) Start conveyor belt.
taring result Corresponding hint is output
in % of nominal belt load automatically.
dev = + : tare has increased
dev = - : tare has decreased Sequence:
Lower display : mean value of total tare
in % of nominal belt load Gf Function distributor, calibrating
functions, password
f Accept taring result and enter into (see Calibrating Functions).
Parameter D 04.
Set tare correction (D05) to zero.
TU Scroll CW: Weight Check
N Reject result, i.e. scale is not tared. function into lower display field.
Special Messages: f Start function.

(1) START if belt is not running
(2) ABORTED
N Abort function at any time.
Note:
(1) Related to nominal belt load, tare value can
exceed 100%.
(2) If deviation (dev) exceeds 20%, check scale for
mechanical faults, e.g. jammed material
particles.
(3) If BIC is active (M05 = YES), BIC tare vectors 0837

are initialized along with taring program.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Program running: Evaluating Result:

Error < 1 % : KOR = 0.99...1.01
Scale OK, no further action required.
Error < 5 % : KOR = 0.95...1.05

>. CW: 51,4 %
Set / Act 0,9842 Enter KOR value into Parameter D
02.
This make good sense only if
parameter has not yet considered
result of check using material.
Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time
Lower display : continuously meaned SET/ACT Error > 5 % : KOR < 0.95, or KOR > 1.05
measuring result Multi-percent deviations suggest
faulty data input (e.g. belt incination,
lever arms not exactly known), and/or
mechanical faults (misalignment,
Program complete: distorsions).
Check does not consider Parameter D 02 Range

>. CW: 1200,34 kg
Correction, so that check program will indicate
COR 0,99915 same error quotient KOR after check.
Upper display : Fictitious material amount fed over

run time *.
Lower display : mean value KOR of SET/ACT over
total run time
fN Exit program.
Since result is not
AUTOMATICALLY ACQUIRED,
both keys are equivalent.
Special Messages:
(1) START if belt is not running
(2) ABORTED (irrelevant)
* Lets you check scale zero point without check

weight.
Display format: xxxxxxx,yy kg
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Set Time Simulation Mode
Unlike the other programs, date and time can be The Simulation Mode lets you check all scale
changed in START and STOP states of scale and functions without material at the time of
read off under SERVICE VALUES. commissioning.
During simulation, scale is cannot operate in normal
Gf Function distributor, Calibrating mode.
functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions). Gf Function distributor, Calibration
functions, password (see
Calibration Functions).
TU Scroll Set Time function into lower
display field. TU Scroll START Simulation into lower
display field.
f Call menu.
f Start program.
N Abort at any time.
Display : Event message S7

033 Year, e.g. 03
Enter month, day, hour, minute, In upper line, the = symbol
second. flashes.
f Acknowledge every input. Function can be cut off in the same way (STOP
As soon as seconds are Simulation).
acknowledged, new date is stored,
and complete date is briefly
displayed.
Features:
O Delete digit entered last
1. All operating functions can be performed.
2. Feed rate actual value is set to nominal rate.
After power failure, time remains stored for min. 5 3. Belt load and speed measurement are active.
days.
4, All control inputs/outputs operate as usually.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
8 Service Values
The Service table includes detailed system 6) Input switching condition

information.
Call does not affect weighing functions. I+ : DI = 1 1 1 1 1 + 0
GT 1" = contact closed

0" = contact open
f Call SERVICE VALUES function and
Inputs 4 + 5 on option card
activate.
N = no option card
TU Move through service values.
Inputs 6 + 7 designed as Namur inputs
(belt sensor, tacho)
+ short circuit; - cable breakage;
1" = sensor covered; 0" = sensor free
Displays:
7) EL = 22 h
1) VBW 20600-01 2482 Version number
Voltage ON-time
2) HW = 1 Hardware version
Monitored: Parameter K 01, Message S4
3) Option card: 0 (not available)
8) ED : >0 = 95 min
1 (available)
Scale ON-time after last taring, or last manual or
automatic zero set.
O Z1 = 1500100 kg
Opt..Card : 1
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, conveyor belt

may be stopped.
Monitored : Parameter H 07, Message C7
9) ED = 19 h
4) Date and time
Scale and conveyor belt ON-times
5) Relay outputs switching condition
I + DO = 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Prerequisite : Totalization ON
Monitored : Parameter K 03, Message S3
1" = contact closed
0" = contact open
10) Tacho = 96.6 Hz
Outputs 4-8 on option card
N = no option card
Speed transducer input frequency
Select frequency between 0.4...3000 Hz.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Service Values
VBW INTECONT PLUS
11) aw = 30.988 % 17) Belt Drift tr = 0.12 cm
Load on load cells related to total of load cells The arrows indicate the direction of drift.
rated capacity.
If value exceeds 100 %, load cells are
overloaded.
From 110 % onward, message H4 :
L/C Input > MAX is output.
12) vap = 0.883168 mV/V
Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Prerequisite: see Slip

delayed for point of material discharge (CPD Monitored : Parameters N09-N12, messages
active). C3 and C4
13) bic = 2.34001 mV/V 18) Pulses of sensor area Imp.S. = 386
Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Measured pulses of sensor area. If belt sensor is
with active BIC (Belt Influence Compensation) properly located, the following result is expected:
Imp.S. = 0.5 * sensor length * 0.01 * charact. value vs

14) L/C = 1.383257 mV/V
Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Prerequisite: see Slip

(Gross).
19) Mean value Imitt = 22.27 %
Acquired before belt influence compensation and
delay for point of discharge. Feed rate mean value related to nominal feed
rate
Filter : Exponential, Parameter K 06

15) R_L/C = 300 ohms Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin
Initialization : Zero at power ON
Load cell resistance value
20) Variance var = 0.02 %
16) Slip s = 0.25 %
Feed rate variance related to nominal feed rate
Variation in belt length in % of total belt length square.
(Parameter D 06).
Filter : Exponential, Parameter K 06
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin
Prerequisite: Belt sensor active (N03), sensor Initialization : Zero at power ON
area on conveyor belt (N04).
Monitored : Parameter N13, message C8
The variance indicates belt load instability.

Higher values suggest poor discharge behaviour
of material.
0837

Service Values Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
21) Max. belt load QMAX = 57 % 26) ZE = 53
Maximum belt load during preselected SPC time Pulses output across pulse output of external
related to nominal belt load. totalizing counter, counted from command Reset
Counter 1
Time : SPC time, Parameter K 05
Evaluation : SPC time continuously floating
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin 27) ZO = 1
Initialization : Zero at power ON
Max. display : 255 % Pulses pending.
If value constantly exceeds zero, pulse frequency
22) No load percentage TQ < MIN = 23 % surpasses 10 Hz.
Increase smallest display digit of Counter 1
Total time during which belt load is below Qmin (Parameter B 07).
(F 05), related to SPC time, Parameter K 05
28) AI = 12.54 mA
Evaluation : SPC time continuously floating
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin Analog input input current
Initialization : with Q = Qmin at power ON
29) CS = 10851
Check sum of scale software
30) CS_b = 10851
Check sum recomputed in cycles. If value

CS_b differs from CS, a serious fault is
present. Contact the Schenck Service.
31) BIC-N = 27
Counter reading indicating how often BIC sensor

has been recognized
23) Last taring T (date) 23.51 %
32) BIC-E = 5
Date and total tare related to nominal belt load
Counter reading indicating faulty BIC circuits not
Prerequisites : Correct zero point using taring entered into tare vectors
program or manual/automatic
zero setting function.
Manual changes of correction
parameters are not recorded. 33) ES-Version = 11
Displayed are the 5 last taring or zeroing Current EasyServe Version

operations.
24) AO1 = 4.15 mA
Analog output 1 output current
25) AO2 = 10.00 mA
Analog output 2 output current

0837 (on option card)

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Service Values
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Service Values Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
9. Parameterization
General Information There are two types of parameter:

Selection parameters Let you select from various
Parameters are variable characteristics or data used options, e.g.
to match the INTECONT to the application. WARNING, ALARM.
Display units and format Numeric parameters Enter numeric value, e.g.
Limit values nominal feed rate.
Nominal and calibration data, etc.
Some parameters can be selected in accordance with

the requirements (e.g. display formats), others have to Call Parameter Menu
be taken from Spec Sheets supplied.
During parameter input, all functions are maintained. G Call function distributor.
However, during operation, only parameters with no
influence on measurement, e.g. display filter, should TUf Scroll PROGRAMMING function
be changed. into lower display field and
acknowledge.
Default Parameters: TUf Select ENTER PAR. function.
All parameter are preset with default values. These Bf Enter password 07734.
are proven suggestions and can normally be used as
defined.
The default values can be loaded using sub-function

Load Default Parameters.
Dialog Behaviour
Block: A
Identification
The parameters are organized into function blocks A,

B, ... and, within a block, described by
name Display shows title of first parameter block.

number 1, 2, 3 ..
and
value. N Return to normal displays.
For approx. 2 minutes, parameter
Values differing from default are identified by a * menu can be recalled without
before the block letter. password input.
Nominal Feed Rate

B02 1000.0 kg/h
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Preselect Parameters Enter Parameters
P Prepare input.
TU Selection parameters:
Value flashes.
Rated Data
Block: B Scroll desired value into lower
display field.
46 Go to the left (4) or to the right (6),
see Hardware Configuration.
1. Block letter B9 Numeric parameters:
Feature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Enter value using keypad.
TU Move through blocks A, B ..., up and f Acknowledge input.

down. Next parameter is displayed.
Block letter flashes. O Delete digits.
f Select block. N Abort input.
Parameter selected last is
displayed.
OFF key 0 is active always; ON key I, only after
completed parameter input.
2. Parameter number
Nominal Feed Rate

B02 10000.0 kg/h
TU Move through parameter numbers

within a block.
Parameter number flashes.
f Move through parameter numbers
independent of block (UP only).
NN Return to block titles.

Return to normal mode.
0837

Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Hardware Configuration Load Default Parameter
Lets you load the default settings.

When parameterizing the hardware used, the source Function is protected by password and YES/NO
determines whether unit, channel and level must be prompt.
indicated, or not. The table below will assist you in
selecting the hardware configuration: Attention!
All variable parameters and calibration values are
Source Unit Channel Level reset.
FB
OP
G Call PROGRAMMING function and
DEFAULT PARAMETERS.
v B1 YES =1 f Acknowledge
NO =0 selection.
-
Power Failure
DI I+ DI1-DI7 HI, LO
Parameters remain stored for an unlimited period of
DO I+ DO1-DO8 HI, LO time.
AI I+
As you can see, with Fieldbus [FB", Control Unit

(OP), Speed (v) and Not Assigned (-)] no additional
information is required.
Digital Inputs (DI) and Digital Outputs (DO) require
unit, channel and level to be indicated.
With Analog Input (AI), the unit is firmly set to I+.
Sample:
Parameter B06 START Source determines from

where the scale is started.
Description Source
B06 START Source OP
Alternatives FB, DI, v
On standard, the scale is started from INTECONT

keyboard (OP).
Alternatively, fieldbus, digital input (DI) or speed (v)
can be selected. If DI is the desired source,
additionally indicate channel and level (see Hardware
Configuration table); the unit is firmly set to I+.
4 Keys 4 (go to the left) and 6 (go to

the right), let you shift between
source, channel and level.
6
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Parameters Overview D 05 Tare Correction T 0,00 kg/m

D 06 Belt Circuit Char 1000 000 I/B
This list applies to software: VBW 20600-08 Block E Analog Output
Block A Dialog Behaviour E 01 Elevation AO1 I

E 02 Elevation AO1 4,00 mA
A 01 Language ENGLISH E 03 Limit Value AO1 20,00 mA
A 02 Units SI E 04 Source AO2 Q
A 03 Password 07734 or 7734) E 05 Elevation AO2 4.00 mA
A 04 2.Password 2889 E 06 Limit Value AO2 20.00 mA
A 05 Feeder ON/OFF active
A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF active Block F Limit Values
A 07 Batch ON/OFF active
A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF active F 01 Value for I-MIN 5,0 %I
A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF active F 02 Event Class I-MIN WARNING 2
A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF active F 03 Value for I-MAX 120,0 %I
A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF active F 04 Event Class I-MAX WARNING 2
F 05 Value for Q-MIN 20,0 %Q
F 06 Event Class Q-MIN WARNING 2
Block B Rated Data F 07 Value for Q-MAX 120,0 %Q
F 08 Event Class Q-MAX WARNING 2
B 01 Feed Rate Unit - t/h F 09 Value for V-MIN 5,0 %V
B 02 Nominal Feed Rate 400,0000 t/h F 10 Event Class V-MIN WARNING 2
B 03 Tacho Source DI I+, DI7 HI F 11 Value for V-MAX 120,0 %V
B 04 vs Charact. Value 50.26 I/m F 12 Event Class V-MAX WARNING 2
B 05 Nominal Speed 1,0000 m/s
B 06 START Source OP
B 07 FMZ1 Unit t Block G Filter Setting
B 08 FMZ1 Pulse Dur. 0 ms
B 09 FMZ2 Unit t G 01 I Display 3,0 s
B 10 FMZ3 Unit t G 02 I Analog Output 3,0 s
B11 DO Pulse Counter G 03 Q Display 3,0 s
B12 Pulse Weighting 0.0 kg G 04 V Display 3,0 s
G 05 L/C Filter 1,0 s
G 06 Afterfl. Time 3,0 s
Block C Calibrating Data
C 01 Belt Circuit No. 1.00 Block H AUTO Zero Set

C 02 Belt Circuit Time 30.0 s
C 03 L/C Charac. Value 2,8500 mV/V H 01 AUTO Zero Active NO
C 04 L/C Rated Cap. 220,000 kg H 02 Limit Value Diff. 0,50 %Q
C 05 Eff. Platf. Length 1,000 m H 03 Mean Limit Value 1,00 %Q
C 06 Lever Ratio 1,0000 H 04 Zero Set Limit 5,00 %Q
C 07 Angle a 0.0 degrees H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX WARNING 1
C 08 Check Weight 50,000 kg H 06 Zero Set Time 4h
H 07 Time Elapsed IGNORE
H 08 Print Result NO
Block D Calibrat. Results H 09 ZDO Active NO
H 10 ZDO Limit 1,00 %Q
D 01 Nominal Belt Load 111,11 kg/m H 11 Zero Set Diff. 5,0 %
D 02 Span Correction 1,0000 H 12 Tare Diff. >MAX WARNING 2
D 03 Total Tare 0,00 kg/m
0837
D 04 Basic Tare N 0,00 kg/m

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block I Batch Mode L 09 Physics RS 485

L 10 Baud Rate 9600
I 01 Batch Dribble FD 100,000 kg L 11 Format Data 8-E-1
I 02 Batch End 0,000 kg L 12 Adresse 16
I 03 Adaption Fact. 1,0 L 13 FLOAT-Format IEEE
I 04 Batch Tolerance + 1,0 % L 14 Address 63
I 05 Batch Tolerance - 1,0 % L 15 Baud Rate 125K
I 06 Out of Tolerance WARNING 1 L 17 S5 Physics RS422
I 07 Belt Empty NO L 22 Hardware VxB020
I 08 Batch > Setp. IGNORE
I 09 Batch Source OP
Block J Printer Setting Block M Feeder Control
J 01 Baud Rate 9600 M 01 Feeder Active NO

J 02 AUTO Print NO M 02 Setting Time 0,0 s
J 03 Print Subtotal Error M 03 Feed Distance 0,00 m
J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 NO M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST NO
J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2 NO M 05 Change-over FF/DF YES
J 06 Print Page Length 72 lines
J 07 Batch Setp.Line 6
J 08 Batch Setp.Col. 8 Block N Scale Monitoring
J 09 Batch Act.Line 7
J 10 Batch Act.Col. 8 N 01 CPD Active NO
J 11 FMZ 1 Line 8 N 02 Platf.Dis.Length 0,00 %LB
J 12 FMZ 1 Column 8 N 03 Belt Sensor Active NO
J 13 FMZ 2 Line 9 N 04 Source Sensor DI6
J 14 FMZ 2 Column 8 N 05 BIC Active NO
J 15 Date/Time Line 4 N 06 Sensor Length 8.20cm
J 16 Date/Time Column 8 N 07 Sensor Width 12.00 cm
J 17 Event Line 12 N 08 Sensor Offset 0.00 cm
J 18 Event Column 8 N 09 Belt Drift 3.00 cm
J 19 Set Line to Zero 10 N 10 Belt Drift Event W1 (C04)
J 20 Set Column to Zero 8 N 11 Belt Skew 4.00cm
J 21 Line Number 3 N 12 Belt Skew Event A (C03)
J 22 Column Number 8 N 13 Slip Limit 2.00 %LB
N 14 Slip Event W1 (C08)
Block K Maintenance Int. N 15 DO Belt Drift
N 16 DO Belt Skew
K 01 Maintenance Elec. 3000 hours N 17 DO Slip
K 02 Event Maint. EL. WARNING 1 N 18 Freeze BIC
K 03 Maint. STR-Meter 3000 hours
K 04 Event Maint. Run. WARNING 1
K 05 SPC Time 8 hrs Block O Events
K 06 SPC Filter 1,00 hour
BLOCK L Comm. Fieldbus O 01 Power Failure A (E01)
O 02 Memory Error A (S01)
L 01 Protocol Type NO O 03 Tacho Input A (C02)
L 02 Host timeout 5s O 04 Namur Err. Tacho A (E02)
L 03 Comm.-Error Host ALARM (S 09) O 05 Namur Err Belt W1 (E03)
L 04 Word sequence I:std/L:std O 06 L/C Input A (C01)
L 05 Byte sequence Low-High O 07 No Release W1 (S02)
L 06 Configuration FIXED O 08 L/C Input > MAX A (H04)
0837 L 07 Address 1 O 09 L/C Input < MIN A (L04)
L 08 Resolution 4096

VBW INTECONT PLUS
O10 Simualtion Active W2 (S07) Block U: Ethernet

O11 Error Ext. Event A (E06)
U 01 IP-Address 1 192
U 02 IP-Address 2 168
Block P Digital Inputs U 03 IP-Address 3 240
U 04 IP-Address 4 1
P 01 Release DI I+ DI 3 HI U 05 Net Mask 1 255
P 02 Stop Batch U 06 Net Mask 2 255
P 03 Ackn. Events DI I+DI1 HI U 07 Net Mask 3 255
P 04 DI Start U 08 Net Mask 4 0
P 05 DI Setting to zero U 09 Gatway 1 192
P 06 DI Ext. Event U 10 Gatway 2 168
U 11 Gatway 3 240
Block Q Digital Outputs U 12 Gatway 4 0
Q 01 DO Alarm DO I+ D03 LO
Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON
Q 03 DO Feeder ON DO I+ D01 HI BLOCK V: Fixmode Parameter
Q 04 DO I-MIN DO I+ DO4 LO
Q 05 DO I-MAX DO I+ DO2 LO V 01 ID Preset Value 1 320
Q 06 DO Q-MIN V 02 ID Preset Value 2 352
Q 07 DO Q-MAX V 03 ID Preset Value 3 384
Q 08 DO v-MIN V 04 ID Preset Value 4 596
Q 09 v-MAX V 05 ID Preset Value 5 594
Q 10 DO Batch Active V 06 ID Preset Value 6 598
Q 11 DO Full Feed V 07 ID Preset Value 7 0
Q 12 DO Dribble Feed V 08 ID Preset Value 8 0
Q 13 DO Keyboard Mode V 09 ID Read Value 1 752
V 10 ID Read Value 2 784
Block R Comm. EasyServe V 12 ID Read Value 4 1872
R 01 Station Address 1 V 14 ID Read Value 6 1880
R 02 Physics RS 232 V 15 ID Read Value 7 1884
R 03 EasyServe Baudr. 19200 V 16 ID Read Value 8 1876
R 04 Format Data 8-0-1
R 05 Connection serial
R 06 MODBUS Idle Time 4ms
Block S: Secondary display DLZ
S01 DLZ active No

S02 Baud rate 9600
S02 Data format 8 bit NO
S04 Physics RS232
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block A : Dialog Behaviour
A 01 Language Note:
Range: DEUTSCH Default: DEUTSCH If you forget your password, you have to change your
ENGLISH* password with EasyServe or report the shown value of
AMERICAN ENG* the parameter A03 to Schenck Service to find out the
FRANCAIS appropriate password
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
Selection applies to all displays, error messages and
parameters.
A 04 Second password
* identical
Range: 1000 - 9999 Default: 2889
The password for using a specific system. This

password allows you to protect the basic functions in
A 02 Units the function distributor (see above). It does not allow
access to parameters or adjustment functions. The
Range: SI Default: SI changed password is also shown encoded. The
NON-SI default value 2889 generates the return display
14389.
Convert displays and parameter inputs from SI units Note: If you forget the second password, you can
into American units. enter a new password in the A04 parameter using the
standard password
American Units SI Units Conversion *

lb kg 1 lb = 0.453593 kg
A 05 Feeder ON/OFF
t t 1 t = 0.907185 t = 2000 lb
f m 1 f = 0.3048 m Range: active Default: active
inch cm 1 inch = 2.54 cm
not active
Password
* also applicable to compound units, e.g. kg/hr 2. Password
Confirm
You can use this parameter to control access to the
basic functions of ON/OFF prefeeder.
A 03 Password You have the options below::
Range: 1000 - 9999 Default: 07734 o 7734
active: Access is always allowed.
The password that secures the INTECONT keyboard not active: Access is never allowed. This
access to parameters and adjustment functions function is not visible in the
can now be changed. The changed password is distributor.
shown encoded in the parameter dialog and
EasyServe. The default value 07734 (or 7734) Password: Access is available with the
generates the return display 26574 (this process is standard password (A03).
identical to DISOCONT).
Second
Password: Access is available with the new
0837
second password (A04)..

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Confirm: Access has to be confirmed again

for security reasons. A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF
Range: active Default: active
Note: The prefeeder also has to be activated with
not active
parameter M01.
Password
2. Password
A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF Confirm

not active You can use this parameter to control access to the
Password basic functions of EasyServe activate/deactivate.
2. Password The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.
Confirm

basic functions of keyboard ON/OFF mode. The
range of values is identical to the A05 parameter. A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF
not active
Password
A 07 Batch ON/OFF 2. Password
Confirm
not active
Password You can use this parameter to control deleting counter
2. Password 2. The range of values is identical to the A05
Confirm parameter.
You can use this parameter to control access to the A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF
basic functions of batch preselect/deselect. The
range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.
not active
Password
A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF 2. Password
Confirm
Range: active Default: active You can use this parameter to control deleting counter
not active 2. The range of values is identical to the A05
Password parameter.
2. Password
Confirm

basic function of >0: zero setting. The range of
values is identical to the A05 parameter.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block B : Rated Data
B 01 Feed Rate Unit B 05 Nominal Speed

Range: - - - - - - t/h Default: - - - - - - t/h Range: 0,0100...10,000 m/s Default: 1,0000 m/s
- - - - . - t/h
- - - . - - t/h Limit value reference.
- - . - - - t/h If BIC or CPD (Parameter Block N) are used, value
- - - - - - kg/h should be accurate to some percent.
- - - - . - kg/h If scales operate without speed measurement, B 05
- - -. - - kg/h determines the accuracy.
- -.- - - kg/h
Determine feed rate display format.
B 06 START Source
B 02 Nominal Feed Rate Range: OP Default: OP

FB
Range: 0,0020...99999,9 t/h Default: 400,0000 t/h DI
v
Reference for limit values and service displays
To start/stop totalization, there is no single solution:

OP : from INTECONT keyboard
FB : via fieldbus interface
B 03 Tacho Source DI : using digital input. Default value is DI2. You
Range: DI Default: DI I+ DI7 HI can also use any other free digital input.
Digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. if
scale fails after Alarm, remove START signal
and re-apply.
Select - to stop belt speed measurement. v : If you select belt speed v, totalization starts at
Computation uses nominal speed B 05. v>v-min (Parameter F09) and stops at
v<v-min.
B 04 vs Charact. Val.
Range: 10,00...100 000,0 I/m Default:
50,26 I/m
Number of speed transducer pulses per belt meter.

Product B 04 * B 05 must range between 0.5...2500
Hz of speed input.
Special case:B 03 = NO
Do not change characteristic value vs; this
would change the run time of your setting
programs.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Note:
If you select v, no batching is possible.
Dialog function Keyboard Mode lets you change over

from selected source to keyboard, and vice versa.
Note
G06 defines the totalizing counters tracking time.

If Parameter P01 Release is set to - -", no release is
required.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
B 07 FMZ 1 Unit B 09 FMZ 2 Unit

Range: ------- t Default: - - - - - - - t same as B08, however, for Counter 2
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
- - - - - - t *10
----- t *100
B 10 FMZ 3 Unit
- - - - - - - kg same as B08, however, for Counter 3
- - - - - . - kg
- - - - . - - kg
- - - . - - - kg
B11 DO Pulse Counter

Lets you determine the display format for Counter 1,
all batch values and pulse weighting. Range: Default:
If no external counter is present, set Parameter B08 to DO
0. The impulse output of totalizing counter 1 can now
also be output via a digital output. The impulse output
of INTECONT on plug X6, pins 8-11 is still used with
default value and the configured output is used
B 08 FMZ 1 Pulse Dur. instead with the alternative DO.
The impulse duration is still determined with the B08
Range: 0....1000 ms Default: 0 ms parameter. Readings less than 10 ms block the output
total and readings up to 1 second are set to 1 second
Lets you determine output pulse length of external
when a digital output is used.
totalizing counter. Pulse weighting corresponds to the
smallest display digit of Counter 1
(Parameter B07).
B08 < 10 ms : Pulse output is disabled. B 12 Pulse Weighting

All pulses not yet output still are
deleted. Range: 0.00 100000.00 kg Default: 0.00 kg
At nominal feed rate the output frequency is: The weighting of an output impulse on the impulse
output of totalizing counter 1 can now be set to be
freely selected. The weighting of an impulse
corresponds to the smallest possible digit of counter 1
with default value 0.00 (refer to parameter B07).
PNENN = nominal feed rate in kg/h or t/h
Zmin = smallest display digit of Counter 1

(B 07) in kg or t
Select Zmin (B07) so that f does not exceed

10 Hz.
In addition, pulse duration B08 must be smaller than
1/f.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block C : Calibrating Data
C 01 Belt Circuit No. C 06 Lever Ratio

Range: 1...100 Default: 1,00 Range: 0,0100...2,0000 Default: 1,0000
lets you determine the run time of the Zero Setting, Lever ratio of force transducing weighed idler of
Taring and Weight Check setting programs. platform and load cell.
Does not apply to AUTO Zero Set.
Q = platform load
C 02 Belt Circuit Time F = load on load cell
Range: 1,0...9999,0 s Default: 30,0 s With weighing modules with leaf spring parallel
guidance, lever ratio is always 1.
lets you determine the measuring time for the
Imp/Belt Circuit calibration program. C 07 Angle a
Normally, the time is selected for one belt circuit.
Range: 0,0...60,00 degrees Default: 0,00 degrees
Angle of longitudinal scale axis if load cell is mounted

C 03 L/C Charac. Value
vertical to belt.
Range: 0,01...9,9999 mV/V Default: 2,8500 mV/V
indicates the load cell characteristic value

(transmission factor). C 08 Check Weight
Range: 0,001...22000,0 kg Default: 50,000 kg
Weight of material on load cell simulated by check

C 04 L/C Rated Cap. weight
Range: 0,5000... Default: 220,000 kg

220 000.0 kg
indicates the total of load cell rated capacities.

Pivots are considered as load cells.
C 05 Eff. Platf. Length

Range: 0,1000...50,000 m Default: 1,000 m
indicates effective length of weighing platform.

0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block D : Calibrat. Results
D 01 Nominal Belt Load D 05 Tare Correction T

No input possible Default: 111,11 kg/m No input required Default: 0,00 kg/m
max. +- 1000 kg/m
computed from nominal data B 02 and B 05
used as reference value for limit values and zero Result of manual or automatic zero setting program
setting program.
After every taring operation, D 05 is set to 0.
D 02 Span Correction
Range: 0,5000...2,0000 Default: 1,0000
proportionally influences measurement of belt load q.
q(corrected) = q(measured) D 02
D 06 Belt Circuit Char
used to correct measuring system through check with
material. No input required Default: 1000000 I/U
max. 9E6
D 03 Total Tare
No input possible Default: 0,00 kg/m Result of basic calibration program Imp/Belt Circuit.
Determines cycle of setting programs.
Total tare = basic tare + tare correction
Divided by Parameter B 04 (vs Charact.Val.), belt
length in m results.
D 04 Basic Tare N
No input required Default: 0,00 kg/m
max. 10000 kg/m
Result of taring program.
Attention!
When entering Parameters D 02 ... D 05 in manual, start
with D 02.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block E : Analog Output
E 01 Source AO 1 E 04 Source AO 2
Range: I (feed rate) Default: I Range: I (feed rate) Default: Q
Q (belt load) Q (belt load)
V (belt speed) V (belt speed)
One of these values can be output in analog fashion. One of these values can be output in analog fashion.
Filters: Parameters G 02, G 04, G 05 Filters: Parametesr G 02, G 04, G 05
E 02 Elevation AO 1 E 05 Elevation AO 2
Range: 0,00...20,00 mA Default: 4,00 mA Range: 0,00...20,00 mA Default: 4,00 mA
Output current with E 01 set to 0. Output current with E04 set to 0.

The smallest value is limited to E 02, also in stop state The smallest value is limited to E 05, also in stop state
of scale. of scale.
E 03 Limit Value AO 1 E 06 Limit Value AO 2

Range: 0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA Range: 0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA
Output current with E 01 set to 100 % (nominal value). Output current with E04 set to 100 % (nominal value).
Range of output current is limited to 0...20 mA. Current output range is limited to 0...20 mA by the
hardware.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block F : Limit Values
If measurement values exceed their MIN/MAX limits, a F 06 Event Class Q-MIN L2

corresponding event message is output (L1... L3, H1...
H3). Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
Monitoring starts 10 s after start up. IGNORE
ALARM
F 01 Value for I-MIN
F 07 Value for Q-MAX
Range: -10...200,0 % I Default: 5,0 % I
Range: -10...200,0 % Q Default: 120,0 % Q
Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01
F 02 Event Class I-MIN L1 F 08 Event Class Q-MAX H2

Range: WARNING 2 Default: Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2 WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE IGNORE
ALARM ALARM
F 03 Value for I-MAX F 09 Value for V-MIN

Range: -10...200,0 % I Default: 120,0 % I Range: -10...200,0 % V Default: 5.0 % V
Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02. Reference: Nominal Speed B 05
F 04 Event Class I-MAX H1

Range: WARNING 2 Default: F 10 Event Class V-MIN L3
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE Range: WARNING 2 Default:
ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE
ALARM
F 05 Value for Q-MIN
Range: -10...200.0 % Q Default: 20,0 % Q F 11 Value for V-MAX
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Range: -10...200,0 % V Default: 120,0 % V
Reference: Nominal Speed B 05
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
F 12 Event Class V-MAX H3

Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE
ALARM
Block G : Filters
I = feed rate V = belt speed Q = belt load
G 01 I Display G 04 V Display
Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s
Feed rate display Belt speed display
G 02 I Analog output G 05 L/C Filter

Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 1.0...600.0s Default: 1.0 s
Feed rate analog output Holds for all functions and displays depending on belt
load.
G 03 Q Display G 06 Afterfl. Time

Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 0.0...2000.0 s Default: 3.0 s
Belt load display Determines the time totalization goes on after turn-off
of feeder.
All filters are of the 1st order type

(exponential), i.e. after abrupt
change of signal, approx. 2/3
of the limit value are reached
after the set time.
Longer times stabilize display

but reduce update rate. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block H : AUTO Zero Set
H 01 AUTO Zero Active H 04 Zero Set Limit

Range: NO Default: NO Range: 0.00...100.00 %Q Default: 5.00 %Q
YES For more information,
see Calibration item. Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Maximum admissible totals value of all manual and
automatic zero setting operations. Correction is not
Lets you select the automatic zero setting function acquired.
used to correct zero point on empty conveyor belt
after every belt circuit.
Prerequisites: v > vmin

No setting program
H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX C5
No parameter input Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
ALARM
H 02 Limit Value Diff. Automatic zero setting has exceeded Zero Set Limit
H04. Value is not acquired.
Range: 0.00...10.00 %Q Default: 0.50 %Q
First prerequisite for automatic zero setting.

Defines the uniformity of mean belt load between two
consecutive belt circuits. H 06 Zero Set Time
Range: 1...999 h Default: 4 h
Lets you know that no manual or automatic zero

H 03 Mean Limit Value setting nor taring has been performed during the set
time.
Range: 0.00...10.00 %Q Default: 1.00 %Q
Message C 7: Set Time To Zero
Second prerequisite for automatic zero setting.

Defines the maximum admissible belt load mean value
over 2 consecutive belt circuits.
H 07 Time Elapsed C7
Range: IGNORE Default: IGNORE
WARNING 1 Zeit : H 06
WARNING 2
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
H 08 Print Result H 11 Zero Set Diff.

Range: NO Range: 0.00...100.00 %F Default: 5.0 %F
YES Default: NO
Print zero setting result after every belt circuit. Indicates the difference between two consecutive
manual or automatic zero setting operations.
Excess is reported by message C9.
Result autom. zero setting
Total Tare [kg/m] 50,23 Tare [kg/m] 1,56
(D 03) (D 05)
H 12 Tare Diff. > MAX C9

Range: WARNING 2
H 09 ZDO Active WARNING1
IGNORE
Range: NO ALARM Default: WARNING 2
YES Default: NO
Activates Zero Drop Out function (see H 10).

Manual or automatic zero setting has exceeded
difference H 11.
Correction is acquired save in case of ALARM
messages.
H 10 ZDO Limit
Range: 0.0...10.00 %Q Default: 1.00 %Q
If ZDO function is active and belt load exceeds the

defined limit, feed rate measurement and totalization
are suppressed.
No symbol appears on display.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block I : Batch Mode
The sequence of the available batch modes is I 03 Adaption Fact.

detailed in Chapter Details.
Make sure start source B 06 is not set to v. Range: 0.0...1.0 Default: 1.0
Pre-cut-off amount I 02 is adapted automatically, so

that the system better suits the situation upon next
I 01 Batch Dribble FD batch.
Value is corrected by the batch error * I 03.
Range: 0.00...220 000 kg Default: 100 000 kg
I 03 = 0: no adaption
If batch setpoint is reached Batch Setpoint I 01-I 02", I 03 = 1: full adaption
full feed output Q11 is reset; dribble feed output Q12
activated. Intermediate values cause a filtered adaption,
These signals can be used, e.g. to reduce belt speed preferred in the case of plants with non-exact
or prefeeder output. repeatability.
I 02 Batch End
Range: 0.00...220 000 kg Default: 0.000 kg
I 04 Batch Tolerance +
If batch setpoint minus pre-cut-off amount I 02 is Range: 0.0...100.0 % Default: 1.0 %
reached, batch is complete.
Drive, or prefeeder, stops. Reference: Batch Setpoint
Defines the value admissible for excess of batch

setpoint.
I 05 Batch Tolerance -
Range: 0.0...100.0 % Default: 1.0 %
Reference: Batch Setpoint
Defines the value for shortfall of batch setpoint.
I 02 makes allowance for possible afterflow. I 06 Out of Tolerance B1

Range: WARNING 1
WARNING2
ALARM
IGNORE Default: WARNING 1
Event message B1 reports excess of limit values I 04

or I 05.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
I 07 Belt Empty
Range: NO Default: NO
YES
NO : Batching without belt clearance.

Stop of conveyor belt aborts batch.
YES : Batching with belt clearance.

Stop of prefeeder aborts batch.
(Prefeeder Active M 01 = YES)
I 08 Batch > Setp. B4

Range: IGNORE Default: IGNORE
WARNING1
WARNING 2
ALARM
Batch actual value exceeds setpoint by tolerance I 04.
Message B4 is output.
After acknowledgement (also ALARM messages),
monitoring of current batch cuts off.
I 09 Batch Source
Range: OP
FB Default: OP
OP : Batch setpoint, batch number and make-up

setpoint are preset from the INTECONT
keyboard.
FB : Above values are set via fieldbus interface.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block J : Printer Setting
J 01 Baud rate
Range: 2400 Default: 9600
4800
9600 30.09.97 11:45:21L2 W1 Load < MIN
19200 0.09.97 11:59:01L2 W1 Load < MIN
38400
Event report
Baud rate for transmission to printer.
J 03 Print Subtotal
Print Batch
Range: Error Default: Error
Batch number 12 YES
30.06.03 11:45:10 NO
Batch Setpoint 1000 kg
Batch Actual Val. 998 kg
Totalizer 1 1200 kg Error : Each event is printed automatically as soon
Totalizer 2 90000 kg as available.
Zero Set before 75 min
YES : See above, however, including totalizing
Events counter (FMZ) sub-totals.
NO : No printout
Printing is effected in batching and normal modes.
Save parameter J 03, all parameters are valid for batch

and counter reports.
J 02 Auto Print
Special case:
Range: NO Default: NO If a value is set to line 0 and column 0, it does not
YES appear in report.
NO : Batch report can be printed only using the

control menu.
YES : Batch report is printed automatically when

batch is complete.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 J 09 Batch Act. Line

Range: NO Default: NO Range: 0...117 Default: 7
YES
YES : Reset counter 1 upon start of next batch
provided that batch report has been
printed. 1)
J 10 Batch Act. Col.
NO : Counter 1 can be reset only using the Range: 0...127 Default: 8
control function.
1) also possible without printer (J 02, J 04= YES).
J 11 FMZ 1 Line
J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2
Range: 0...117 Default: : 8
YES
See J 04, however, for counter 2. J 12 FMZ 1 Column

Range: 0...127 Default: 8
J 06 Print Page Length J 13 FMZ 2 Line

Range: 9...127 lines Default: 72 lines Range: 0...117 Default: 9
The page must be minimum 4 times longer than the

number of data to be printed.
The line spacing is always 1/6 inch.
J 14 FMZ 2 Column
Change of parameter automatically initializes printer. Range: 0...127 Default: 8
J 15 Date/Time Line
J 07 Batch Setp. Line
J 16 Date/Time Col.
J 08 Batch Setp. Col.
J 17 Event Line
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
J 18 Event Column J 21 Line Number Nb

Range: 0...127 Default: 8 Range: 0...117 Default: 3
J 22 Column Number Nb
J 19 Set Line to Zero ED:>0 Range: 0...127 Default: 8
J 20 Set Column to Zero ED:>0

Block K : Maintenance Int.
K 01 Maintenance Elec. K 04 Event Maint. Run. S3

Range: 0...10000 h Default: 3000 h Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
Message: S4 (K 02) WARNING 2
IGNORE
Alerts you on maintenance work to be effected after a
certain voltage ON-time.
The total of conveyor belt run times exceeds the time

defined by K 03.
When the set interval has elapsed, message S3 is
K 02 Event Maint. EL S4
output.
WARNING 2 WARNING 1
IGNORE
K 05 SPC Time
The total of voltage ON-times exceeds the time Range: 1...24 h Default: 8 h
defined by K 01.
When the set interval has elapsed, message S4 is Acquisition interval for service values, e.g. empty belt.
output. SPC = Statistical Process Control
K 03 Maint. STR-Meter
Range: 0...10000 h Default: 3000 h
Message: S3 (K 04)
Alerts you of maintenance work to be effected after a

certain conveyor belt run time.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
K 06 SPC Filter
Range: 0.00...24.00 h Default: 1.00 h
Exponential first-order filter for service values, e.g.

mean value and feed rate variance.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block L : Communication Fieldbus
L 01 Protocol Type
MODBUS COMP.
S5-BCC COMP.
MODBUS
PROFIBUS DP
DEVICENET
MODBUS/TCP
Every protocol requires an optional interface card to
be present.
COMP identifies the compatible protocols.
Protocol Type MODBUS/ S5-BCC Comp. MODBUS PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet MODBUS TCP ETHERNET IP
MB-COMP
.
VEG VSS VSS VSS VPB 020/8020 VCB VET 020 VET 022
020/8020
BLOCK L Default MODBUS/ PROFIBUS DEVICENET MODBUS/ ETHERNET/ S5-BCC Comp.

MB-COMP. DP TCP IP
L 01 Protocol Type NO x x x x x x
L 02 TIMEOUT Host 5s x x x x x x
L 03 Comm. Error Host IG (S 09) x x x x x x
L 04 Word sequence I:std/L:std x x x x
L 05 Byte sequence High - Low x x
L 06 Configuration FIXED x x x
L 07 Address 1 x
L 08 Resolution 4096 x
L 09 Physical attributes RS 485 x
L 10 Baud Rate 9600 x x
L 11 Data format 8-E-1 x x
L 12 Adresse 16 x
L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT IEEE x x
L 14 Address 63 x
L 15 Baud Rate 125K x
L 16 S5-Physical attributes RS422 x
L 22 Hardware VxB020 x x
Tabelle der aktiven Parameter abhngig vom Protokolltyp.
L 02 TIMEOUT Host L 03 Comm. Error Host S9

Range: 1...600s Default: 10s Range: IGNORE Default: ALARM
W1 (Warnung 1)
If timeout value exceeds zero, a message from host W2 (Warnung 2)
system is expected to arrive during set time. A (Alarm)
If no message is received during the time set by
0837
Parameter L02, event message S9 Data Link Host is
output.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
L 04 Word sequence L 09 Physical attributes

Range: I: std/L:std Default: I: std/L: std Range: RS485
I: swp/L: std RS422
I: std/L: swp RS232
I: swp/L: swp Default: RS 485
The parameter determines the word sequence within
a double word. Modbus baud rate.
I stands for IEEE-754 values (floating point values)
L stands for 4-Byte integer values
std does not reverse the word order, swp swaps
them. L 10 Baud Rate
4800
L 05 Byte sequence 9600
19200
Range: LOW-High Default: LOW-High 38400
High-LOW Modbus-Baudrate.
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
L 06 Configuration
L 11 Data format
Range: FIXED Default: FIXED
NO-PARA-ID Range: 8-E-1 Default: 8-E-1
PARA-ID 8-0-1
PARA-6ID* 8-N-2
Determines the structure and the size of the process 8-N-1
image. Modbus data format (data bits-parity-stop bits).
Only with fieldbus card VxB8020.
L 07 Address L 12 Address
Range: 1...254 Default: 1 Range: 0...126 Default: 16
Slave address for Modbus protocol. Profibus DP Slaveadresse
L 08 Resolution
Range: 1...32767 Default: 4096 L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT
Resolving the data in the Modbus protocol nominal Range: SIEMENS-KG Default: IEEE
value (integer format). IEEE
Determines the display of the floating point value for
the Profibus DP protocol.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
L 14 Address
DeviceNet slave address.
L 15 Baud rate
Range: 125k Default: 125k
250k
500k
DeviceNet baud rates.
L 17 S5 Physical attributes
Range: RS422 Default RS 422
RS232
Setting the physical interface attributes for the S5
BCC protocol.
L 22 Hardware
Range: VxB020 Default: VxB020
VxB8020
Select fieldbus hardware for Profibus DP and
DeviceNet.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block M : Feeder Control
M 01 Feeder Active M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST

Range: YES Range: NO
NO Default: NO YES Default: NO
YES : The START/STOP Prefeeder dialog function NO : After cut-off or batch complete command,
is active. In turned-on state, the prefeeder is belt continues running for the time specified
controlled through the scale-specific by Parameter M02.
sequence.
YES : Conveyor belt immediately stops.
NO : Dialog function is faded out.
Control output is always set to STOP Parameter is active only if Batch Mode has been
Prefeeder. preselected.
Normally, belt immediately stops.
M 02 Setting Time
M 05 Change-over FF/DF
Range: 0.0...1000.0 s Default: 0.0 s
Range: YES
Setting time of material prefeeder NO Default: YES
I 07 = YES Belt clearance.

M 05 ineffective.
M 03 Feed Distance I 07 = NO No belt clearance.
Range: 0.00...10000.00 m Default: 0.00 m Parameter M 05 lets you select Full
Feed / Dribble Feed control via
Material path from prefeeder to end of weighbridge. conveyor belt (NO), or prefeeder
Input is required only if Full Feed / Dribble Feed (YES).
control via prefeeder is desired.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block N : Scale Monitoring
N 01 CPD Active N 04 Source Sensor

Range: NO Range:
YES Default: NO DI Default: DI (DI6)
Starts speed-controlled delay element used to shift Digital input for belt sensor. Can be checked using the
belt load measurement to the point of material relevant service value.
discharge. Only DI6 can be used. If you select alternative -, BIC
and belt monitoring functions cannot be used.
Prerequisites: Speed meter must be present and
active. No belt circuit sensor is
required.
N 05 BIC Active
N 02 Platf.Dis.Length
Range: 0.00...50.00 %LB Default: 0.00 %LB YES
Input required only with CPD active

Lets you start adaptive belt influence compensation
Length from mid platform to material discharge point BIC.
in % of total belt length LB.
The resolution is approx. 200. To initialize BIC:
The dynamical tare portion is cleared upon power-up

or after changes to a parameter of the following list:
N 03 Belt Sensor Active Parameter N 05 BIC Active
Parameter B 04 vs Charact. Val.
YES Parameter D 06 Belt Circuit Char
Brief instructions:
Belt sensor and sensor area on conveyor belt are
designed to acquire belt slip and belt drift, and 1. N03 = YES, enter N 06... N 08.
synchronize the adaptive belt influence compensation
BIC. 2. Start setting program LB: IMP/Belt.
3. Activate BIC (N05 = YES).
4. Tare.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Action:
N 06 Sensor Length
1. Clean head and tail pulleys.
Range: 0.01....400.00 cm Default: 8.20 cm
2. Align belt.
Length of sensor area in direction of belt travel.
See also Service value Imp.S..
Monitoring system can fail, too. So watch service
values of belt circuit sensor and remove fault, if any.
N 07 Sensor Width N 11 Belt Skew

Range: 0.01...400.00 cm Default: 4.00 cm
Limit value for admissible belt skew. If exceeded,
Width of sensor area
event message C3 Belt Skew is output and digital
output N16 DO Belt Skew is set.
N 08 Sensor Offset
Range: -400.00....400.00 cmDefault: 0.00 cm N 12 Belt Skew Event C3
Range: WARNING 1 Default: Alarm (C03)
The offset lets you correct the zero point of the belt
WARNING 2
run monitoring result.
Ignore
However, the maximum display range is limited.
Alarm
Therefore bigger corrections should be effected by
sensor shifting (see Commissioning chapter).
New display = old display - offset Conveyor belt is too far off-centre. Feeder is no longer
operable.
Action: See Belt Drift event.
N 09 Belt Drift
N 13 Slip Limit
Limit value for admissible belt drift. If exceeded, event
message C4 Belt Drift is output and digital output Range: 0.00...10.00 %LB Default: 2.00 %LB
N15 DO Slip Event is set.
Admissible variance of belt length in % of total belt
length.
N 10 Belt Drift Event C4
Limit value exceeded, event message C8 Slip Error
Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1 is output and digital output N17 DO Slip is set.
WARNING 2 (C04)
Ignore
Alarm
Cause of event: Belt leaves specified tolerance

range.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
N 14 Slip Event C8
Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
WARNING 2 (C08)
IGNORE
ALARM
Admissible limit value (N13) is exceeded.
N 15 Do Belt Drift
Range: DO Default: __
__
Digital output used to report belt drift.
N 16 DO Belt Skew
__
Digital output used to indicate belt skew event.
N17 DO Slip
__
Digital output used to indicate belt slip event.
M 18 Freeze BIC
Range: DI Default:
__
If digital input is set, current BIC values are frozen.

This helps to protect acquired values from falsification
upon heavily varying belt loads.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block O: Events
O 01 Power Failure E1 O 05 Namur Err Belt E3

Range: ALARM Default: ALARM Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
WARNING 1 ALARM
WARNING 2 IGNORE
IGNORE
Short-circuit or breakage of belt circuit sensor cable

(BIC).
O 02 Memory Error S1
Prerequisite: N 03 = YES
ALARM (S01) No changes possible.
Feeder is no longer operable.
O 06 L/C Input C1
Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
O 03 Tacho Input C2 WARNING 1
WARNING 2
WARNING 1
WARNING 2
1. Load cell cable not (or improperly) connected.
Input frequency exceeds 2700 Hz. 2. Analog-to-digital converter of measuring amplifier

Monitoring starts 10 s after power-up. is in saturation (see Service Value wz_roh).
Prerequisite: B 03 = YES 3. Supply voltage has fallen below 19V.
Fault must be available for min. 3 s.
O 04 Namur Err. Tacho E2

Range: ALARM Default: ALARM O 07 No Release S2
WARNING 1
WARNING 2 Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
IGNORE WARNING 2
IGNORE
RELEASE input signal pending.

Cable breakage or short-circuit.
Special case:
Prerequisite: B 03 = YES IGNORE always releases feeder.
Namur errors reset internal speed value to 0.

Frequency display (service value) is still active.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
O 08 L/C Input > MAX H4

WARNING 1
WARNING 2
Load on load cell exceeds 110 % of the total of load

cell rated capacities (C 04).
Full scale: approx. 115 % with CSD load cells.
O 09 L/C Input < MIN L4

WARNING 1
WARNING 2
Load on load cells is smaller than 3 % of the total of

load cell rated capacities.
O 10 Simulation Active S7
WARNING 2 WARNING 2
ALARM
IGNORE
Simulation mode started
O 11 Error Ext. Event E6

WARNING 1
WARNING 2
IGNORE
The event E6 is set when the external digital input
(parameter P06) is set.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block P: Digital Inputs
P 01 Release P 05 DI Setting to zero

Range: DI Default: DI (DI1) Range: DI Default:
__
Determine digital input for feeder release. The function setting to zero can also be started via the
digital input. The program is started by a positive flank
Setting - means that no release is required. of the contact. The result is automatically accepted if it
is within the admissible zero setting limit (5% of the
Default is DI1, however, any other free digital input nominal belt load). An ackowledgement of the result is
can be used as well. not necessary. The calibration program can only be
aborted in its active phase.
P 02 DI Stop Batch
Range: DI Default: DI (DI3) P06 DI Ext. Event

Range: Default:
DI
Digital input signal used to abort a running batch.
Digital input for external fault signals
P 03 Ackn. Events
Range: DI Default: DI (DI1)

Digital input used to acknowledge event messages.

Level acts statically and should not be permanently
available (permanent acknowledgement).
P 04 DI Start
Range: DI Default:
__
If OP has been selected for start source, digital input

DI Start can be configured and used to start feeder
using a start pulse (key). Feeder is stopped by a pulse
output across digital input Release.
This configuration is possible parallel to the 0837
START/STOP keys on INTECONT keyboard.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block Q: Digital Outputs
Q 01 DO Alarm Q 05 DO I-MAX
Range: DO Default: DO I+DO3 LO Range: DO Default: DO (DO2)

Digital output used to report general alarm. Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
feed rate (F03) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of event class (F04).
Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON
Range: DO Default: DO (DO4) Q 06 DO Q-MIN

Range: DO Default:
Digital output used to START/STOP prefeeder.
Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum

belt load (F05) is exceeded down.
Q 03 DO Feeder ON Contact output is independent of event class (F06).
Range: DO Default: DO (DO5)

Q 07 DO Q-MAX
Digital output signal used to indicate START/STOP
state of scale. Range: DO Default:

This very output can also be used to START/STOP
drive.
Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
belt load (F07) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of event class (F08).
Q 04 DO I-MIN
Q 08 DO v-MIN
Range: DO Default: Do (DO1)
Range: DO Default:

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum

feed rate (F01) is exceeded down. Contact output is Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum
independent of event class (F02). belt speed (F09) is exceeded down.
Contact output is independent of set event class
(F10).
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Q 09 DO v-MAX Q13 DO Keyboard Mode

Range: DO Default: Bereich: Ur-Wert:
DO
Digital output signal to report activated keyboard
mode.
Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
belt speed (F11) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of set event class
(F12).
Q 10 DO Batch Active
Range: DO Default:

Digital output signal reporting that a batch is active.

Signal becomes active upon start of batch and is
deactivated when batch is complete. Signal remains
available after abort of batch.
Q 11 DO Full Feed

Full feed signal is available from start of batch until

batch amount Value for I-MIN (F01)- Batch Dribble
FD (I02) is reached. Batching continues in dribble
feed.
Q 12 DO Dribble Feed

Dribble feed signal is output after the full feed phase

(see Q11).
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block R: Comm. EasyServe
R 01 Station Address R 04 Format Data

Range: 1...254 Default: 1 Range: 8-0-1 Default: 8-0-1
8-E-1
Station address and baud rate of feeder and 8-N-1
EasyServe must be identical.
The relevant setting (including communication
interface) can be searched using EasyServe (menu: EasyServe always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Tools/Options/Communication).
The station address is specially designed for plants For example:
using a service bus. If the latter is not available,
select 1. 8-0-1 means:
Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix (N = No parity, E = Even Parity)
connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485).
See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.
R 05 Connection
R 02 Physics Range: Serial Default: Serial
SERIAL+TCP
Range: RS 232 Default: RS 232
RS 422
RS 485 If MODBUS/TCP (Ethernet) has been selected for
fieldbus, communication between feeder and
EasyServe can also take place via Ethernet.
Determines the physics of the data transmission To do so, set Connection parameter to SERIAL-TCP.
protocol.
R 06 MODBUS Idle Time

R 03 EasyServe Baudr.
Range: 2...20ms Default: 4 ms
19200 For Modbus driver, single character timeout (idle time)
38400 for end recognition can be adjusted using this
parameter (see BVH2220).
Baud rate
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block S: Secondary display DLZ
S01 DLZ active Note: the BVH2015 Manual on Secondary/Large-Scale

Displays
Range: YES Default: NO
NO
A large-scale display such as DLZ055 or DLZ110 can
be connected at the serial interface on the VEA600V
option card (plug X10). Procedure DDP8861 is used. S02 Baud rate
Selecting DLZ active suppresses all printing outputs
2400
and the secondary display is triggered instead. The
4800
value shown on the lowest line of INTECONT Plus is
9600
always outputted.
19200
38400
Display on Character on
the secondary meaning
INTECONT Plus display
I I feed rate [kg/h] or [ t\h]
Ir i
relative feed rate [%] rated feed S03 Data format
rate
Q Q belt load [kg\m] Range: 7 Bit, Even Parity Default: 8Bit NO
relative belt load [%] rated belt
Qr q
load
8 Bit, No Parity
v v belt speed [m/s]
Z1 1 counter 1 [kg] or [t]
Z2 2 counter 2 [kg] or [t]
Z3 3 counter 3 [kg] or [t] S04 Physics
ZB B batching setpoint [kg] or [t]
Zd R batching residual value [kg] or [t] Range: RS232 Default:: RS232
Nb N consecutive batching number RS485
ZI F actual batching value [kg] or [t] RS422
Zbn b reloading setpoint [kg] or [t]
residual batching value of the
Zdn r
quantity reloaded [kg] or [t]
The DLZ055/110 secondary display can only show the

dimensions kg and t.
If the letter field of the secondary display is illuminated

as a full-surface block, this indicates that the value
shown is invalid. Either it is not possible to show the
desired format or INTECONT is in service operation.
The VLZ20100/VLZ20045 secondary displays can also

be connected, although they do not have any display for
identification and the validity of the outputted
measurement.
The usage of other secondary displays that understand

the DDP8861 protocol has to be examined in specific
cases.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block U: Ethernet
U 01 IP Address1 U 07 Net mask 3

Range: 0-255 Default: 192 Range: 0-255 Default: 255
Manual IP address assignment Delegating the subnetwork masks
U 02 IP Address 2 U 08 Net mask 4

Manual IP address assignment Delegating the subnetwork masks
U 03 IP Address 3 U 09 Gatway 1
Manual IP address assignment Festlegung der Standard-Gateway-Adresse.
U 04 IP Address 4 U 10 Gatway 2
Manual IP address assignment Delegating the standard gateway address
U 05 Net mask1 U 11 Gatway 3

Delegating the subnetwork masks Delegating the standard gateway address
U 06 Net mask2 U 12 Gatway 4

Delegating the subnetwork masks Delegating the standard gateway address
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block V: Fixmode Parameters
As of version VBW20600-08, the options FIXED-1 and V 07 ID preset value 7

FIXED-2 in parameter L06, Configuration, are no
longer available and have been replaced by Range: 0...4086 Default: 0
FIXED.The values carried over with the setting FIXED
are determined by the following parameters. The
settings of the original values correspond to the
previous FIXED mode 1.A list of all available
V 08 ID preset value 8
identifiers and FIXED mode examples can be found in
the manual BV-H2220. Range: 0...4086 Default: 0
V 01 ID preset value 1
Range: Fest eingestellt Default: 320
V 09 ID read value 1
Command 4+5 Range: 0...4086 Default: 752
V 02 ID preset value 2 Status 2+3

V 03 ID preset value 3 Status 4+5

V 04 ID preset value 4 Highest priority event

Rreload setpoint [kg] Range: 0...4086 Default: 1872
V 05 ID preset value 5 Actual flow rate [kg/hr]
Batch setpoint [kg] V 13 ID read value 5

V 06 ID preset value 6 Totalizing counter 1 [kg]

0837
Batch number

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Belt load
Belt speed
Totalizing counter 2 [kg]
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
10 Event Messages
System Messages S S9 : Data Link Host

Serial communication interrupted for longer
S1 : Memory Error than timeout.
Action : Check cable connections.
Parameter : L 03
Program and parameter memories are
checked in cycles. If an error is found, cal is
inoperable in most cases.
Action : Contact the SCHENCK
Service.
Parameter: O02 Electrics E
S2 : No Release E1 : Power Failure
External RELEASE signal pending. Power failed or cut off.

Scale cannot start. Feed rate possibly not recorded during this
Parameter : O 07 time.
Action : Acknowledge message.
Parameter : O 01
S3 : Maint. STR Meter
Total ON-time of conveyor belt and E2 : Namur Err Tacho

measurement is exceeded.
Perform requisite service work, if necessary. Short circuit or breakage in speed transducer
Acknowledgement of message does not cable. Scale no longer operable.
influence time intervals. Action : Check speed transducer cable.
Parameters : K 03, K 04 Deselect speed measurement
for a short time using
Parameter B 03 .
S4 : Maintenance Int. Elec Parameter : O 04
The INTECONT power supply has been

switched on for a preset period of time. E3 : Namur Err Belt
Perform requisite service work, if necessary.
Acknowledgement of message does not Short circuit or breakage in belt circuit sensor
influence time intervals. cable.
Parameters : K 01, K 02 Action : Check sensor cable.
Parameter : O 05
S7 : Simulation Active
Operating in Simulation mode, scale is not E6 : Error Ext. Event

prepared for normal operation.
The Simulation mode lets you test all scale There is an external fault signal.
functions without material at the time of Actions: Rectify fault.
commissioning. Parameter: P06 nd O11
Action : Deselect Simulation function.
Parameter : N1
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Event Messages
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Calibration C C7 : Set Time To Zero
C1 : L/C Input During preset time, no taring nor manual or

automatic zero setting has taken place.
Load cell cable broken, not or improperly Action : Tare or set to zero,
connected. Supply voltage too low. acknowledge message.
Action : Check cabling. Parameters : H 06, H 07
If OK, check load cell amplifier.
Parameter : O 06
C8 : Slip Error
C2 : Tacho Input
Conveyor belt length inadmissibly changed.
Speed transducer output frequency exceeds Error is acquired only using additional belt
3000 Hz, most probably due to subsequent circuit sensor.
change of belt speed (e.g. gearbox). Action : Check belt tension; if
Action : Check speed transducer for necessary, correct.
proper dimensioning. Check sensor for proper
If necessary, measure pulse measuring distance.
frequency using oscillograph. Parameters : N13, N14
Parameter : O 03
C9 : Tare Diff > MAX

C3 : Belt Skew
Automatic or manual zero setting has detected
Conveyor belt runs too far off centre. Scale is excessive zero point deviation.
no longer operable. Correction takes place only if no Alarm is
Action: See C4 available.
Parameters: N11, N12 Action : Acknowledge message, clean
scale; if need be, retare.
Parameters : H 01, H 11, H 12
C4 : Belt Drift
Belt has left defined tolerance zone.

Action: 1) Clean head and tail pulleys.
2) Align belt.
Parameters: N09, N10
C5 : Tare Corr. > MAX
Automatic zero setting has exceeded specified

limit. No correction takes place.
Action : Clean scale; if need be, retare.
Parameter : H 01, H 04, H 05
0837

Event Messages Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Maximum H Minimum L
H1 : I > MAX L1 : I < MIN
Current feed rate exceeds set limit value. Current feed rate has fallen below set limit
Action : Normally none, unless value. Error in measurement possibly out of
message H4 is available or tolerance.
system-specific limits have to Action : System specific unless L4 is
be observed. additionally available
Parameters : F 03, F 04 Parameters : F 01, F 02
H2 : Load > MAX L2 : Load < MIN
Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Current belt load has fallen below set limit
Action : Normally none, unless value.
message H4 is available or Action : See L1
system-specific limits have to Parameters : F 05, F 06
be observed.
Parameters : F 07, F 08
L3 : V < MIN
H3 : v > MAX Current belt speed has fallen below set limit
value.
Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Action : Check to see if belt is running.
Action : System specific unless C2 is Parameters : F 09, F 10
additionally available.
Parameters : F 11, F 12
L4 : L/C Input < MIN
H4 : L/C Input > MAX Weighing system underloaded. Errors in

measurement possible.
Weighing system overloaded. Errors in Action : Check mechanical weighing
measurement possible. system, weighed idler
Action : Check material infeed; belt alignment and load cell cable.
load is too big. Parameter : O 09
Parameter : O 08
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Event Messages
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Batching Signal Lamps

B1 : Out of Tolerance
a (green) POWER OK
Batch not completed with specified accuracy. LED not lit:
Tolerance : Parameters I 04, 05 1. No power supply
Event : Parameter I 06 2. Device defective
Cause : Automatic adaption started 3. All other functions OK, LED
(Parameter I 03) ? probably defective. Call display
Material infeed or belt drive test.
faulty ?
b (green) CPU OK
Display pending or flashing,
processor system is faulty. Scale is
inoperable.
X (red) ALARM
B4: MAX Batch Act. Value flashes if an Alarm message is
available.
Current batch actual value exceeds preset Display additionally shows event
tolerance. code.
Limit value : Parameters I 04, I 08
Action : See relevant event
code.
MIN (red) MIN LIMIT VALUE

lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded
down.
Action : See L1: I<MIN
MAX (red) MAX LIMIT VALUE

lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded
up.
Action : See H1: I>MAX.
No power supply:
Upon short circuit on the secondary side of the power

supply, internal overload protection responds.
Disconnect power supply for approx. 1 minute, and its
is ready to operate again.
0837

Event Messages Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
11 Commissioning
How To Operate Your INTECONT
1. Event E2 = O04
There is no way out. Namur Err. Tacho
Who wants to put the INTECONT into service has to

work himself through the Operation and Service
Manuals.
To make learning easier, the INTECONT can be Operate cursors to view available
operated without mechanical equipment, load cells events.
and speed transducer.
Although no feed rate is displayed, all operating T 1. Namur Err. Tacho E2
functions can be performed. Speed transducer not connected, or
U cabling faulty.
1. Connect power supply and turn on (Chapter
DETAILS). 2. L/C Input C1
Load cell not connected, or
2. The upper two green LEDs report Ready to cabling error.
Operate, the red LED in the middle flashes and
reports Alarm E1. 3. L/C Input >MIN L4
4. No release S2
No external RELEASE signal.
Z= 0t
E1 I= 0 kg/h
4. If you wish to turn off the flashing signal lamp or
try the setting programs, change some
parameters as shown in Parameterization
chapter.
Upper display : Totalizing Counter Z1 (a) Parameter O04 to WARNING 1 E2
Lower Display : Event Message E1 (b) Parameter O06 to WARNING 1 C1
Power Failure Feed Rate I (c) Parameter O09 to WARNING1 L4
(d) Parameter O07 to IGNORE S2
O Acknowledge Message E1 with key (e) Parameter B 03 to --
ACK.
Display shows Event Message E2 Deselect belt speed measurement with Parameter B
which reports that no speed transducer 03. Weigher can then operate without tacho generator.
is connected.
Use residual parameters to change the event class of
the 4 message types.
3. Except Scale ON and Set to Zero, all
functions described in the Operating Manual can 5. Set Release contact (Parameter P01).
be performed, e.g. display of event messages.
G Call function distributor. 6. Start INTECONT, all setting programs are
available.
f Start function Display Events. First call LB program as described in Chapter 6
and acquire result using the f key.

7. To simulate belt load, see Test Plug item.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Out-of-round
Mechanical Prerequisites The out-of-round error of idlers in the weigher
influential zone must not exceed 0.2 mm.
Mount mechanical equipment in accordance with the
instructions given in separate manual. Check weighed
and carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone for Securement
correct alignment and out-of-round.
After alignment, secure idler sets against
displacement.
Mark idlers and sets to avoid mistakes during
maintenance.
Influences
Incorrect alignment entails a zero point error which is

normally compensated during calibration.
Influential zone However, changes in belt tension increase the error
size.
All weighed idlers and three carrying idlers upstream For this reason, ensure correct alignment and
and downstream of weighing station. constant belt tension for accurate weighing.
Alignment Maintenance
Raise idlers in the influential zone to approx. 3...5 mm If idlers are dismounted for maintenance work to be
above remaining idlers. Align then against one effected, make sure that they are remounted in their
another to a height difference below 0.2 mm. former locations.
Electrical Prerequisites
Run and connect cables as described in Chapter

DETAILS.
Depending on idler set equipment, idlers have to be

aligned in various points.
0837

Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Enter Parameters
All important rated and calibration data are shown in

the supplied Spec Sheet.
In addition, see hints given below. We recommend to
read through all parameters and to select the best
possible setting.
Parameter Block A
Dialog language and display unit.

Parameter values are automatically converted if the
unit is changed.
Parameter Block B
Determine belt inclination by using spirit level and
measuring element. Repeat measurement with spirit
Characteristic value vs B 04 is important for
level turned and calculate mean value of height h.
calibration. Adjust units to nominal feed rate. To
ensure stable display, resolution of feed rate display
(B 01) should not exceed 4...5 decimals.
Display format of totalizing counters should not
exceed 6...7 digits. The decimal point is one digit.
Example: Angle C 07: a = tan (h/l)
Nominal feed rate 10 t/h Angles < 20 degr.: a = 55 h/l

Unit B 07 -.- t
Max. Wert 999.999 t Parameter Block D
Calibration results need not be entered.

During initial calibration, range correction D 02 should
be set to 1.
Max. counter run time = Check to see if, with rated data entered, load cell
rated capacity is not exceeded.
Then counter is reset. F = q * L * H * cos(a)
If an external totalizing counter is connected, output q = nominal belt load D 01 in kg/m

frequency must not exceed 10 Hz (see Parameters B L = eff. platform length C 05 in m
07, 08 and Service Displays Z0 and ZE).
H = lever ration C 06
Parameter Block C a = angle C 07 in degr.
F = force on load cell in kg
Ensure correct input of calibration and evaluation data
as shown in relevant Spec Sheet. Measure effective F should be the total of load cell rated capacities C
belt length and inclination at site. 04. If not, load cells are too small for the requested
For definition of belt length, see Chapter DETAILS. nominal feed rate.
Enter belt inclination only if load cells are arranged

right-angled to belt. If load cells are mounted
vertically, the effective angle is 0. For definition of
check weight, see Data Flow Diagrams in Chapter
0837 DETAILS.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Parameter Block F
Functional Check
Select limit values and their event classes in
accordance with application requirements. 1. Start weigher and conveyor belt.
Parameter Block G Starting depends on selected start source B 06 .
Acknowledge Message E1.
Adjust display filters, if required. Normally, the default
values can be used. 2. As running display, a rotating point appears in
top left display field.
If not, Parameter Vmin (F 09) is set too high or
START key has not been operated.
Parameter Block H
3. Interpret event messages, if any, as shown in
See Automatic Zero Setting. Maintain default values Chapter 10 and remedy fault.
for the time being. Do not start automatic zero setting
before calibration is effected.
Parameter Block K 4. Call Service messages.
For calibration, the maintenance parameters are (a) Tachometer

irrelevant. The default values are useful suggestions. If measurement is ON (B 03 = DI7), speed
transducer output frequency must be below
3000 Hz. Compare value with Spec Sheet. If
Parameter Block N frequency heavily varies at constant belt
speed, there is too much space between
Measuring at discharge point (CPD) should normally be speed transducer NAMUR sensor and
activated (N 01, N 02). For automatic belt influence gearing. See also Check of Belt Speed.
compensation (BIC) and belt drift display, a special belt
circuit sensor and a metal sensor area on belt are
required. If these are not available, set Parameter N 03 (b) wz
to NO. Disconnect BIC during initial commissioning. The unnormalized output value of load cell
amplifier must not exceed 2.85mV/V, not even
Parameter Block O
with nominal platform load. Value changes
with varying load on platform (e.g. check
The event classes are selected for a standard scale. If
weight).
messages O 04, O 06 and O 07 have been modified
for training, reset to default.
Value excessive:
Load cell overloaded

Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set
Value negative:
Load cell improperly connected

Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set
(c) aw
Load on load cell in percent related to the total
of load cell rated capacities.
Interpret as under Item b). At nominal belt
load, aw should not exceed 100%.
5. If all else fails, see Test Plug item.

0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Calibration Check Using Check Weight
Calibration as such is not required. After input of rated Check with check weight is useful because
and calibration data, scale is calibrated.
1. Mechanical or electrical faults may be given
Simply call:
2. Calibration data may be uncertain, e.g. lever
1. Setting program Belt Circuit LB determining the ratio not exactly known, inclination hard to
basis of one belt circuit for zeroing and taring measure
programs
3. Incorrect data may have been entered.
2. Taring program TW The check weight should range between 30 %...100

% of nominal platform load and be exactly known.
3. Zero setting program for training. Zero point error 1. Enter effective check weight as Parameter C 08.
should be small after taring. If weighing modules with leaf spring parallel
guidance are used, the check weight corresponds
Always observe the above order of sequence. to the actual value. In other cases, see Spec Sheet
or calculate check weight in accordance with
For first program, measure exact time of one belt Chapter DETAILS / Data Flow Diagrams. For
circuit and enter value into Parameter C 02. For effective check weight, belt inclination is irrelevant.
operation and message interpretation, see Chapter 3.
Two further checks should be effected:
1. Check using check weight 2. Call program Weight Check CW,

as shown in Chapter Setting Programs.
2. Check of belt speed
For evaluation of results, see operating sequence des-
cription.
Possible causes of faults:
Distorsion of platform, insufficient alignment,

interferences on load cell cable.
In case of suspicion, repeat check with another

weight.
If something goes wrong: Unlinearity is mostly due to above faults; linear errors,
our service department is always prepared to help. to incorrect data.
Maybe only some small error or maloperation is the
cause of trouble. Check individual operations one
by one. Normally, the issue can be eliminated.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Check Belt Speed Check Using Material
The speed transducer frequency generator can be Checks or calibrations with check weights cannot
driven by reproduce the actual circumstances to perfection.
1. Friction wheel in the lower belt run Highly accurate weighing results can be achieved only
2. Drive motor shaft. by various measurements with material and
subsequent correction.
In the first case, the entered characteristic value vs
(Parameter B 04) depends on the exact friction wheel For correction, use Parameter D 02.
diameter; in the second, on the belt wrap factor.
Hence, check speed measurement for accuracy. Observe the following items:
1. Acquire belt speed with stop watch and tape 1. Make sure the route from platform to material
measure. collecting point is clean.
To be on the safe side, conduct various
measurements and calculate mean value. 2. Ensure that material diverters, if any, do not
divert any material.
2. Read INTECONT speed display over the same 3. If feed screws or air slides are used between
period of time. platform and collecting point, feeding starts
approx. 30 min. before check measurement so
3. Compare both values with one another and, if that normal build-ups are given.
necessary, correct characteristic value vs B 04.
4. Set dedustings to a minimum.
5. Ensure that hoppers or vehicles used for

transport of material to a legal-for-trade weigher
are cleaned and weighed before every filling
operation (tare).
old = old parameter value
Example:
new = new parameter value
Vg = measured speed
Old value of Parameter D 02 = 1
Va = read off speed
Within 15 min. a material amount of MW = 4.9 t is fed.
Difference in counter reading MA read on INTECONT
This method is also applicable with unknown
is 5.0 t.
characteristic values.
If characteristic value vs is known and deviations are

excessive, the space between sensor (Namur
transducer) and gearing is too big. Check by switching
ammeter into sensor circuit. = 1 x 4.9 = 0.98

5.0
Tooth over sensor: i= 0.1...1.65 mA Enter computed value into Parameter D 02 .
else: i = 1.65...8 mA
Neither level should exceed limit value 1.65 mA.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Automatic Zero Setting Belt Run Monitoring
Activate the automatic zero setting function only in INTECONT comes with belt a belt run monitoring
clearly defined cases, e.g. if some belt circuits are run function designed to detect belt drift and belt slip.
with no load. Activate monitoring using Parameter N03 Belt Sensor
Active.
Parameter H 01 = JA Automatic active
= NO Automatic not active The belt run monitoring functions can be used only if a
belt circuit sensor (Namur transducer) and
Automatic system is active both in turned-on and a triangle metal sensor area on belt area
turned-off state of scale, if belt speed exceeds Vmin. available (see Fig. Below). If not,
Parameters N03 Belt Sensor Active and
N05 BIC Active must be set to NO.
Z1 = 2500 kg
I = 0 kg/h
Measuring result of one belt circuit is continuously

compared to previous result.
If Belt Empty is identified, zero point is automatically
corrected.
Set continuous plausibility check with Parameters H
Fig.: Belt Run Monitoring
02 and H 03. For normal conveyor belts, default
values can be used, however, a check is
recommended. To activate belt run monitoring:
1. Set Parameter N03 Belt Sensor Active to
1. Deactivate automatic H 01 = NO. YES.
2. Call zero setting program via function distributor 2. Enter sensor length L into Parameter N06
various times and acquire result. Sensor Length (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure).
3. Note final results Dev. (upper display) as of 3. Enter sensor width B into Parameter N07
second run. Sensor Width (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure).
4. The
. highest value of Item 3 is the smallest value 4. Set Parameter N08 Sensor Offset to 0.
for Parameter H 02. 5. Call calibrating function LB: IMP/Belt.
Enter double to triple value, but min. 0.1 %. 6. Acquire result after min. 2 belt circuits.
5. Parameter H04 monitors the total of all zeroing 7. Adjust sensor.
operations. Enter value, e.g. 2...4 times higher Note: Service value Imp.S indicates the
than H 02. number of pulses measured for the covered
6. Activate Automatic using Parameter H 01. sensor. If the belt sensor is located exactly in mid
sensor area, the following value results:
Imp.S. = 0.5 * L (N06) * 0.01 * vs_Charact. Val.

(B04)
Example: N06 = 8.40 cm and

B04 = 1000 I/m result in Imp.S. = 42
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Note: Monitor service value Belt Drift Tr indicating

the deviation of mid sensor and thus of belt from Control for Point of Discharge CPD
sensor position in cm.
Upon measurement at the point of discharge, the
Example: Belt drift = 0.20 cm: Parameter N08 measuring point of the weighing platform is shifted to
Sensor Offset = - 0.20 cm indicates belt slip 0.00 cm. the point of material discharge using a delay element.
The amount discharged is measured direct.
8. If necessary, determine event classes of belt slip
and drift messages (Parameters N09...N17). Note: If CPD is active, Automatic Belt Influence
Compensation BIC should be started as well.
Note: Normally, the default values can be used
in actual practice. Prerequisites:
Length ratio from mid platform to material discharge
point and total conveyor belt length is known.
9. Check messages.
Length ratio in percent is entered into Parameter
Note: To check, adapt Parameter N08 N02 Platf.Dis.Length.
SensorOffset accordingly and remember to
reset value to default. To start CPD, set Parameter N01 CPD Active to
YES .
Belt Influence Compensation BIC
The automatic Belt Influence Compensation BIC is

designed to monitor and correct the belt influence. As
is with belt run monitoring, a sensor and a sensor area
are required. To commission BIC, first start belt run
monitoring.
Note: Perform initial commissioning without active

BIC.
Features
After start of the belt influence compensation, the

influence of the conveyor belt on measurement will be
compensated after approx. 10 belt circuits.
Prerequisites:
Belt run monitoring commissioned
Belt run monitoring started.
To start BIC, set Parameter N05 BIC Active to YES

.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
reached.
Cosine Pendulum If items 4 and 5 cannot be performed, use
pendulum position and Rv in turn.
Belt weighers with variable belt inclination are equipped
with a so-called cosine pendulum which compensates 7. Tare scale, best in horizontal position.
the impact of inclination on measuring result.
8. Calibrate range using check weight and
The pendulum is switched into the load cell (L/C) Parameter D 02. Use setting program CW.
supply voltage.
L/C RD Rp Rw Angle C 06
Test Plug
1 x CSD 4000 3000 727 0.73
2 x CSD 2000 1500 363 +/- 30 0.73
1 x HBM 350 300 123 0.64
Almost any possible error in operation is reported by

event message. For interpretation, see Chapter 10.
RD = load cell input resistance in ohms
Check INTECONT for proper operation by using a
Rp = pendulum potentiometer resistance in ohms simple test plug. This helps to see whether the fault is
Rw = calibrated resistance of Rv in ohms with load cel, or cabling and electrical equipment.
1. Position pendulum near weighbridge and align 1. Switch plug as shown in drawing.
using spirit level.
2. Withdraw load cell connector X7 and replace by
2. Param.: Angle a (C 07) = 0 test plug.
Lever (C 06) = table value
Basic Tare N (D 04) = 0 At the indicated resistance values, the following
Tare Correction T (D 05) = 0 service values result:
Do not tare scale.
1. wz apr.1.1mV/V
3. Use Rv to preset RW with highest possible
accuracy. 2. Load cell apr. 55 % (C 03 =2mV/V)
utilization aw apr. 39% (C03 =2.85mV/V)
4. Bring weigher into two opposite positions,
e.g. degr. Apply check weight, if necessary. If wz is in specified range, measuring amplifier
properly operates.
5. Set belt load displays to same value by correcting
the pendulum case zero point position. Note:
The test plug ordering number is V037426.B01.
6. Use potentiometer rv to vary range until until
0837
minimum dependence of belt inclination is

VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
12 Details
Start / Stop
Start / stop states exclusively refer to belt drive, 3. START/STOP with belt speed higher, or smaller,
prefeeder and feed rate measurement. than set limit value Vmin (v).
Belt load and belt speed are acquired in either case. System prompts for input of unmeaned value
Display with START Rotating point in upper display : measured for speed V.
field.
Rotation speed is approximately
proportional to feed rate, but
never zero.
Display with STOP Point stands still after completion

:
of measurement.
After effective stop command, totalization is cut off as
soon as set afterflow time Tnach has elapsed.
STOP commands have highest priority.
Four different control modes can be configured (see

also Parameter B06).
1. START/STOP using digital input.
The default value is DI2. However, you can use any 4. START/STOP via fieldbus interface (FB).
other free digital input as well.
Serial START/STOP commands acts in the same
The digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. If ways as the corresponding keys.
scale cuts off after Alarm, START signal must be
The Select Keyboard Mode function lets you shift the
removed and applied again.
Start/Stop commands onto keyboard.
Return to Deselect Keyboard Mode function using
Parameter B06.
2. START/STOP using keyboard (OP)
Start : START key if no Alarm is

available and release signal
has been output.
0837 Stop: Stop key, Alarm, or No

Release.

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Note
1) Selection v does not allow for batching.
2) Digital input Release P01 can be cut off (setting

- -), and scale is released always.
0837

Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Batching Without Clearance
If batch is complete, belt drive is cut-off. Feeding by

full feed/dribble feed can be controlled via belt speed
or prefeeder (dashed line).
It is recommended to activate delay for material
discharge (O 01 = YES).
Select keyboard as START source
(B 06 = DE + T).
For details, see OPERATION chapter.
Parameter Schedule:
B 06 START source OP
G 06 Belt tracking time Tn apr. 3 s
Feed rate determination tracking time after

belt cut-off.
Enables afterflowing material to be acquired.
N 01 CPD Active YES
Delay for point of discharge

I 01 Batch Dribble Feed kg
Change-over point from full feed to dribble

feed, e.g. by belt speed reduction. Enter
deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see Figure). I 03 = 0 : No adaptation
I 02 Batch Cut-Off Point kg I 03 = 1 : Full adaption
Intermediate values lead to filtered
Belt drive cut-off point. To be set to slightly adaptation.
below setpoint to enable afterflowing material
to be acquired.
Suggestion: I 03 = 0.6
Suggestion:
Mean dribble feed feed rate in kg/h divided by I 04... For monitoring, see Parameter List.
3600.
I 03 Correction Factor 0.6 I 07 Empty Belt NO
Dribble feed changeover and cut-off points Prerequisite for batching mode.
are automatically adapted upon completion of
batch for system to be better matched to M 01 Feeder Active
actual conditions until the time of next
batching operation. NO : Feeder control output is always
LOW. Full feed/dribble feed
changeover must be controlled via
belt drive. Function Next W/Belt
Empty is not possible.
YES : Prerequisite for feeder control via
batch mode and for function
0837 START/STOP Feeder.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
M 05 = NO
M 02 Setting Time sec
No entry required.
From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence M 04 Motor STOP Aft. ST YES/NO
and Parameter M 04).
Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking
M 03 Feed Distance m
is desired after completion of batch or after
cut-off.
Material path from feeder to end of weighing
With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid
platform.
excess feed.
If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from Prerequisite: M 01 = YES
platform center to point of discharge (N 02)
has to be added. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
M 05 Change-over FF/DF Adaption:

NO Change-over via belt drive After every completed batch, system uses the missing
YES : Change-over via feeder amount to compute a correction value for cut-off point
(signals dashed in diagram) A (I 02). Dribble feed changeover point is
automatically corrected.
Sequence:
0 Start batch through START command. Error = SETPOINT - amount fed
Belt drive, prefeeder, totalization (counters)
start operating. The new cut-off point for the next batch is computed
from the error and an evaluation factor.
1 Abort batch through STOP command.
To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues
running for time TZ after feeder cut-off
(Parameters M 01, M 02, M 04). F(new) = F(0ld) + FAK * Error
2 Restart batch through START command.
F =Batch cut-off point I 02
3 Change-over point from full feed to dribble
feed FM = SET - A - F is reached. Signals FAK =Adaption factor I 03
Full Feed and Dribble Feed change levels. (see Parameter)
A and F are the pre-act cut-off points
(Parameters I 01 und I 02).
4 Cut-off point HM = SET - A Release Signal:
is reached and batch is complete.
Belt drive cuts off. Pending release signal acts as STOP command.
So as to avoid excess feed, prefeeder shuts Alarm:

down as soon as differential amount M (TZ) is
reached (M 04 = NO). Batch is interrupted (motor and prefeeder cut off
immediately). Remedy fault, acknowledge error
M(TZ) = I * TZ/3600 message and restart..
I = Current feed rate filtered through Power DOWN:

display filter G 01
TZ = Parameter M 02 Batch mode is cut off. Counter readings and values of
amounts fed remain stored for an unlimited period of
5 Belt tracking and end of material flow. time. Resume batching with Preselect Batch
If Parameters H and V are correctly set, function.
setpoint has now been reached. If not, see
Item Adaptation. Abort Batch function:
6. Change-over point from full feed to dribble
feed, if prefeeder is used for feed control Abort batch. Control signal behaviour is the same as
(Parameter N 05 = YES). after STOP command.
Pre-act cut-off point FMS is estimated on the

basis of the mean belt load.
FMS = VM - L * Q - M(TZ)
Q = Belt load displayed (Filter G 04)

L = Material path (M 03)
M(TZ)= See Item 4

0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Batching With Clearance
When batch is complete, prefeeder cuts off; belt drive, Parameter Schedule:
after approx. another half belt circuit. Conveyor belt is
empty. Delay for point of discharge should be B 06 START source OP
activated G 06 Belt tracking time Tn ca. 3 s
(N 01 = YES).
Select keyboard for START source (B 06 = DE + T). Tracking time of feed rate acquisition after
Function Next W/Belt Empty automatically activates belt cut-off.
clearance mode. For details, see OPERATION
chapter. N 01 CPD Active YES
The smallest possible actual batch amount Delay for point of discharge
corresponds to the load on belt from weighing platform
to point of feed.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
I 01 Batch Dribble Feed kg Sequence:
Change-over point from full feed to dribble 0 Start batch through START command. Belt
feed, e.g. through reduction of feed rate. drive, feeder and totalizing counters start
Enter deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see operating.
Diagram). Normally not used in clearance 1 Abort batch through STOP command.
mode. To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues
I 02 Batch Cut-Off Point kg running for time TZ after prefeeder cut-off
(Parameters M 02, M 04).
Feeder cut-off point. 2 Restart batch through START command.
Suggestion: Initial value 0 3 Changeover point to dribble feed is reached.

Full feed and dribble feed signals change
I 03... See Without Clearance level.
I 07 Belt Empty YES
FM = AM - F
Prerequisite for clearance mode
AM = Cut-off point, see Item 4
M 01 Feeder Active YES F = Parameter I 01, Dribble Feed
Prerequisite for clearance mode

4 Cut-off point AM is reached, feeder cuts off.
Belt drive continues running for time Tab to
enable belt to be unloaded.
M 02 Setting Time sec
AM = SOLL - A - Mg
From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence
and Parameter M 04). A = Parameter I 02, Cut-Off Point
M 03 Feed Distance m Mg = Estimated load on belt between
weighing platform and prefeeder.
Material path from feeder to end of weighing
platform. Mg = L * Q + I * TZ/3600
If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from
platform center to point of discharge (N 02) I = Current feed rate filtered through
has to be added. display filter G 01.
TZ = Parameter M 02.
M 04 Motor STOP Aft. ST YES/NO Q = Current belt load filtered through
display filter G 04
Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking
is desired after completion of batch or after Tab = TZ + time for another half belt circuit
cut-off. With N 04 = NO, TZ is doubled.
With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid
excess feed (see Sequence and Diagram). 5. Batching amount reached.
Cut-off command routed between Item 4 and 5 totally

aborts batch.
M 05 Change-Over FF/DF YES/NO
For Adaption, Release, etc.:
Parameter has no effect.
See Batching Without Clearance.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Data Flow Diagram
Fig.: Measurement
Parameters:
Note:
Io Nominal Feed Rate B 02 in t/h
In normal INTECONT operation, data flow diagrams
need not be known. Io is reference value for limit values and
service display. Io has no effects on
In special cases, they can be used to trace internal calibration.
normalizations, particulary important for (theoretical)
precalibration. Qo = in kg/m
Vo = in m/s
Io = in t/h
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
L Effective Platform Length C 06 in m
Acquire accurate length and enter.

VS Speed Transducer Characteristic
Value B 04 in I/m
VS determines speed measurement

normalization, thus being relevant for
weighing accuracy.
Fo Load Cell Rated Capacity C 04 in kg
Total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are

considered as load cells.
Fo = (N +M) * NNENN
NENN = load cell rated capacity
N = number of load cells
M = number of pivots
Fo determines weigher accuracy.
E Load Cell Characteristic Value C 04

in mV
The transmission coefficient is an important

value for calibration.
Ua = Load cell output voltage in mV

Ue = Load cell input voltage in V
= 5 V (10 V)
Fig.: Displays, limit values, analog input F = Load on load cell
Qo Nominal Belt Load D 01 in kg/m CSD load cells E = 2.85 mV/V

HBM load cells E = 2.00 mV/V
Computed by INTECONT, Qo is reference
value for limit values and displays.
With some types, E is not calibrated. For
Nominal platform load QB = Qo L value, see type plate.
L = effective platform length
Vo Nominal Speed B 05 in m/s H Lever Ratio C 06
The lever ratio is decisive for calibration

Reference value for limit values, only relevant accuracy. However, it must not enter into
for calibration of weighers check weight computation.
1. operating without speed measurement or
2. using adaptive belt influence compensation
0837 BIC is used.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
elt load results from platform data and belt inclination.
F = Force applied to load cell in kg

QB = Platform load in kg
LWB = See Figure.
With platforms with leaf spring parallel

guidance H = 1.
a Belt Inclination C08 in degr
Enter belt inclination if load cells are mounted Fo= Total of load cell in kg
right-angled to belt. With vertically mounted rated capacities
load cells, degree is always 0 E= Load cell characteristic value in m/mV
QPRF Effective Check Weight C 08 in kg
GK= Device constant
This weight serves for check of theoretical
calibration.
As effective check weight, enter platform load
simulated by check weight.
For check weight factor f, see Spec Sheet. Ue = Load cell input voltage in V
QPRF = f * Check Weight a= Angle in degr
Belt speed is computed from speed transducer output

KOR Range Correction D 02 frequency.
D 02 is primarily used to calibrate results of a

material check. This parameter exclusively
acts on belt load measuring branch.
The product from Q and V is feed rate I.
Analog Output:
I = Q * V * 3600s/f in kg/h
For tare parameters to be accurately calibrated, range
correction takes place before taring. If range
normalization QN is modified (Parameters KOR, Fo,
etc.), tare parameters are automatically converted so
ANH << = 1 >> = 20mA that zero point is maintained.
X = I, V or Q (see Fig. Analog Output)
Operating Principle - Summary Weighers without Speed Measurement:
Load cell output voltage Va is amplified and converted For setting program LB, a frequency of V0 * VS is
into digital value d. internally generated. If one of the two parameters is
As transmission factor A0 of AD converter and load changed, call LB program again. Only then all other
cell data are known to INTECONT, load on load cell setting programs will run over integer belt circuits.
can be computed from the output voltage. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Connection Diagram
Base Card
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Option Card
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Namur Inputs n Cable Fastening
8 mA = Short circuit
1.65...8 mA = Level 0
0.1...1.65 mA= Level 1 (sensor covered)
0,1 mA = Cable breakage
Option Card:
The option card is attached to the INTECONT cover.

Signal exchange with base card is via a pluggable flat
cable connector.
If pulled off, system behaves as if no option card was
present and only the operating functions and
parameters of the base card can be used.
Cabling Hints In the rear wall of the INTECONT, under each

connector, several slots are provided. The
n All cables are led to the device from the rear upper slot pair is reserved for the cable clamp
(front-of-panel mounting housing) or from below which presses the shielded cable against the
(flush mounting housing) and connected with rear wall. The shield needs not be separately
special connectors. Connectors cannot be connected. The lower cut-out serves for
confused. accommodation of a pull relief, e.g. by cable
binders.
n The INTECONT is isolated from the mounting
surface by its plastic housing.
The rear earthing connector is internally connected
with the electronics zero potential.
The protective ground used requires to be hum- and Attention!
transient-free.
The power supply zero potential (0V ext.) is not Connectors to base card require to be plugged-in
connected to the earthing connector. In general, no with screwed connections up; connectors to option
earthing is required. card, with screwed connections down.
n Ensure that no leakage currents are conducted over n Intecont rear view: Connectors
cable shields. Therefore shields are applied to one
side of INTECONT. The load cell housing is not
connected with shields.
Shields of data cables to host computer are
connected to ground on either side.
n The consumers connected to the relay and pulse

outputs require to be radioshielded, e.g. by
suppressor diodes or RC elements.
n Analog outputs
Long cables, particularly to frequency transducers,
can interact on analog outputs. We suggest to use
an isolating amplifier.
n Make sure the space between power and

measuring cables, if run in parallel, is 0.30 m.
If this is not possible lay measuring cable in steel
conduit. The same holds if the measuring cable is
laid over free stretches or close to powerful 0837
transmitters (e.g. broadcasting stations).

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Weighing Platforms
1. Effective Platform Length Multi-Idler Platform
The effective platform length is an important value for

calibration. Determined by platform design, it can n Buckled Platform
normally be taken from Spec Sheet. However, we
recommend to remeasure length and to enter the e.g. BMK type
exact value into parameter.
The hatched areas shows the distribution of load on The platform consists of two sections. In its center,
platform. force is applied to load cell. Instead of weighed
idlers, a two-sectional weighing table can also be
n Single-Idler Platform used.
e.g. BEZ, BED types
Platform load is applied to load cell via a weighed

idler. This can be done by using a lever system or,
with no levers, by leaf spring parallel guidance.
Buckled Platform
Single-Idler
Platform
n Multi-Idler Platform
e.g. BMP, BMC types
Various weighed idler are connected to form a

mechanical unit.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
n One-sided mounting of total belt 2. Check Weight QPRF
Simulating a certain belt load, the check weight is

used for control of weighing system. It can act on
weighing platform direct or via lever system.
The weight to be entered into INTECONT is not the
actual weight, but the weight acting on platform.
Effective check weight QPRF is the platform load in

kg simulated by the check weight
Single-Idler Platform
a) Parallel Leaf Spring Mounting
Theoretically, the check weight can be applied

to any point of the mechanical platform
equipment. Applied weight QP is active always.
One-sided
mounting QPRF = OP
b) Joint Mounting (e.g. Universal Spring Joint):

Lg = Length up to mid hillside
tan(a) 0,018 a
Angle a= 0 : K = 0
Angle a = neg :K = neg
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
n Multi-Idler Platform 3. Conveyor Belt Inclination

a) Total platform mounted on load cells:
In certain cases, the inclination of conveyor belt has to
be entered into parameter. Decisive is the load cell
QPRF = QP
mounting position.
b) Joint Mounting a) Right-angled to conveyor belt
See Single-Idler Platform Enter angle a into parameter. Load cell is loaded
with N = Q * cos a.
n Buckled Platform
QPRF = QP
n Normally, check weight acts on center.
n One-sided mounting of total belt
LPG
QPRF = QP
LWZ
b) Vertical to conveyor belt
With inclined belts, consider extension, or shortening,
of calibration lever, if any, in accordance with Enter 0 as angle a. Load cells are loaded with full
single-idler platform. force Q.
Chain Calibration Weight:
If a chain curtain is placed over the platform area, the

total weight of chains in weighing area is the effective
check weight.
QPRF = n * Lg * s
N= Number of chains
Lg= Overall belt length in m
s= Chain weight per m in kg/m
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Printer Connectivity
Interface : Serial (see Chapter Technical Switch

Data). 1-1 : OFF 8-bit message
1-2 : OFF No parity bit
Character map: ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) 1-3 : ON, OFF Even/odd
Cable : The connection diagram holds 1-4 : OFF Positive edge
for EPSON and CITIZEN 1-5...8 : OFF, ON, OFF, OFF 9600 baud
printers. 2-1...6 : ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF
(default)
Use Parameter J 01 to set baud rate to 9600. On the

right side of printer, there are two additional DIP
switches. Diagram view corresponds to top of printer.
Fig. EPSON Printer
Switch
1-1 : OFF Character spacing 10 CPI
1-2 : OFF Zero with no backslash
1-3 : ON Graphics character set
Fig.: Printer Cable 1-4 : OFF Auto hyphenation activated
1-5 : ON Normal print speed
1-6...8 : ON, ON, ON USA
EPSON Printer: LX 850 2-1 : ON Page length 12 inch
2-2 : OFF No cut sheet
2-3 : OFF Jump over perforation
2-4 : OFF No auto line feed
Information on switch position can be printed by using

the printer self-test function. (Press line feed key while
starting printer).
CITIZEN Printer: 120D
Fig. EPSON Interface Fig. Serial Interface
The interface board is equipped with 2 DIP switches

0837
used for selection of serial message base data.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
13 Replacement Instructions
Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP > INTECONT PLUS VEG
INTECONT PLUS, type VEG, is equipped with added functions for INTECONT PLUS, type FIP. Logical
inputs/outputs can now be assigned to hardware at will. Please also check all connectors with relevant
parameter assignment.
When using our convenient replacement set (ordering no. V036910.B01), hardware is adapted by plugging.
The EasyServe setting program supplied enables easy assignment and transfer of all software parameters.
FIP base card connection diagram
FIP option card connection diagram
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Replacement Instructions
VBW INTECONT PLUS
The FIP base and option cards connection diagrams Load Cell
indicate for every digital input and output the relevant
INTECONT VEG parameter numbers used for
FIP Physical Signal VEG
distribution on physical signals.
X5 3 OUT1 X7 3
The tables below compares the connector X5 4 REF1 X7 4
assignments of FIP and VEG for all physical signals. X5 5 IN2 X7 6
X5 6 IN1 X7 5
X5 7 REF2 X7 7
X5 8 OUT2 X7 8
Digital Outputs
FIP Physical Signal VEG Attention:

Signals IN1 and IN2 are swapped between FIP and
X1 1,2 DA1 X1 1,2 VEG. (VEG is compatible to DISOCONT).
X1 3,4 DA2 X1 3,4
X1 5,6 DA3 X1 5,6
X6 1,2 DA4 X8 1,2
X6 3,4 DA5 X8 3,4 Power Supply
X6 5,6 DA6 X8 5,6
X6 7,8 DA7 X8 7,8 FIP Physical Signal VEG
X6 9,10 DA8 X8 9,10
X2 1 0V ext X2 1
X2 2 24V ext X2 2
Digital Inputs X2 3 ext. 0V supply X2 3
X2 4 ext. 24V supply X2 4
X3 1,2 DE1 X3 1,2 Printer

X9 1,2 DE2 X3 3,4
X9 3,4 DE3 X6 6,7 FIP Physical Signal VEG
- DE4 X9 1,2
- DE5 X9 3,4 X8 1 Screen X10 1
X3 5,6 Sensor = (DE6) X3 5,6 X8 2 TX X10 2
X5 1,2 V1 (Tacho 1) = DE7 X7 1,2 X8 3 RX X10 3
X3 3,4 V2 (Tacho2) -
Pulse Output
Analog Inputs/Outputs
X9 5 24V X6 8
X9 9,10 A01 X6 4,5 X9 6 Open collector X6 9
- A02 X9 5,6 X9 7 Open emitter X6 10
X9 8 0V X6 11
- AI X6 1,2,3
With VEG, fieldbus is connected via separate fieldbus

cards (FIP: Connector X7). See Fieldbus Manual
BVH2220.
0837

Replacement Instructions Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Connector Size
FIP
X1 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 6 pins

X6 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 8 or 10 pins
X7 SUB-D: 9 pins
X8 SUB-D: 9 pins
VEG

X3 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 6 pins
X4 SUB-D: 9 pins
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Replacement Instructions
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Replacement Instructions Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
4.
TECHN. SPEC. AND PROGRAM SHEETS

PT SEMEN
Customer F.L. Smidth A/S Code word TONASA - IDO
CSD code word Z606.00342/K
Order no. 5000433508
Master Spec Sheet
Serial number, mechanics V088964B01 type VBW0600
Serial number, options
Serial number, hopper
Serial number, electrics V088964B01
Designer, CPE mechanical Schachner Date 21.04.2010
Designer, CPE electrical Schachner Date 21.04.2010
Tester mechanical Date
Tester electrical Flauaus Jrgen Date 04.05.2010
Last modifed by Date
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FLS Equip. no:

BELTWEIGHER EXTENDED 531.BC 01N01
TYPE OF CONTROLLER INTECONT PLUS
TYPE OF CONTROLLER SOFTWARE VBW20600/09
GENERAL DATA Parameter Value Unit

SCALE TYPE BEP08
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING D 607 522
DOCUMENTATION ELEC. EQUIP. BVM 2187
FEED MATERIAL Clay
BULK DENSITIY GAMMA 1,49 t/m3
GRAIN SIZE 80 mm
HUMIDITY (MOISTURE) %
MATERIAL TEMPERATURE C
FLOW PROPERTIES
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
RATING DATA (NOMINAL VALUES) Parameter Value Unit

NOMINAL FEED RATE PNOM B02 350000 kg/h
EFFECTIV PLATFORM LENGTH C05 1,2 m
NOMINAL SPEED AT PNOM B05 1,04 m/s
FREQUENCY SPEED TRANSDUCER AT
PNOM 34,847 Hz
PULLEY DIAMETER m
MATERIAL OUTLET AREA m2
MATERIAL BED DEPTH m
LOAD ON PLATFORM AT PNOM 112,179 kg
PRELOAD 70 kg
MACHINE DATA Parameter Value Unit

BELT LENGTH (+- 3%) m
BELT CIRCUIT NO: CALIBRATION C01 1
BELT CIRCUIT TIME AT PNOM C02 s
SENSOR LENGTH N06 cm
SENSOR WIDTH N07 cm
LOAD CELL TYPE (L/C TYPE) PWS 300
L/C RATED CAPACITY (L/C TOTAL) C04 300 kg
L/C CHARACTERISTIC VALUE C03 2 mV/V
LENGTH OF LEVER PLATFORM L LP mm
LENGHT OF LEVER L/C L LC mm
LEVER RATIO R1 C06 1,0
(C07, RATIO R1=L LP : L LC)
BELT INCLINATION C07 0 grd
(LC IN RIGHT ANGLE TO THE BELT)
SPEED TRANSDUCER TYPE FGA20 RSLE
SPEED TRANSDUCER CHARACT. VALUE
VS B04 33,51 Imp/m
TEST WEIGHT UNIT
LENGTH LEVER TEST WEIGHT L TW mm
TEST WEIGHT (NO. OF STROKES) N1

F=SIMUL. PLATFORMLOAD/KG
TESTWEIGHT kg/kg
EFFECTIV CHECKW.= F X CHECKW. Q C08 kg
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DATA Parameter Value Unit

SUPPLY VOLTAGE 115 / 230 V
CHARGEABLE NEUTRAL W. REQUIRED ? YES

MAINS FREQUENCY 50 / 60 Hz
POWER CONSUMPTION kVA
MAX. EXT. FUSE A
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Parameter Value Unit

BELT INFLUENCE COMPENSATION BIC N05 NO
DELAY FOR THE HEAD PULLEY N01 NO
BELT LENGTH PLATFORM-HEAD PULLEY N02 % LB

5.
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
6.
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
7.
ACCESSORIES
8.
CERTIFICATES, COMPLIANCE INFORMATIONS

9.
SPAREPARTS
10.
ORDER SPECIFIC INFORMATION

Guideline for Storage and Handling of Components
and Machines Supplied
DE Richtlinien zur Lagerung und Handhabung der gelieferten Teile und Maschinen
GB Guideline for Storage and Handling of Components and Machines Supplied
FR Directives pour le stockage et la manutention des fournitures de pices et de machines.
IT Direttive per limmagazzinamento e la manipolazione di componenti e macchine fornite
ES Directrices para el almacenamiento y la manipulacin de las piezas y mquinas suministradas
PT Diretrizes para Armazenamento e Manuseio de Componentes e Mquinas Fornecidos
NL Richtlijnen voor de opslag en behandeling van geleverde componenten en installaties
SE Bestmmelser om frvaring och hantering av de levererade delarna och maskinerna
PL Wytyczne dla skadowania oraz postpowania z dostarczonymi czciami oraz urzdzeniami
HU Irnyelvek a leszlltott gpelemek s gpek raktrozshoz s kezelshez
RU
RO Directive pentru depozitarea i manipularea pieselor i mainilor livrate
UA
BV-R2000AA
PASS Ein Service, auf den Sie zhlen knnen PASS - Service you can rely on
Schnell, umfassend, berall auf der Welt Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Qualitt und Zuverlssigkeit sind die Grundsteine unserer
Unternehmensphilosophie. Darum setzen wir ein umfassendes
Servicekonzept einfach voraus, und zwar von der strengen
Qualittskontrolle, Installation und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys
nahtlosen Untersttzung ber den gesamten philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive
Produktlebenszyklus. service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality
control, installation and commissioning through to seamless
support across the entire product life cycle.
Mit mehr als 30 Servicestandorten und ber
180 Servicespezialisten knnen Sie jederzeit auf uns zhlen, wo
und wann immer Sie uns brauchen. With over 30 service stations and over 180 service
Es ist vllig egal, wo Sie sind, unsere Spezilisten sind da, um Sie specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and
mit weltweit bestem, persnlichem und umfassendem Service zu wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are,
beraten und zu untersttzen. our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in
worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

Whrend der Geschftszeiten stehen Servicespezialisten aller on hand to analyse problems and failures.
Geschftsbereiche zur Analyse der Probleme und Ausflle Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest
bereit. Auf unserer Website www.schenckprocess.com finden Schenck Process Location.
Sie den Schenck Process Standort in Ihrer Nhe.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive

Unser umfassendes Process Advanced Service System (PASS), Process Advanced Service System provides you with the
das an Ihre Anforderungen angepasst ist, bietet Ihnen den best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service
besten Service. Sie suchen nach individuellen, solutions?
mageschneiderten Servicelsungen? Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It
Dann ist unser modulares Servicesystem PASS genau das covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
Richtige fr Sie. Es umfasst das gesamte Servicespektrum, von through to full service. Interested?
einfachen Inspektionen bis hin zum vollstndigen Then find out more about the individual components at
Serviceprogramm. www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Interessiert? Weitere Informationen zu den einzelnen
Bestandteilen unseres Serviceangebots finden Sie auf unserer
Website www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Kostenlose 24 h Notfall-Service-Hotline Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline

in Deutschland in Germany
Haben Sie einen Ausfall oder Probleme auerhalb der normalen
Geschftszeiten? Unser Servicepersonal ist rund um die Uhr auf Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal
Abruf, um Ausflle, Serviceterminplanung und andere Notflle zu office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock
behandeln. to deal with failures, service planning and other
emergencies.
( +49 171 2 25 11 95 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment

( +49 172 6 50 17 00 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

( +49 61 51-15 31 0
Alle Informationen sind unverbindlich. Spezifikationsnderungen All information is given without obligation. All specifications
vorbehalten. are subject to change.
Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung Note: This is a translation of the original document.

Contents
DE Richtlinien zur Lagerung und Handhabung der gelieferten Teile und Maschinen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GB Guideline for Storage and Handling of Components and Machines Supplied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FR Directives pour le stockage et la manutention des fournitures de pices et de machines . . . . . . . . . . . 5
IT Direttive per limmagazzinamento e la manipolazione di componenti e macchine fornite. . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ES Directrices para el almacenamiento y la manipulacin de las piezas y mquinas suministradas . . . . . . 9
PT Diretrizes para Armazenamento e Manuseio de Componentes e Mquinas Fornecidos . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NL Richtlijnen voor de opslag en behandeling van geleverde componenten en installaties. . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE Bestmmelser om frvaring och hantering av de levererade delarna och maskinerna. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PL Wytyczne dla skadowania oraz postpowania z dostarczonymi czciami oraz urzdzeniami . . . . . . 17
HU Irnyelvek a leszlltott gpelemek s gpek raktrozshoz s kezelshez. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
RO Directive pentru depozitarea i manipularea pieselor i mainilor livrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
UA . . 23
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 1

schenck Process
2 BV-R 2000 AA/0408

schenck Process
DE Richtlinien zur Lagerung und Handhabung 3.4 Die Lagerung mu so erfolgen, da die Waren von
der gelieferten Teile und Maschinen Regen, Tau, Schwitzwasser, anderen Arten von
Feuchtigkeit und korrosionsfrdernder Atmosphre
Grundstzlich sind die von Schenck gelieferten Waren zur geschtzt sind. Dabei ist eine Lagertemperatur von -5 bis
sofortigen Montage bestimmt. Sollte zwischen Ankunft am +45C zulssig. Grere Temperaturschwankungen sind
Bestimmungsort und Montage dennoch eine zu vermeiden. Die maximal zulssige relative
Zwischenlagerung ntig sein, ist der Besteller verpflichtet, Luftfeuchtigkeit betrgt 70% bei jeder Temperatur.
Schenck von der geplanten Einlagerung zu unterrichten und 3.5 Der Besteller trgt dafr Sorge, da ein ausreichender
falls von Schenck nicht im Einzelfall andere Festlegungen Schutz vor Ungezieferbefall gewhrleistet ist. Dabei sind
getroffen werden, diese Richtlinien zur Lagerung zu die rtlichen Gegebenheiten zu bercksichtigen.
beachten. Dabei richtet sich die Mglichkeit der Lagerung 3.6 Die Lagerung mu so erfolgen, da die Waren vor
unter anderem nach der gewhlten Verpackung. Falls eine ionisierenden Strahlen (Rntgenstrahlen, Radio- aktivitt)
Lagerung nicht mglich ist, wird Schenck dies dem Besteller sowie Mikrowellenstrahlung und Magnetfeldern geschtzt
mitteilen. sind. Es gelten die gleichen Grenzwerte wie beim
1. Eingangskontrolle Personenschutz
1.1 Der Besteller ist verpflichtet, die erhaltenen Ver- 3.7 Die maximale Lagerdauer in der Originalverpackung
packungseinheiten unverzglich auf Vollstndigkeit und betrgt 6 Monate (ab der Auslieferung ab Werk Schenck).
uerlich erkennbare Schden der Verpackung zu Die Lagerung verlngert nicht die vertragliche
untersuchen. Gewhrleistungszeit von Schenck.
1.2 Weist die Verpackung uerliche Schden auf, ist der 3.8 Die Verpackung ist regelmig, mindestens monatlich,
Besteller verpflichtet, unverzglich beim Spediteur zu auf Beschdigungen zu berprfen. Die berprfung
reklamieren und Schenck umgehend und umfassend nach 6 Monaten Lagerdauer seit ab-Werk-Lieferung
ber die festgestellten Schden zu unterrichten, sowie umfat das ffnen der Auen- verpackung, die Kontrolle
den zustndigen Havarie- kommissar hinzuzuziehen. der Innenverpackung (Luftdichtigkeit der Folie) sowie der
Weitere Manahmen darf der Besteller (auer bei Gefahr Funktionsfhigkeit der dehydrierenden Mittel und
im Verzug) nur nach Rcksprache und in eventuell erfor- derliche Konservierungsmanahmen
bereinstimmung mit Schenck einleiten. Die Haftung (siehe auch Art. 4.5). Nach dieser Kontrolle und der
seitens Schenck fr derartige Schden richtet sich nach eventuell erforderlichen Manahmen sowie luftdichtem
den vertraglichen Regelungen. Wiederverschlieen der Innenfolie mu die
1.3 Wurde die Verpackung vom Zoll geffnet, so ist der Auenverpackung wieder wie ursprnglich ver- schlossen
Besteller verpflichtet, unverzglich eine Neuver- packung werden.
oder Wiederverschlieung der Verpackung nach Schenck Falls der Besteller Beschdigungen an der Verpackung
Standard vorzunehmen. Die diesbezglichen oder an den Waren selbst feststellt, ist unverzglich ein
Einzelheiten teilt Schenck dem Besteller auf Anfrage mit. Havariekommissar mit der Begut- achtung des Schadens
Dabei ist besonders Augenmerk auf die zu beauftragen. Diesem sind alle fr sein Gutachten
Funktionsfhigkeit der ange- brachten erforderlichen Teile der Verpackung und der Waren,
Korrosionsschutzmittel zu richten (Unversehrtheit der sowie der Dokumente, insbesondere
Folienverpackung, insbesondere luftdichter Verschlu der Transportdokumente, zur Verfgung zu stellen, sowie alle
Folie, Vorhandensein und korrekte Anbringung des Rost- zur Beurteilung erforderlichen Angaben zu machen.
schutzpapiers, Rostschutzanstrich, dehydrierende Mittel). Schenck haftet nur fr Schden, die gem Gutachten
2. Transport, Ein- und Auslagerungsvorgang des Havariekommissars nachweislich und unstreitig
durch fehlerhafte Verpackung oder whrend des
2.1 Beim innerbetrieblichen Transport und den Ein-und Transports bis zum vertraglich vereinbarten Ort und/oder
Auslagerungsvorgngen ist der Besteller verpflichtet, die Termin des Gefahrbergangs entstanden sind. Schenck
vorgesehenen Transporthilfen und die diesbezglichen ist nicht haftbar fr Schden whrend oder anllich der
Vorschriften von Schenck zu beachten und, wo geeignet, beschriebenen Kontrollttigkeit und Manahmen des
diese Transporthilfen zu benutzen (sen etc.). Bestellers.
2.2 Der Besteller trgt dafr Sorge, da sto- und Der Inspektionszyklus verkrzt sich je nach den rtlichen
vibrationsempfindliche Gerte und Anlagen schonend Gegebenheiten. Nach erfolgter Kontrolle und Abschlu
behandelt werden (insbesondere Megerte, wge- der eventuell erforderlichen Manahmen (Austausch
technische Einrichtungen). Erschtterungen und Ste bzw. Ersetzen von dehydrierenden Mitteln, Folie etc. und
sind bei der Lagerung und innerbetrieblichem Transport Durchfhrung der Konservierungs- manahmen) ist eine
unbedingt zu vermeiden. anschlieende weitere Lagerung von 6 Monaten bis zu
Die auf der Verpackung aufgebrachten Symbole mssen maximal 12 Monaten, gerechnet ab der Lieferung ab
beachtet werden. Werk, zulssig.
2.3 Verbindungskabel sind keine Handgriffe! 3.9 Bei Ablauf der maximalen Lagerdauer (Artikel 3.7 und
Beschdigungen sind bei Benutzung als Handgriff 3.8) knnen von Fall zu Fall weitere Konservierungs-
unvermeidlich. Die von Schenck gelieferten Ver- manahmen ntig werden. In solchen Fllen sind vom
bindungskabel sind einwandfrei gefertigt und geprft. Fr Besteller mit Schenck die erforderlichen Manahmen
Schden durch falsche Handhabung bernimmt Schenck abzustimmen. Ohne eine solche Abstimmung entfllt die
keine Haftung. vertragliche Gewhrleistung, sofern sie noch besteht.
3. Lagerung 3.10 Vor dem Auspacken der Waren zur Montage oder zur
3.1 Alle Waren sind in ihrer Originalverpackung zu lagern, Durchfhrung der Manahmen gem Abs. 3.8 und 4.5
mit Ausnahme der gem 1.3 oder 3.8 neu verpackten. mssen sich die noch geschlossenen
Verpackungseinheiten zur Aklimatisierung mindestens
3.2 Die Lagerung mu in aufrechter Position auf ebener 24 Stunden in dem zum Auspacken vorgesehenen Raum
Flche erfolgen. Kisten sind dazu mit dem befinden.
gebruchlichen Symbol gekennzeichnet.
3.3 Bei der Lagerung ist der maximal zulssige Stapeldruck
zu beachten
bei Kartons: 0,2 t/m2
bei Holzkisten: 2 t/m2
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 1

Schenck Process
4. Besondere Vorschriften zur Lagerung und 5.2 Falls der Besteller neue, dem Stand der Technik
Handhabung entsprechende allgemeine Erkennt nisse betreffend der
4.1 Elektrische/elektronische Teile, Baugruppen und Anlagen Lagerung gewinnt oder solche neuen Erkenntnisse
mssen in klimatisierten Rumen gelagert werden. allgemein bekannt werden, so ist er gehalten, diese zu
4.2 Datentrger (Disketten, CD, Festplatten, Bnder,..) beachten bzw. die jeweils strengeren Anforderungen zu
mssen immer in die fr sie vorgesehene Schutz- erfllen.
verpackung (Originalverpackung) gesteckt werden, 5.3 Kann der Besteller nicht den Beweis erbringen, da er
sobald sie dem Laufwerk entnommen werden. diese Richtlinien zur Lagerung beachtet hat, verliert der
Datentrger drfen nicht geknickt, gefaltet oder belastet Besteller den vertraglichen Anspruch auf Gewhrleistung
werden. Disketten sollen stehend in einer fr Schden, die nachweislich oder mit berwiegender
Aufbewahrungsbox lagern. Datentrger mssen Wahrscheinlichkeit auf die Nichtbeachtung
geschtzt sein vor magnetischen Feldern (z.B. Netztrafo) zurckzufhren sind.
und vor ferromagnetischem Material. Starke Magnetfelder 5.4 Der Umfang der Haftung von Schenck fr Schden richtet
knnen Daten auf den Datentrgern lschen. Hitze und sich grundstzlich nach den vertraglichen Regelungen,
Sonnenbestrahlung schadet Datentrgern! wobei Schenck fr Schden, die nicht an den gelieferten
4.3 Mechanische Teile/Bauelemente Packungen, die solche Waren selbst entstanden sind, nicht haftet.
Teile enthalten, mssen unbedingt in geschlossenen Diese Haftungsbeschrnkung gilt nicht bei Vorsatz oder
Rumen gelagert werden. grober Fahrlssigkeit. Fr Vorsatz oder grobe
4.3.1 Gummitransportbnder und andere Gummiteile Fahrlssigkeit nichtleitender Mitarbeiter von Schenck
Nach Ablauf der Frist gem Artikel 3.7 sind folgende haftet Schenck jedoch nur, wenn sie eine wesentliche
Konservierungsmanahmen ntig: Vertragspflicht verletzen. Die Haftbeschrnkung gilt
ferner nicht in den Fllen, in denen nach
Entspannen der Transportbnder Produkthaftungsgesetz bei Fehlern des
Einreiben der Transportbnder mit Glyzerin Liefergegenstandes fr Personen- und Sachschden an
anschlieende Lagerung khl, trocken und vor Licht- privat genutzten Gegenstnden gehaftet wird. Sie gilt
einfall geschtzt. auch nicht beim Fehlen von Eigenschaften, die
Schutz der Gummiteile vor Ozoneinwirkung ausdrcklich zugesichert sind, wenn die Zusicherung
gerade bezweckt hat, den Besteller gegen Schden, die
4.3.2 Tragrollen
nicht am Liefergegenstand selbst entstanden sind,
Nach Ablauf der Frist gem Art. 3.7 sind diese von
abzusichern. Der Ersatz von reinen
Hand durchzudrehen, um einem Entmischen des
Vermgensschden, d.h. z.B. von Produktionsausfall,
Schmiermittels und damit einem Verharzen
Produk-tionsminderung oder entgangenem Gewinn, wird
entgegenzuwirken. Der Schutzanstrich der Tragrollen,
durch die allgemeinen Grundstze von Treu und
insbesondere der berdrehten Tragrollenmntel, ist zu
Glauben, etwa in den Fllen der Unverhltnismigkeit
kontrollieren und gegebenenfalls nachzubessern.
zwischen Hhe des Lieferpreises und Schadenshhe ,
4.3.3 Blanke Teile begrenzt.
Der Schutzanstrich blanker Teile ist nach Ablauf der Frist
gem Art. 3.7 zu kontrollieren und gegebenfalls
6. Anzuwendendes Recht, Gerichtsstand und
Verschiedenes
nachzubessern bzw. neu anzubringen z.B. Tectyl 506.
6.1 Fr die Rechtsbeziehungen der Vertragspartner gilt
4.3.4 Getriebe
ausschlielich das in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland
werden blicherweise mit einer Konservierung versehen
gltige materielle Recht unter Ausschlu des
ausgeliefert. Nach Ablauf der Frist gem Art. 3.7 ist eine
bereinkommens der Vereinten Nation ber Vertrge
Splung des Getriebes mit einem Konservierungsmittel
ber den internationalen Warenkauf.
z.B. ENSIS 20 (Shell), durchzufhren.
6.2 Gerichtsstand fr alle Streitigkeiten ist Darmstadt. Es
4.4 Stahlkonstruktionen
bleibt Schenck jedoch vorbehalten, auch dort Klage zu
knnen dann in lediglich berdachten Rumen gelagert
erheben, wo fr den Besteller ein Gerichtsstand
werden, wenn die Bedingungen des 1. Satzes des Artikel
gesetzlich begrndet ist.
3.4 gewhrleistet sind. Diese Verpackungseinheiten
mssen zum Schutz vor Bodenfeuchtigkeit erhht
gelagert werden. 6.3 Die Schenck zur Verfgung gestellten Daten werden
4.5 Gefahrgut EDV-mig verarbeitet und gespeichert.
ist grundstzlich getrennt von brigen Gtern Personenbezogene Daten werden entsprechend dem
entsprechend der gesetzlichen Vorschriften zu lagern. Bundesdatenschutzgesetz gegen Mibrauch geschtzt.
4.6 Schwingungserreger
sind innen konserviert und in Kisten verpackt. Der
Korrosionsschutz mu bei lngerer Lagerung erneuert
werden. Bitte beachten Sie die techn. Dokumentation.
4.7 Druckfedern
entspannen. Dazu gehen Sie wie folgt vor: Abstnde
zwischen den Federauflagen oben und unten messen. Je
Federstelle zwei U-Eisen um 30mm lnger als der
gemessene Abstand ablngen. Die Maschine auf den
U-Eisen ablassen und die Federn somit entlasten.
5. Gltigkeit und Wirkung
5.1 Diese Richtlinien zur Lagerung gelten fr alle Lieferungen
von Schenck, gem dem 1. Absatz dieser Richtlinien.
Daneben haben die in den jeweiligen Angeboten,
Auftragsbesttigungen oder sonstigem Schriftverkehr
enthaltenen Datenbltter, technischen Informationen und
sonstigen Hinweise Gltigkeit fr den jeweiligen
Einzelfall.
2 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
GB Guideline for Storage and Handling of 3.8 Check packing for damage at regular intervals, at least
Components and Machines Supplied once a month. Verification after six months of storage
from date of shipping ex works shall comprise opening of
Equipment supplied by Schenck is, as a matter of principle, the outside packing, checking of the interior packing
intended for immediate installation or erection. However, if (air-tightness of foil) and functionality of desiccating
between the time of delivery to site and the time of installation agents, and the possible taking of conservation measures
and/or erection intermediate storage becomes necessary, (see 4.5). After this verification, and after taking the
customer shall so notify Schenck, and unless Schenck necessary measures, including restoration of the
determines otherwise, customer shall in this case adhere to air-tightness of foil, reclose the outer packing so as to
the following instructions. The possibility of storage on site restore the original state.
depends on the type of packing selected. If storage on site is If damage to packing or equipment is discovered, call in
not be possible, Schenck will notify the customer accordingly. the appropriate damage assessing agent for assessing
1. Goods Inwards Inspection the actual damage. Make available to him all required
portions of the packing material and goods plus
1.1 Check packages as soon as received for complete count
documents, especially shipping documents., and give all
and apparent damage.
data necessary for the assessment. Schenck shall be
1.2 If package is damaged, file a claim with carrier, call in the liable only for damage which according to the
appropriate damage assessing agent, and notify Schenck assessment is demonstrably and incontestably due to
immediately and comprehensively of the damage. Do not improper packing or has occurred in transit to the agreed
take any other measures for the time being (save in case point and/or before the date of transfer of risk of loss.
of imminent danger) until discussed and agreed with Schenck shall not be liable for damage occurring during
Schenck. Schencks liability in any such case depends or on the occasion of inspection activities described or
upon Contractual arrangements. any measures taken by the customer.
1.3 If package has been opened by Customs authorities, The inspection intervals may have to be reduced
reclose package immediately, or repack equipment in depending on local conditions. On the other hand, after
accordance with Schenck standards. Schenck will give the inspection described and taking the necessary
relevant details upon request. Pay particular attention to measures (replacement of foil, desiccating agents, etc.,
the functionality of all corrosion preventive means and conservation measures), another six-month storage
(intactness of foil wrapping, especially air-tightness; period may follow; hence a total period of 12 months
presence of rust-preventive paint coat, and effects of storage from date of shipment ex works is permissible.
desiccating agents, etc.).
3.9 After completion of the maximum permissible storage
2. Transport, Storage and Retrieval Operations period (3.7 and 3.8), further conservation measures may
2.1 For in-plant transport, storage and retrieval, use the become necessary. If so, the measures to be taken will
transport aids provided for this purpose (e.g. eyes), and have to be discussed with Schenck. Without such
follow appropriate Schenck instructions. agreement, any contractual warranty becomes null and
2.2 Take precautionary measures to ensure shock- and void, should it still have been in effect.
vibration-sensitive equipment is handled gently 3.10 Before unpacking the equipment for installation or
(especially, measuring instruments and weighing errection, or taking the measures described in 3.8 and
equipment). Shocks and vibrations in handling and 4.5., store the packages in the unopenend state for a
storage are by all means to be avoided. minimum of 24 hours in the room where unpacking is to
Symbols painted onto package are to be noted. take place.
2.3 Interconnecting cables are no handles! If they are used
as handles, damage will be inevitable. Cables supplied by 4. Special Instructions for Storage and
Schenck are properly manufactured and tested. Schenck Handling
accepts no liability for damage or loss caused by 4.1 Electrical/Electronic Components, Assemblies,
improper handling. Equipment Store in air conditioned location,
3. Storage 4.2 Data Carriers (Floppy disks, hard disks, magtapes)
3.1 Store all goods in original packing, except those repacked Place all data carriers in protective wrapper (original
under 1.3 or 3.8. packing) as soon as removed from drive. Do not kink,
3.2 Store on a plane surface and in upright position. Crates fold, or place under load. Keep floppy disks standing
are marked accordingly. upright in protective box. Protect data carriers from
magnetic fields (e.g. line transformer) and ferromagnetic
3.3 Permissible stacking pressure is: material. Strong magnetic fields may destroy data stored
Cartons: 0.2 t/m2 on data carriers, and heat and sun radiation will harm
Wooden crates: 2.0 t/m2 data carriers.

3.4 Store equipment so as to be protected from rain, dew, 4.3 Mechanical Parts/Components
condensate, other kinds of moisture, and Keep packages containing such items in an enclosed
corrosion-promoting atmosphere. Permissible storage space.
temperature is -5...+45 C. Avoid greater changes. 4.3.1 Conveyor Rubber Belts and OtherRubber Items
Maximum permissible relative humidity is 70% at all After the time period according to 3.7 has expired, the
temperatures. following conservation measures are required:
3.5 Ensure sufficient protection from infestation by vermins, Release tension of rubber belts.
taking due account of local conditions. Treat rubber belts with glycerol.

3.6 Protect equipment from ionizing radiation (X rays, radio
Store in cool, dry place, protected from incident light.
activity, etc.) as well as microvave radiation and magnetic
fields. The same limit values apply as for the protection of Protect rubber items from ozone effects.
personnel. 4.3.2 Conveyor Idlers
3.7 Maximum storage life of equipment in original packing is After the time period according to 3.7 has expired, rotate
six months from delivery ex Schenck works. Storage time idlers by hand, in order to counteract segregation of
does not extend the warranty period granted by Schenck. lubricants and, thus, resination. Check protective, coating
of idlers, especially on turned idler shells. Touch up if
necessary.
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 3

Schenck Process
6. Applicable Law; Place of Jurisdiction;

Miscella neous
4.3.3 Bright Parts
After the time period according to 3.7 has expired, check 6.1 With respect to the relationship established between
protective coating of all bright parts. Touch up if Schenck and customer by the formation of the Contract,
necessary, or renew, using, for instance, Tectyle 506. there shall apply exclusively the laws, orders and
regulations in force in the Federal Republic of Germany,
4.3.4 Gearboxes
with the exception of the United Nations Convention on
are normally supplied conserved. After the time period
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
according to 3.7 has expired, do flush with a conservation
agent, ENSIS 20 (Shell), for example. 6.2 For all suits arising out of controversies over Contractual
matters, customer consents to the jurisdiction of the
4.4 Steel Structures
Darmstadt courts. Schenck reserves the right, however,
Steel sructures may be stored in a space that is merely
to bring action in any other court where jurisdiction over
roofed over if conditions according to 3.4, first sentence,
customer may be obtained.
are met. Store in elevated location to ensure protection
from ground moisture. 6.3 The data supplied to Schenck will be processed and
stored on a computerized basis. Information supplied
4.5 Hazardous Goods
relating to persons is protected against misuse in
Keep hazardous goods strictly apart from other goods.
conformity with German data privacy legislation.
Store in accordance with legal regulations.
4.6 Vibration Exciters
are internally preserved and packed in crates. In case of
long-time storage, corrosion protection has to be
renewed. Please heed instructions in technical
documentation.
4.7 Compression Springs
are to be untensioned. To do so, proceed as follows:
Measure distances between spring supports top and
bottom. Cut two steel channels per spring position to 30
mm longer than distance measured. Lower machine on
the channels, thereby releasing spring tension.
5. Validity and Effectiveness
5.1 The storage instructions above apply generally for all
Schenck deliveries in accordance with the first paragraph
of these Instructions. Furthermore, data sheets and/or
technical information, instructions, etc., provided in or
with sales proposals, order confirmations, or other
correspondence, arevalid.
5.2 In the event customer gains new information about the
state of the art in storage, or if such new information
becomes generally known, customer shall have an
obligation to act in accordance therewith or, as
applicable, to fulfil whichever requirements are stricter.
5.3 If damage occurs and customer cannot prove that these
Instructions have been adhered to, customer shall lose
the Contractual right to claim compensation for any
damage or loss demonstrably or apparently due to his
failure to adhere to these Instructions.
5.4 The extent of Schencks liability for any damage or loss
shall be governed exclusively by the Contractual
arrangements. Under no circumstances shall Schenck be
liable for damage or loss not occurring to the delivered
equipment itself.
The foregoing limitation of liability shall not apply in case
of intent or gross negligence. However, where intent or
gross negligence on the part of non-executive personnel
of Schenck is involved, Schenck accepts liability only if
the employee in question has violated an essential
obligation under the Contract. Furthermore, the aforesaid
limitation shall not apply in cases where a defect in the
delivery item causes bodily injury or damage to privately
used property and where liability for such injury or
damage is incurred by virtue of the Product Liability Act.
Neither shall it apply in case of deficiency in expressly
warranted features or properties, where it has been the
purpose of such warranty to save the customer harmless
from loss or damage occurring not to the delivery item
itself. For losses which are purely economic, e.g., loss of
production, decrease in output, or loss of profit, the level
of compensation shall be limited with due regard to the
general bona fide principles, for instance when the
amount of loss is out of all proportion to the price of
delivery.
4 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
FR Directives pour le stockage et la manutention des fournitures de pices et de machines
FR Directives pour le stockage et la

manutention des fournitures de pices et de 3.3 La pression maximale dempilage au stockage est de
machines
pour les cartons: 0,2 t/m2
Les marchandises livres par SCHENCK sont principalement pour les caisses en bois: 2 t/m2
destines au montage immdiat. Lorsquun magasinage 3.4 Le stockage des marchandises doit tre effectu labri
intermdiaire savre ncessaire entre le moment de la de la pluie, de la rose, des eaux de condensation ou
livraison destination et le montage, le client devra en autres tats dhumidit, et hors de toute atmosphre
informer Schenck et sera tenu de se conformer aux corrosive. Il est entendu que la temprature admissible
prsentes Directives pour le stockage, moins que Schenck de stockage ne doit pas dpasser les limites de -5 et
ne veuille prendre dautres dispositions pour quelques cas +45C. Il faut galement viter les importantes variations
particuliers. La possibilit de stockage dpend alors, entre de temprature. Le taux admissible dhumidit relative de
autres, de lemballage choisi. Si le stockage nest pas lair est de 70% et ceci pour toutes les tempratures.
possible, Schenck devra en informer le client. 3.5 Le client veillera une protection insectifuge suffisante.
1. Contrle la rception Il considrera, bien entendu, les conditions
1.1 Le client sengage procder linspection immdiate denvironnement.
des colis emballs, ds leur rception; il devra constater 3.6 Le stockage des marchandises doit tre effectu labri
que la livraison est complte et procder un examen de rayons ionisants (rayons X, sources radioactives), des
visuel minutieux de lemballage, afin de dtecter microondes et des champs magntiques. On se
dventuels dommages. conformera aux mmes valeurs limites que pour la
1.2 Si lemballage prsente extrieurement des dommages, protection des personnes.
le client est tenu de dposer sans dlai une rclamation 3.7 La dure maximale de stockage des colis dans leur
auprs du transporteur, dinformer Schenck emballage dorigine est de 6 mois compter de la date
immdiatement des dtails des dgts subis, et de faire de livraison, dpart usine Schenck. Le stockage ne
appel au commissaire davaries comptent. Le client ne pourra en aucun cas prolonger la dure de garantie
prendra aucune mesure supplmentaire (sauf en cas de contractuelle accorde par Schenck.
pril imminent) sans en avoir pralablement rfr 3.8 Il faut vrifier priodiquement, au moins 1 fois par mois,
Schenck, et en avoir obtenu laccord. La responsabilit que lemballage nest pas dtrior ou endommag. Le
incombant Schenck pour ce type de dommages sera contrle qui doit tre effectu aprs 6 mois de stockage
conforme aux conditions contractuelles. dater de la livraison, dpart usine Schenck, comprend
1.3 Si lemballage a t ouvert par la douane, le client sera louverture de lemballage extrieur, le contrle de
tenu de le refermer aussitt ou de le remplacer lemballage intrieur (impermabilit lair de la feuille
immdiatement par un nouvel emballage conforme au plastique) ainsi que de lefficacit du produit hydrofuge, et
standard Schenck. A ce sujet, le client peut obtenir de ventuellement celui des mesures de conservation (voir
Schenck, sur demande, des informations dtailles. Il galement Art. 4.5). Aprs avoir effectu ce contrle, pris
faut alors prter une attention particulire aux capacits les mesures qui se seraient ventuellement avres
de protection anticorrosion que prsentent les moyens ncessaires, et ensuite referm la feuille intrieure
utiliss (au bon tat du plastique demballage et en impermable lair, lemballage extrieur doit tre
particulier lhermticit du soudage, ainsi qu la nouveau referm, comme lorigine.
prsence et la mise en place correcte du papier Si le client constate des dtriorations de lemballage ou
antirouille, aux agents hydrofuges). de la marchandise, il fera immdiatement appel un
2. Transports, oprations de stockage et de commissaire davaries pour effecteur lexpertise des
reprise dommages. Il mettra sa disposition tout ce qui sera utile
2.1 Pour le transport interne son tablissement, de mme son expertise, toutes les pices de lemballage et de la
que pour les oprations de stockage et de reprise, le marchandise, ainsi que tous les documents, et ceux, en
client sera tenu de prendre en compte les moyens de particulier, relatifs au transport de la marchandise, et il lui
manutention prescrits par Schenck et les instructions y fournira toute information utile ses conclusions.
affrentes et de les utiliser lorsque les circonstances sy Schenck ne se portera garant que des dommages qui,
prtent (oeillets, etc.). selon lexpertise du commissaire davaries seraient de
toute vidence et indiscutablement ds linsuffisance de
2.2 Le client veillera ce que les appareils et les installations
lemballage, ou auraient t causs pendant le transport
sensibles aux chocs et aux vibrations soient manipuls
la destination indique par le contrat et/ou survenus
avec soin (et en particulier, les appareils de mesure, les
avant le dlai du transfert de risques. Schenck ne
ensembles appartenant la technique du pesage). Les
supportera la responsabilit ni pour les dommages
secousses et les chocs seront vits tout prix lors du
causs au cours ou loccasion des oprations de
stockage et lors de la manutention dans lenceinte de
contrle mentionnes plus haut, ni pour ceux qui seraient
lusine.
survenus suite aux mesures ventuelles prises par le
Les symboles utiliss sur les emballages sont client.
respecter.
Le cycle dinspection se rduit suivant les conditions
2.3 Les cbles de liaison ne sont pas de poignes! Les denvironnement. Aprs avoir procd au contrle et
dommages sont invitables lorsquils sont utiliss en tant termin les travaux ventuellement ncessaires
que poignes. Les cbles de liaison livrs par Schenck (change ou remplacement du produit hydrofuge, de
sont de qualit irrprochable et subissent un contrle la feuille plastique etc., et mise en oeuvre des
svre. Schenck ne saurait en aucun cas assumer la mesures pour la conservation), il sera considr
responsabilit des dommages subis par suite de admissible de procder 6 mois de stockage
manutention incorrecte. conscutifs ne dpassant pas, toutefoi, au total 12
3. Stockage mois au maximum, partir de la date de livraison,
3.1 Toutes les marchandises doivent tre stockes dans dpart usine Schenck.
leurs emballages dorigine lexception de celles qui ont 3.9 A lexpiration de la dure maximale de stockage (Article
t remballes conformment aux Articles 1.3 et 3.8. 3.7 et 3.8), il pourra savrer ncessaire de prendre
3.2 Le stockage doit tre effectu en position debout sur une ventuellement des mesures supplmentaires pour la
surface plane. A ces fins, les caisses sont marques du conservation. Dans ce cas, le client devra prendre
symbole usuel. contact avec Schenck pour dfinir ces mesures. Sans
accord pralable, la garantie contractuelle, pour autant
quelle existe encore, restera sans effet.
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 5

Schenck Process
FR Directives pour le stockage et la manutention des fournitures de pices et de machines
3.10 Avant de dballer les marchandises tant pour le montage 4.7 Ressorts de compression
que pour procder aux travaux prvus en conformit Ceux-ci doivent tre desserrs. La procdure pour ce
avec les Articles 3.8 et 4.5, les units demballage encore faire est comme suit: Mesurer les carts des appuis de
fermes seront places dans un local prvu pour le ressort en haut et en bas, ensuite trononner deux fers
dballage et laisses temprature ambiante au moins en U jusqu 30 mm de plus long que lcart mesur, puis
24 heures lavance. descendre la machine sur les fers en U et relcher ainsi
4. Rgles particulires pour le stockage et la la tension des ressorts.
anutention 5. Validit et effet
4.1 Les pices, sous-ensembles et installations lectriques 5.1 Conformment lArticle 1 des prsentes Directives,
et/ou lectroniques doivent tre stocks dans des locaux celles-ci sappliquent toutes les fournitures de Schenck.
climatiss. En plus, les fiches techniques, les informations
4.2 Supports dinformations techniques et les autres renseignements, dont les offres,
(disques souples, disques durs, bandes magntiques) les accuss de rception de commande et la
Les supports dinformations doivent toujours tre placs correspondance diverse font mention, sont valables pour
dans les emballages de protection prvus cet effet chaque cas particulier.
(emballages dorigine) ds quils ont t retirs des 5.2 Si le client venait prendre connaissance dinformations
mcanismes dentranement. Les supports dinformations quelconques en rapport avec une technique nouvelle de
ne doivent tre ni casss, ni plis, ni subir de stockage, ou si de telles connaissances nouvelles
sollicitations. Les disques souples doivent tre devenaient notoires, il serait tenu de les prendre en
entreposs debout, dans des botes de protection. Les compte, et donc de satisfaire toute condition plus
supports dinformations doivent tre protgs contre les rigoureuse.
champs magntiques (du transformateur rseau, par 5.3 Si le client ne peut apporter la preuve de lapplication des
exemple) et contre tout matriau ferromagntique. Les prsentes Directives pour le stockage, il perd son droit
champs forte induction magntique peuvent effacer les contractuel de garantie pour les dommages qui seraient,
informations stockes sur les supports. La chaleur et les de toute vidence ou trs vraisemblablement, causs par
rayons du soleil dtriorent les supports dinformations. linobservation des Directives.
4.3 Pices et lments mcaniques 5.4 Ltendue de la responsabilit Schenck en cas de
Il est impratif de stocker les colis emballs contenant dommages sera principalement dfinie par les conditions
des lments mcaniques dans des locaux ferms. contractuelles, tant entendu que Schenck ne saurait tre
4.3.1 Bandes transporteuses en caoutchouc et autres lments tenu responsable des dommages qui ne seraient pas
en caoutchouc survenus sur les marchandises livres proprement dites.
Le dlai prcis par lArticle 3.7 coul, les mesures de La limitation de responsabilit dfinie dans ce qui
conservation suivantes simposent: prcde, ne sapplique pas en cas de prmditation ou
dtendre les bandes transporteuses, de ngligence grave. Toutefois, lorsquil sagit de
appliquer de la glycrine sur les bandes transporteu- prmditation ou de ngligence grave de la part dun
collaborateur de Schenck qui ne compte pas parmi ses
ses,
cadres, ladite responsabilit nest engage que dans le
les stocker ensuite dans un endroit frais, sec et prot- cas o ce collaborateur aurait viol une obligation
g de la lumire,
contractuelle essentielle. La limitation de responsabilit
protger les pices en caoutchouc des effets de ne sapplique pas non plus dans le cas ou un vice de la
lozone. fourniture est lorigine dun dommage corporel ou dun
4.3.2 Rouleaux porteurs dommage survenu sur un objet usage priv et o notre
Aprs coulement du dlai prcis par lArticle 3.7, les responsabilit est engage en vertu de la Loi concernant
faire rouler la main pour viter la sparation du lubrifiant la responsabilit-produits; ni non plus en cas dabsence
et empcher ainsi la rsinification. La couche protectrice de qualits annonces expressment, lorsque la garantie
des rouleaux porteurs, et en particulier leurs enveloppes des qualits en cause a t donne justement dans le but
reprises au tour, doivent tre contrles, et de protger le client contre dventuels dommages ne
ventuellement remises en tat. survenant pas sur la fourniture proprement dite. Par
4.3.3 Pices polies rapport aux pertes ou dommages purement pcuniaires,
La couche protectrice des pices polies doit tre tels que perte/diminution de production ou manque
contrle lexpiration du dlai prcis par lArticle 3.7, gagner, limportance de lindemnit sera limite compte
ventuellement remise en tat, ou entirement dment tenu des principes gnraux de loyaut et de
renouvele, avec du Tectyl 506, par exemple. confiance rciproque - par exemble l o le montant du
4.3.4 Rducteurs dommage est nettement en disproportion avec le prix de
Ceux-ci sont gnralement livrs avec leur produit de la fourniture en cause.
conservation. A lexpiration du dlai indiqu par lArticle 6. Droit applicable; juridiction comptente;
3.7, il faut procder au lavage du rducteur avec du divers
ENSIS 20 (de Shell), par exemple. 6.1 Les rapports tablis entre Schenck et le client par la
4.4 Constructions mtalliques formation du contrat son rgis exclusivement par le droit
Elles peuvent tre entreposes dans nimporte quel local matriel de la Rpublique Fdrale dAllemegne, a
muni dune toiture, pour autant que les conditions cites lexclusion de la Convention des Nations Unies relative
dans la premire phrase de lArticle 3.4 soient aux Contrats pour la vente internationale des
respectes. Ces units demballage doivent tre stockes marchandises.
en surlvation pour tre protgs de lhumidit dgage 6.2 Pour tout litige dcoulant du contrat, les tribunaux de
par le sol. Darmstadt sont seuls comptents. Schenck se rserve
4.5 Produits nocifs toutefois la possibilit dactionner devant toute juridiction
Conformment la lgislation en vigueur, les produits comptente pour le client.
nocifs doivent tre stocks sparment des autres 6.3 Les donnes mises la disposition de Schenck seront
marchandises. traites et mmorises par des moyens informatiques.
4.6 Excitatrices vibrantes Les donnes informatiques se rfrant des personnes
Celles-ci sont conserves lintrieur et emballes dans sont protges contre tout emploi abusif, conformment
des caisses. En cas de stockage de longue dure, la la lgislation en vigueur en matire de protection des
protection anticorrosion doit tre renouvele. Prire de fichiers.
tenir compte des instructions contenues dans la
documentation technique.
6 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
IT Direttive per limmagazzinamento e la 3.4 Limmagazzinaggio deve essere effettuato in modo da

manipolazione di componenti e macchine fornite proteggere le merci da pioggia, rugiada, acqua di
condensa, altre forme di umidit o atmosfera corrosiva.
In linea di principio le merci fornite Schenck sono destinate La temperatura di immagazzinaggio ammessa
ad essere montate immediatamante. Se tuttavia tra larrivo compresa tra -5 e +45C. Evitare maggiori variazioni di
nel luogo di destinazione ed il montaggio si rendesse temperatura. Lumidit relativa dellaria max. ammissibile
necessario un immagazzinamento intermedio sar compito ammonta a 70% per ogni temperatura.
del cliente informare Schenck dellimmagazzinaggio previsto 3.5 Sar compito del cliente garantire una protezione
e, salvo diversamente definito da Schenck per il caso singolo, sufficiente da agenti parassitari, tenendo conto delle
sar compito del cliente osservare le presenti direttive per condizioni specifiche locali.
limmagazzinaggio. La modalit di immagazzinamento 3.6 Limmagazzinaggio deve essere eseguito in modo da
dipende tra le altre cose dal tipo di imballaggio scelto. proteggere le merci da raggi ionizzanti (raggi X,
Schenck informer il cliente nel caso non fosse possibile un radioattivit) nonch irraggiamento a microonde e campi
immagazzinamento. magnetici. Si applicano gli stessi valore limite validi anche
1. Controllo al ricevimento della merce per la protezione delle persone.
1.1 Sar compito del cliente controllare immediatamente che 3.7 La durata massima di immagazzinamento nella
il contenuto delle unit imballate sia completo e non vi confezione originale di 6 mesi (dalla partenza della
siano danni dellimballaggio riconoscibili esternamente. merce dallo stabilimento Schenck).
1.2 Se limballaggio presenta dei danni esterni, sar compito Limmagazzinamento non prolunga la durata della
del cliente presentare immediatamente reclamo alla ditta garanzia contrattuale da parte della Schenck.
di spedizioni ed informare la Schenck senza indugio e 3.8 La confezione deve essere controllata regolarmente,
con dovizia di particolari sui danni constatati nonch almeno una volta al mese, per verificare che non si sia
convocare il liquidatore di avaria competente. Il cliente deteriorata o non vi siano danni. Il controllo che deve
non prender ulteriori provvedimenti (salvo in caso di essere eseguito dopo 6 mesi di immagazzinamento dalla
pericolo imminente) senza aver precedentemente partenza della merce dallo stabilimento Schenck
interpellato e aver ottenuto lautorizzazione di Schenck. comprende lapertura dellimballaggio esterno, il
La responsabilit di Schenck per tali danni regolata controllo dellimballaggio interno (ermeticit del celofan)
dalle condizioni stipulate nel contratto. nonch la funzionalit dei prodotti deumidificanti ed
1.3 Se limballaggio stato aperto dalle autorit doganali, eventuali altri provvedimenti protettivi necessari (vedere
compito del cliente provvedere immediatamente a un anche lart. 4.5).
nuovo imballaggio oppure richiudere limballaggio Dopo aver effettuato questo controllo e aver preso gli
secondo gli standard Schenck. Su richiesta, Schenck eventuali provvedimenti necessari nonch aver richiuso
fornir al cliente le informazioni dettagliate in merito. Fare ermeticamente il celofan interno, limballaggio esterno
particolare attenzione alla funzionalit dei prodotti deve essere richiuso come allo stato originario.
anticorrosivi utilizzati (integrit dellimballaggio in celofan, Se il cliente constata dei danni allimballaggio o alla
soprattutto lermeticit del celofan, presenza e corretta merce stessa, sar suo compito incaricare
applicazione di carta antiruggine, vernice antiruggine, immediatamente un liquidatore di avaria perch esegua
prodotti deumidificanti). una perizia del danno. Il cliente metter a sua
2. Trasporto, stoccaggio e destoccaggio disposizione tutto ci che necessario per la sua perizia,
tutte le parti dellimballaggio e delle merci, i documenti, in
2.1 Durante il trasporto allinterno della ditta e durante le
particolar modo i documenti di trasporto, nonch gli
operazioni di stoccaggio e destoccaggio il cliente tenuto
fornir tutte le informazioni utili alla formulazione di un
a utilizzare gli ausilii previsti per il trasporto (occhielli di
giudizio. Schenck risponde solo per danni che, secondo
trasporto, ecc.) e a osservare le normative Schenck in
la perizia del liquidatore di avaria, sono provatamente e
merito.
indiscutibilmente riconducibili ad un imballaggio
2.2 Sar compito del cliente trattare con cura la inadeguato oppure si sono verificati durante il trasporto
strumentazione e limpiantistica sensibili agli urti e alle alla destinazione prevista dal contratto e/o sopravvenuti
vibrazioni (in particolare gli strumenti di misura, i sistemi entro il termine previsto per il passaggio del rischio.
di tecnica di pesatura). Devono essere assolutamente Schenck non risponde per danni provocati durante o in
evitati scuotimenti e urti durante limmagazzinamento ed occasione delle operazioni di controllo di cui sopra n
il trasporto allinterno della ditta. verificatisi in seguito a provvedimenti presi dal cliente.
Devono essere rispettati i simboli applicati alla
Il ciclo di ispezione si riduce a seconda delle condizioni
confezione.
specifiche locali. Una volta eseguito il controllo e terminati i
2.3 I cavi di collegamento non devono essere usati come provvedimenti eventualmente necessari (sostituzione dei
maniglie! Poich se cos usati, sono inevitabili prodotti deumidificanti, celofan, ecc. e attuazione di
danneggiamenti. I cavi di collegamento forniti da Schenck provvedimenti protettivi) ammesso un ulteriore periodo di
sono stati fabbricati e controllati in modo ineccepibile. immagazzinaggio di 6 mesi fino ad un totale massimo di
Schenck declina ogni responsabilit per danni causati da 12 mesi, a partire dalla data di partenza delle merci dallo
una manipolazione errata. stabilimento Schenck.
3. Immagazzinaggio
3.1 Tutte le merci devono essere immagazzinate nella loro 3.9 Allo scadere del periodo massimo di immagazzinamento
confezione originale, salvo nei casi descritti agli art. 1.3 o (articoli 3.7 e 3.8) possono rendersi necessarie altre
3.8, in cui necessario un nuovo imballaggio. misure protettive a seconda del caso specifico. In tal caso
3.2 Le merci devono essere immagazzinate in posizione il cliente dovr contattare Schenck per concordare le
eretta su una superficie piana. Le casse sono misure necessarie. In mancanza di tale accordo viene a
appositamente contrassegnate da un simbolo di uso decadere la garanzia contrattuale, se fosse ancora in
comune. vigore.
3.3 Durante limmagazzinaggio osservare la pressione di 3.10 Prima di disimballare le merci per il montaggio od
impilaggio massima ammissibile eseguire i lavori previsti agli articoli 3.8 e 4.5 queste
merci devono essere sistemate, con la confezione ancora
per i cartoni: 0,2 t/m2
chiusa, nel locale previsto per il disimballaggio e lasciate
per le casse di legno: 2 t/m2 l per almeno 24 ore per consentire loro di acclimatarsi.
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 7

Schenck Process
4. Norme particolari per limmagazzinaggio e 5. Validit ed efficacia

la manipolazione 5.1 Le presenti direttive di immagazzinaggio valgono per
4.1 Componenti, sottoinsiemi ed impianti elettrici/elettronici tutte le forniture della Schenck, come previsto nel 1
devono essere immagazzinati in locali climatizzati. paragrafo di queste direttive. Hanno altres validit
4.2 Supporti dati (dischetti, CD, dischi rigidi, nastri per il caso specifico i fogli dati, le informazioni
magnetici,..) devono essere sempre inseriti nellapposita tecniche o altre avvertenze contenute nellofferta,
confezione protettiva (confezione originale), non appena conferma dordine o altra corrispondenza
vengono estratti dal drive. I supporti dati non devono 5.2 Nel caso il cliente venga a conoscenza di nuove
essere piegati, o subire sollecitazioni. I dischetti devono informazioni relative a una nuova tecnica di
essere conservati in posizione eretta in unapposita immagazzinaggio oppure se queste conoscenze
custodia protettiva. I supporti dati devono essere protetti diventano di dominio pubblico, egli tenuto a rispettarle
dai campi magnetici (p.es. trasformatore di rete) e da oppure a soddisfare le normative pi severe.
materiale ferromagnetico. Forti campi magnetici possono 5.3 Se il cliente non pu provare lapplicazione delle presenti
cancellare i dati sui supporti dati. Il calore e direttive di immagazzinamento, egli perder il proprio
lirraggiamento solare danneggiano i supporti dati! diritto contrattuale alla garanzia per danni riconducibili
4.3 Componenti e parti meccaniche Le confezioni provatamente oppure molto verosimilmente
contenenti tali parti devono assolutamente essere allinosservanza delle stesse.
immagazzinate in locali chiusi. 5.4 Lambito di responsabilit della Schenck sar
4.3.1 Nastri trasportatori in gomma ed altri componenti in principalmente definito dalle disposizioni contrattuali,
gomma Una volta trascorso il periodo indicato all art. 3.7 restando inteso che Schenck non risponde di danni non
devono essere presi i seguenti provvedimenti protettivi: verificatisi sulle merci fornite propriamente dette.
Distendere i nastri di trasporto Questa limitazione della responsabilit non vale in
Applicare della glicerina sui nastri trasportatori caso di dolo o di colpa grave. Nel caso si tratti di dolo
o colpa grave da parte di personale non dirigente
Dopo di che immagazzinarli in locali freschi, asciutti e Schenck, Schenck risponde tuttavia solo se detto
protetti dalla luce. personale viola un obbligo contrattuale essenziale. La
Proteggere i componenti in gomma dallazione limitazione della responsabilit non si applica se un
dellozono vizio della fornitura allorigine di un danno
4.3.2 Rulli portanti personale o danno materiale a un oggetto di uso
privato e ove la responsabilit di Schenck si applica
Una volta trascorso il periodo indicato allart. 3.7, i rulli in virt della legge sulla responsabilit del prodotto.
devono essere ruotati a mano per evitare la separazione La limitazione della responsabilit non si applica
del lubrificante e quindi impedire la resinificazione. La neppure in caso di assenza di qualit annunciate
vernice protettiva dei rulli portanti, in particolar modo dei espressamente allorch la garanzia di queste qualit
rivestimenti lavorati al tornio dei rulli portanti deve essere stata data con lo scopo specifico di proteggere il
controllata ed eventualmente ripassata. cliente da danni non sopravvenuti direttamente sulla
4.3.3 Componenti lucide fornitura propriamente detta. Il risarcimento di danni
puramente pecuniari, quali ad es. interruzione
La vernice protettiva di componenti lucide deve essere /riduzione della produzione o perdita di profitto si
controllata una volta trascorso il periodo indicato allart. limiter ai principi generali di buona fede, per
3.7 ed eventualmente ripassata o applicata nuovamente, esempio nei casi in cui lammontare del danno
p.es. Tectyl 506. nettamente in sproporzione con il valore della
fornitura.
4.3.4 Trasmissioni
Vengono normalmente fornite provviste di prodotto 6. Diritto applicabile, foro competente e altro
protettivo. Una volta trascorso il periodo indicato allart.
6.1 Per i rapporti giuridici tra le parti contrattuali vale
3.7 deve essere eseguito un lavaggio delle trasmissioni
esclusivamente il diritto materiale valido nella Repubblica
con un prodotto protettivo, p.es. ENSIS 20 (Shell).
Federale di Germania fatta eccezione della Convenzione
4.4 Strutture in acciaio delle Nazioni Unite relativa ai contratti per la vendita
internazionale di merci.
Possono essere immagazzinate in locali solo provvisti di
6.2 Foro competente per ogni controversia il Tribunale di
tettoia se sono soddisfatte le condizioni descritte allinizio
Darmstadt. Schenck si riserva tuttavia il diritto di avviare
dellart. 3.4. Queste unit imballate devono essere
azione legale in una qualsiasi giurisdizione competente
immagazzinate rialzate da terra per proteggerle
per il cliente.
dallumidit del suolo.
6.3 I dati messi a disposizione di Schenck vengono elaborati
4.5 Merce pericolosa
e memorizzati con mezzi informatici. I dati personali
vengono protetti da abusi conformemente alla
Deve essere essenzialmente immagazzinata separata
Legislazione Federale relativa alla tutela del segreto dei
dalle altre merci secondo le disposizioni di legge vigenti.
dati.
4.6 Eccitatori vibrazionali
Directrices para el almacenamiento y la manipulacin de
las piezas y mquinas suministradas
Sono provvisti di protezione interna e sono imballati in
casse. La protezione dalla corrosione deve essere
rinnovata in caso di periodi di immagazzinamento
prolungati. Osservare la documentazione tecnica.
4.7 Molle di compressione
Deve essere rilasciata la tensione delle molle di

compressione. Procedere nel modo seguente: Misurare
le distanze tra gli appoggi delle molle sopra e sotto. Per
ciascuna posizione della molla tagliare a misura due ferri
a C di 30 mm pi lunghi della distanza misurata. Dopo di
che far scendere la macchina sui ferri a C. In tal modo
viene rilasciata la tensione delle molle.
8 BVR 2000 AA/0408

ES Directrices para el almacenamiento y la 3.4 El almacenamiento debe realizarse de tal modo que las
manipulacin de las piezas y mquinas mercancas estn protegidas contra la lluvia, el roco, el
suministradas agua de condensacin y otros tipos de humedad o
ambientes que favorezcan la corrosin. La temperatura
Generalmente, las mercancas suministradas por Schenck de almacenamiento puede oscilar entre 5 y +45 C.
estn destinadas para su montaje inmediato. Si entre la Deben evitarse grandes oscilaciones de temperatura. La
recepcin en el lugar de destino y el montaje fuera necesario humedad mxima admisible es del 70% a cualquier
un almacenamiento intermedio, el cliente se compromete a temperatura.
informar a Schenck sobre el almacenamiento previsto. En 3.5 El cliente debe garantizar una proteccin suficiente
caso de que Schenck no establezca disposiciones concretas contra parsitos, teniendo en cuenta las circunstancias
segn cada caso, el cliente deber seguir estas directrices de locales.
almacenamiento. El almacenamiento depende, entre otras 3.6 El almacenamiento debe realizarse de tal modo que las
cosas, del embalaje elegido. Si no fuera posible realizar un mercancas estn protegidas contra rayos ionizantes
almacenamiento, Schenck comunicar esto al cliente. (rayos X, radiactividad), as como contra microondas y
1. Control de entrada campos magnticos. Los valores lmite aplicables son los
1.1 El cliente est obligado a comprobar inmediatamente si mismos que para las personas.
las unidades de embalaje recibidas estn completas y si 3.7 El tiempo mximo de almacenamiento dentro del
presentan daos externos embalaje original es de 6 meses (a partir del suministro
1.2 Si en el embalaje se aprecian daos externos, el cliente desde la fbrica de Schenck). El almacenamiento se
estar obligado a presentar inmediatamente una supone una prolongacin de la garanta contractual de
reclamacin al transportista y a informar inmediata y Schenck.
detalladamente a Schenck sobre los daos apreciados. 3.8 El embalaje debe comprobarse peridicamente, al menos
Asimismo deber ponerse en contacto con el tasador de una vez por mes, respecto a posibles daos. La
averas. El cliente slo podr introducir medidas inspeccin tras 6 meses de almacenamiento desde el
adicionales tras consultar previamente a Schenck (salvo suministro desde fbrica incluye lo siguiente: abrir el
peligro en la demora). La responsabilidad que asume embalaje exterior, comprobar el embalaje interior
Schenck por estos daos se rige por las estipulaciones (hermeticidad de la lmina) y la funcionalidad de los
contractuales. agentes deshidratantes, as como tomar las medidas de
1.3 Si el embalaje ha sido abierto en la aduana, el cliente conservacin que fueran necesarias (ver tambin punto
deber proveer inmediatamente un embalaje nuevo o 4.5).Despus de este control, de introducir las medidas
cerrar el embalaje segn el standard Schenck. Los oportunas y de volver a cerrar hermticamente la lmina
detalles en este respecto sern facilitados por Schenck a interior, deber cerrarse de nuevo el embalaje exterior.
instancias del cliente. En este sentido deber prestarse En caso de que el cliente aprecie daos en el embalaje o
especial atencin a la funcionalidad de los anticorrosivos en la propia mercanca, deber contratar inmediatamente
empleados (integridad del embalaje de lminas, un tasador de averas para que dictamine los daos. El
especialmente cierre hermtico de la lmina, existencia y cliente deber facilitar al tasador todas las piezas del
disposicin correcta del papel antioxidante, pintura embalaje y de las mercancas, as como todos los
antioxidante, agentes deshidratantes). documentos, especialmente los documentos de
transporte, que precise para realizar el dictamen.
2. Transporte, proceso de entrada y salida de Tambin deber dar cualquier informacin relevante para
almacn la tasacin. Schenck solamente asume la
2.1 Durante el transporte dentro de la fbrica y los procesos responsabilidad por aquellos daos que, de forma
de entrada y salida de almacn, el cliente deber tener demostrable e indiscutible, segn el dictamen del tasador
en cuenta los dispositivos de transporte y las de averas, se deban a un embalaje defectuoso o se
disposiciones que Schenck haya establecido en este hayan producido durante el transporte hacia el lugar
sentido, utilizando los dispositivos de transporte establecido en el contrato y/o antes del plazo de
(corchetes) cuando sea necesario. transferencia del peligro. Schenck no asume ninguna
2.2 El cliente debe asegurar que los aparatos e instalaciones responsabilidad por daos ocasionados durante o por
sensibles a golpes y vibraciones se manipulan con causa de las labores de control y medidas descritas del
cuidad (sobre todo aparatos de medicin y dispositivos cliente. El ciclo de inspeccin se acortar en funcin de
de tcnica de pesaje). Las vibraciones y los golpes las condiciones locales. Tras realizar el control y finalizar
deben evitarse a cualquier costa durante el las posibles medidas necesarias (cambio o sustitucin de
almacenamiento y el transporte dentro de la fbrica. agentes deshidratantes, lmina, etc.; realizacin de las
Hay que tener en cuenta los smbolos provistos en el medidas de conservacin) se admite un almacenamiento
em balaje. posterior de 6 meses hasta un mximo de 12 meses a
2.3 Los cables de conexin no son agarraderos! Si se utilizan partir del suministro desde fbrica.
para agarrarse, sufrirn daos inevitables. Los cables de 3.9 Una vez transcurrido el tiempo mximo de
conexin facilitados por Schenck estn fabricados sin almacenamiento (puntos 3.7 y 3.8) ser necesario, segn
defectos y debidamente comprobados. Schenck no cada caso, adoptar posteriores medidas de
asume ninguna responsabilidad por daos debidos a una conservacin. En estos casos el cliente deber acordar
manipulacin inadecuada. con Schenck las medidas necesarias. Sin no existe tal
3. Almacenamiento acuerdo, la garanta ya no ser vlida, en caso de que
an estuviera cubierto por la misma.
3.1 Todas las mercancas deben almacenarse dentro de su
3.10 Antes de desembalar las mercancas para proceder al
embalaje original, salvo las que se han embalado de
montaje o para llevar a cabo las medidas segn punto
nuevo segn el punto 1.3 o 3.8.
3.8 y 4.5, las unidades de embalaje debern permanecer
3.2 El almacenamiento debe realizarse en posicin vertical cerradas durante al menos 24 horas en el lugar de
sobre una superficie plana. Para ello, las cajas van desembalaje.
provistas del smbolo correspondiente.
3.3 En el almacenamiento debe tenerse en cuenta la presin
mxima admisible de estibamiento:
para cartones: 0,2 t/m2
para cajas de madera: 2 t/m2
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 9

Schenck Process
4. Disposiciones especiales para el correspondientes ofertas, confirmaciones de pedido u en

almacenamiento y la manipulacin otros escritos.
4.1 Los componentes, grupos constructivos e instalaciones 5.2 Si el cliente adquiere nuevos conocimientos generales en
elctricos/electrnicos deben almacenarse en espacios materia de almacenamiento, que correspondan al estado
aclimatados. de la tcnica, o si estos conocimientos son de dominio
4.2 Los soportes de datos (disquetes, CD, disco duro, cintas, pblico, deber tenerlos en cuenta y, en su caso, cumplir
...) siempre deben guardarse en su embalaje protector los requisitos que sean ms rigurosos.
(embalaje original) tras ser retirados de la unidad 5.3 Si el cliente no puede demostrar la observacin de estas
correspondiente. Los soportes de datos no pueden directrices para el almacenamiento, perder el derecho
doblarse, plegarse o someterse a cargas. Los disquetes contractual de garanta por aquellos daos que de forma
deben estar dispuestos en vertical dentro una caja. Los demostrable o con gran probabilidad se deriven de la no
soportes de datos deben estar protegidos contra campos observacin.
magnticos (p. ej. transformador de alimentacin) y 5.4 El alcance de la responsabilidad de Schenck por daos
material ferromagntico. Campos magnticos fuertes ocasionados se basa generalmente en las regulaciones
pueden borrar los datos del soporte. El calor y los rayos contractuales. Schenck no responder de los daos que
solares tambin pueden daar los soportes de datos. no se hayan producido en la propia mercanca
4.3 Piezas/elementos constructivos mecnicos. Los embalaje suministrada.
que contienen tales piezas deben almacenarse siempre Esta limitacin de la responsabilidad no es aplicable en
en espacios cerrados. caso de dolo o culpa grave. En caso de dolo o culpa
4.3.1 Cintas de goma para transporte y otras piezas de goma. grave por parte de empleados no directivos de Schenck,
Tras concluir el plazo segn punto 3.7 debern realizarse Schenck slo asumir la responsabilidad si estos
las siguientes medidas de conservacin: empleados vulneran alguna obligacin contractual
fundamental. La responsabilidad limitada tampoco es
Destensar cintas de transporte aplicable cuando segn la Ley de Responsabilidad de
Aplicar glicerina en las cintas de transporte Producto debe responderse por daos personales o
almacenamiento posterior en lugar fresco, seco y materiales en objetos de uso particular motivados por
protegido contra la luz defectos en el objeto de suministro. La limitacin
Proteccin de las piezas de goma contra la accin de tampoco ser vlida en caso de faltar alguna propiedad
ozono expresamente asegurada, si dicho aseguramiento serva
precisamente para proteger al cliente contra los daos
4.3.2 Rodillos portadores
que no se produzcan en el propio objeto de suministro.
Una vez transcurrido el plazo segn punto 3.7 debern
La indemnizacin por perjuicios financieros, como la
girarse manualmente estos rodillos, para as evitar una
suspensin o disminucin de la produccin o la prdida
separacin del lubricante y la consiguiente resinificacin.
de beneficios, est limitada por los principios generales
La pintura protectora de los rodillos portadores,
de la buena fe, como por ejemplo en el caso de la
especialmente de las camisas sobregiradas de los
relacin desproporcionado entre el precio de suministro y
rodillos, debe controlarse y, en su caso, retocarse.
el alcance del dao.
4.3.3 Piezas desnudas
La pintura protectora de las piezas desnudas debe 6 Derecho aplicable, Jurisdiccin competente
controlarse al transcurrir el plazo conforme al punto 3.7,
y Otros
realizando los retoques oportunos o aplicando una nueva 6.1 Para las relaciones legales entre las partes contractuales
capa, p. ej., con Tectyl 506. rige exclusivamente el derecho material vigente en la
4.3.4 Engranaje Repblica Federal de Alemania, quedando excluido el
Los engranajes se suministran habitualmente con un convenio de Naciones Unidas sobre contratos para la
agente conservante. Una vez transcurrido el plazo segn compra internacional de mercancas.
punto 3.7 debe realizarse un lavado del engranaje con un 6.2 El fuero competente para cualquier litigio es el de
agente de conservacin, p. ej., con ENSIS 20 (Shell). Darmstadt. Sin embargo, Schenck se reserva el derecho
4.4 Construcciones de acero* de presentar una demanda en el fuero que le
Ser suficiente almacenarlas en espacios cubiertos, si se corresponda legalmente al cliente.
cumplen las condiciones de la primera frase del punto 6.3 Los datos puestos a disposicin de Schenck son
3.4. Estas unidades de embalaje deben almacenarse en procesados y almacenados mediante sistema
un lugar elevado, para protegerlas contra la humedad del informtico. Los datos relativos a personas estn
suelo. protegidos contra el abuso conforme a la Ley Federal de
4.5 Material peligroso Proteccin de Datos.
Debe almacenarse siempre separado de los otros
materiales, teniendo en cuenta las disposiciones legales.
4.6 Excitadores de vibraciones
Contienen por dentro agente conservante; se
embalan en cajas. El anticorrosivo debe recambiarse
si el almacenamiento es largo. Por favor, tener en
cuenta la documentacin tcnica.
4.7 Muelles de compresin
Deben ser destensados. Para ello, debe procederse de la
siguiente forma: medir arriba y abajo las distancias entre
las bases de los muelles. Por cada punto de muelle se
cortarn dos hierros U cuya longitud es 30 mm mayor
que la distancia medida. Bajar la mquina sobre los
hierros U, destensando as los muelles.
5. Validez y Efectividad
5.1 Estas directrices para el almacenamiento son aplicables
para todos los suministros de Schenck conforme al punto
1 de estas directrices. Tambin sern vlidas para cada
caso concreto las hojas de datos, las informaciones
tcnicas y las dems indicaciones contenidas en las
10 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
PT Diretrizes para Armazenamento e Manuseio 3.5 Certifique-se de que haja proteo suficiente contra
de Componentes e Mquinas Fornecidos infestao de vermes, verificando devidamente as
condies locais.
Os equipamentos fornecidos pela Schenck, por questo de 3.6 Proteja o equipamento contra radiao ionizante (raio X,
princpio, so entregues para instalao ou montagem atividade de rdio, etc.), bem como de radiao de
imediatas. Entretanto, se entre a ocasio da entrega para o microondas e campos magnticos. Aplicam-se os
local e a ocasio da instalao e/ou montagem for mesmos valores-limite vlidos para proteo de pessoas.
necessrio o armazenamento, o cliente dever notificar a 3.7 A vida de armazenamento mxima para o equipamento
Schenck a respeito e, salvo determinao contrria da na embalagem original de seis meses a partir da
Schenck, o cliente dever seguir as instrues a seguir. entrega da fbrica da Schenck. O tempo de
A possibilidade de armazenamento no local depende do tipo armazenamento no estende o perodo de garantia
de embalagem selecionada. Se o armazenamento no local cedida pela Schenck.
no for possvel, a Schenck ir notificar o cliente a respeito. 3.8 Verifique se a pintura est danificada em intervalos
1. Inspeo de Entrada dos Produtos regulares, pelo menos uma vez por ms. A verificao
1.1 Verifique as embalagens, assim que forem recebidas, aps seis meses da data de armazenamento, a partir da
quanto ao nmero de volumes e a danos aparentes. data de entrega pela fbrica, consistir na abertura da
embalagem externa, verificao da embalagem interna
1.2 Se a embalagem estiver danificada, preencha uma (vedao da embalagem ao ar) e funcionalidade dos
reclamao junto transportadora, entre em contato com agentes dissecantes; possivelmente, pode-se tomar as
o agente de avaliao de danos adequado e notifique a medidas de conservao (veja o item 4.5). Depois desta
Schenck imediatamente, descrevendo os danos de modo verificao e aps tomar as medidas necessrias, o que
completo. No tome nenhuma outra medida por inclui a restaurao da vedao da embalagem ao ar,
enquanto (salvo em caso de perigo iminente) at que o feche novamente a embalagem externa de modo a
assunto seja discutido e concordado com a Schenck. A restaurar o estado original da mesma.
responsabilidade da Schenck, em um caso como esses, Se forem detectados danos embalagem ou ao
depende de condies contratuais. equipamento, entre em contato com o agente de
1.3 Se a embalagem tiver sido aberta por autoridades da avaliao de danos adequado para a avaliao dos
alfndega, feche o pacote imediatamente ou embale o danos reais. Disponibilize ao agente todas as partes do
equipamento novamente, de acordo com as normas da material de embalagem e todos os produtos necessrios,
Schenck. A Schenck ir fornecer detalhes relevantes bem como os documentos, especialmente os
mediante solicitao. Preste ateno, em particular, documentos de transporte, e fornea todos os dados
funcionalidade de todos os meios de proteo contra necessrios para a avaliao.
corroso (integridade da embalagem interna, A Schenck assumir a responsabilidade apenas pelos
especialmente a vedao ao ar; presena de camada de danos, segundo a avaliao, comprovada e
tinta de preveno de ferrugem e efeitos de agentes incontestavelmente devidos a embalagem indevida ou
dissecantes, etc.). que tenham ocorrido no transporte at o ponto
2. Operaes de Transporte, Armazenamento e contratado e/ou antes da data de transferncia de risco
Recuperao ou perda.
2.1 Para transporte, armazenamento e recuperao internos A Schenck no assumir a responsabilidade por danos
planta, use os dispositivos auxiliares para transporte ocorridos durante ou na ocasio das atividades de
fornecidos para esse fim (por exemplo, olhais) e siga as inspeo descritas, nem pelos danos causados por
instrues da Schenck apropriadas. quaisquer medidas tomadas pelo cliente.
Os intervalos de inspeo podem precisar ser reduzidos,
2.2 Tome medidas preventivas para garantir que dependendo das condies locais. Por outro lado, depois
equipamentos sensveis a choques e vibraes sejam de realizar a inspeo descrita e tomar as medidas
manuseados com cuidado (especialmente, instrumentos necessrias (substituio da embalagem interna e de
de medio e equipamentos de pesagem). Choques e agentes dissecantes, entre outros, e medidas de
vibraes no manuseio e no armazenamento devem ser conservao), contado outro perodo de seis meses de
evitados em todos os sentidos. Devem ser observados armazenamento; portanto, permitido um
os smbolos impressos nas embalagens. armazenamento total de 12 meses a partir da data da
2.3 Cabos de interconexo no so alas! Se forem entrega da fbrica.
utilizados como tal, os danos sero inevitveis. Os cabos 3.9 Aps o perodo de armazenamento mximo permitido
fornecidos pela Schenck so fabricados e testados de (3.7 e 3.8), podem ser necessrias medidas de
modo adequado. A Schenck no assume nenhuma conservao adicionais. Se for o caso, as medidas a
responsabilidade por danos ou perdas causadas pelo serem tomadas devem ser discutidas com a Schenck.
manuseio inadequado. Sem essa concordncia, quaisquer garantias contratuais
3. Armazenamento so anuladas, caso ainda estejam em vigor.
3.1 Armazene todos os produtos nas embalagens originais, 3.10 Antes de retirar a embalagem do equipamento para
exceto aqueles que tiverem sido embalados novamente, instalao ou montagem, ou para tomar as medidas
de acordo com os itens 1.3 ou 3.8. descritas nos itens 3.8 e 4.5, guarde os pacotes fechados
3.2 Armazene sobre uma superfcie plana e na posio pelo menos por 24 horas na sala em que a abertura de
vertical. Os engradados so marcados de modo embalagens dever ocorrer.
adequado para isso.
3.3 A presso permitida para empilhamento :
Caixas de papelo: 0.2 t/m
Engradados de madeira: 2.0 t/m
3.4 Armazene os equipamentos de modo a estarem
protegidos da chuva, orvalho, condensao, bem como
outros tipos de umidade e atmosfera corrosiva. A
temperatura de armazenamento permitida de 5 a
+45 C. Evite mudanas bruscas. A umidade relativa
mxima permitida de 70% em todas as temperaturas.
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 11

Schenck Process
4. Instrues Especiais para Armazenamento e 5.2 No caso de o cliente receber novas informaes sobre o
Manuseio estado-da-arte de armazenamento, ou se tais
4.1 Componentes Eltricos/Eletrnicos, Conjuntos, informaes novas se tornarem amplamente divulgadas,
Equipamentos: armazenar em local com ar condicionado, o cliente tem a obrigao de agir de acordo com elas ou,
4.2 Mdias (Disquetes, discos rgidos, fitas magnticas): se aplicvel, atender aos requisitos que forem mais
Coloque todas as mdias na embalagem de proteo rigorosos.
(embalagemoriginal) assim que removidas de suas 5.3 Se ocorrer algum dano e o cliente no puder provar que
respectivas unidades. No esmague, dobre, nem coloque essas instrues foram seguidas, o cliente perder o
sob pesos. Mantenha os disquetes na vertical, na caixa direito contratual de exigir uma compensao por
de proteo. Proteja as mdias de campos magnticos quaisquer danos ou perdas comprovada ou
(por exemplo, transformador de linha) e materiais aparentemente devidos ao fato de no ter seguido estas
ferromagnticos. Campos magnticos fortes podem instrues.
destruir os dados armazenados nas mdias; o calor e a 5.4 A extenso da responsabilidade da Schenck por
radiao solar iro danificar as prprias mdias. quaisquer danos ou perdas ser determinada
4.3 Peas/Componentes Mecnicos exclusivamente pelas provises contratuais. Sob
Mantenha os pacotes que contm tais itens em recinto nenhuma circunstncia a Schenck assumir a
fechado. responsabilidade por danos ou perdas que no tenham
4.3.1 Esteiras de Borracha de Transportadores e Outros ocorrido ao prprio equipamento entregue.
Itens de Borracha A limitao de responsabilidade no se aplicar em
Aps o perodo de tempo indicado no item 3.7 expirar, casos de negligncia intencional ou grosseira.
so necessrias as seguintes medidas de conservao: Entretanto, quando estiver envolvida a negligncia
intencional ou grosseira por parte de pessoal
Alivie a tenso das esteiras de borracha. no-executivo da Schenck, a Schenck assumir a
Trate as esteiras com glicerol. responsabilidade apenas se o funcionrio em questo
Armazene em local refrigerado e seco, protegido da tiver violado uma obrigao essencial do contrato. Alm
disso, a limitao mencionada no se aplicar aos casos
luz.
em que um defeito nos itens entregues causar ferimentos
Proteja os itens de borracha dos efeitos do oznio. ou danos a propriedade privada e em que a
4.3.2 Polias de Transportadores responsabilidade por tais ferimentos ou danos seja
Aps o perodo de tempo indicado no item 3.7 expirar, incorrida em virtude do Ato de Responsabilidade pelo
gire as polias manualmente, para anular a segregao Produto. Nenhum dos casos se aplicar quando houver
dos lubrificantes e, portanto, a formao de resina. deficincia nas caracteristicas ou propriedades
Verifique o revestimento de proteo das polias, garantidas, cujo propsito o de poupar o cliente de
especialmente nos cubos dos eixos. Retoque, se perdas ou danos que no tenham ocorrido ao produto em
necessrio. si. Para as perdas puramente econmicas, por exemplo,
4.3.3 Peas Polidas perda de produo, diminuio do volume de sada ou
Aps o perodo de tempo indicado no item 3.7 expirar, perda de lucros, o nvel de compensao ser limitado
verifique o revestimento de proteo de todas as peas pelo princpio de boa f, por exemplo quanto o valor da
polidas. Retoque, se necessrio, ou renove utilizando, parda for desproporcional ao preo de entrega.
por exemplo, Tectyl 506. 6. Leis Aplicveis; Local de Jurisdio;
4.3.4 Caixas de Transmisso Diversos
Normalmente so fornecidas conservadas. Aps o 6.1 Com respeito relao entre a Schenck e o cliente
perodo de tempo indicado no item 3.7 expirar, faa a constituda pelo contrato, aplicam-se exclusivamente as
drenagem com um agente conservante; por exemplo, leis, ordens e regulamentaes vigentes na Repblica
ENSIS 20 (Shell). Federativa da Alemanha, com exceo da Conveno
4.4 Estruturas de Ao das Naes Unidas sobre Contratos para Venda
Estruturas de ao podem ser armazenadas em uma rea Internacional de Produtos.
que seja somente coberta, se as condies da primeira 6.2 Para todos os efeitos resultantes de controvrsias sobre
sentena do item 3.4 forem atendidas. Armazene as disposies contratuais, o cliente consente que o foro
suspenso para proteo contra a umidade do solo. para resoluo deles seja o de Darmstadt. Entretanto, a
4.5 Produtos Perigosos Schenck reserva o direito de executar a ao em
Mantenha produtos perigosos afastados de outros qualquer outro foro na jurisdio do cliente.
produtos. Armazene de acordo com as regulamentaes 6.3 Os dados fornecidos Schenck sero processados e
locais. armazenados em sistemas computadorizados. As
4.6 Excitadores de Vibrao informaes fornecidas relativas a pessoas so
So preservados internamente e embalados em protegidas contra uso indevido, de acordo com a
engradados. Em caso de armazenamento por tempo legislao de privacidade de dados da Alemanha.
prolongado, a proteo contra corroso deve ser
renovada. Siga as instrues na documentao tcnica.
4.7 Molas de Compresso
Devem estar sem tenso. Para fazer isto, siga estes
passos: Mea as distncias entre os suportes superior e
inferior da mola. Corte dois canais de ao para cada
posio da mola 30 mm maiores que a distncia medida.
Abaixe a mquina sobre os canais, liberando assim a
tenso da mola.
5. Validade e Eficcia
5.1 As instrues de armazenamento acima se aplicam, de
modo geral, a todas as entregas da Schenck, de acordo
com o primeiro pargrafo destas instrues. Alm disso,
as folhas de dados e/ou informaes tcnicas,
instrues, etc. fornecidas aqui ou nas propostas de
vendas, confirmaes de pedidos ou outros documentos,
so vlidas.
12 BVR 2000 AA/0408

NL Richtlijnen voor de opslag en behandeling De maximum toegelaten luchtvochtigheid bedraagt 70 %

van geleverde componenten en installaties bij elke temperatuur.
3.5 De klant zorgt voor een voldoende bescherming tegen
De door Schenck geleverde goederen zijn in principe ongedierte. Hierbij moeten de plaatselijk geldende
bestemd voor onmiddellijke montage. Indien de goederen regelingen gerespecteerd worden.
echter nog opgeslagen moeten worden tussen het moment
3.6 De opslag moet z gebeuren, dat de goederen beschut
van de aankomst op de bestemmingsplaats en de montage,
zijn tegen ioniserende stralen (rntgenstralen,
moet de klant Schenck op de hoogte stellen van de geplande radioactiviteit), microgolfstralen en magneetvelden. Hier
opslag en tenzij anders bepaald werd door Schenck, moeten gelden dezelfde grenswaarden als voor de bescherming
onderstaande richtlijnen voor opslag gevolgd worden. De van personen.
mogelijkheid de goederen op te slaan hangt onder meer af
3.7 De maximale opslagduur in de originele verpakking
van de gekozen verpakking. Indien opslag niet mogelijk is, zal
bedraagt 6 maanden (vanaf de levering af fabriek
Schenck de klant hiervan op de hoogte stellen.
Schenck). Door de opslag wordt de contractuele
1. Controle bij ontvangst garantieperiode verleend door Schenck niet verlengd.
1.1 De klant verbindt er zich toe bij ontvangst te controleren 3.8 De verpakking moet regelmatig minstens n keer per
of de levering volledig is en na te kijken of de verpakking maand gecontroleerd worden op beschadigingen. Na
niet beschadigd werd. een opslag van 6 maand moet de buitenverpakking
1.2 In geval van uitwendige schade aan de verpakking moet geopend worden, de binnenverpakking (luchtdichtheid
er onmiddellijk een klacht ingediend worden bij de van de folie) en de werking van de dehydrerende
transporteur, moet de omvang van de schade gemeld middelen gecontroleerd worden en dienen indien nodig
worden aan Schenck en moet er een schade-expert bewaringsmaatregelen genomen te worden (zie ook
aangesteld worden. Verdere maatregelen mogen pas art.4.5). Na deze controle en het nemen van de eventueel
genomen worden na overleg met Schenck (uitgenomen vereiste maatregelen zoals het opnieuw luchtdicht
bij onmiddellijk gevaar). De verantwoordelijkheid van afsluiten van de binnenfolie moet de buitenverpakking
Schenck voor dergelijke schade hangt af van de opnieuw gesloten worden, zoals voordien.
contractvoorwaarden. Indien de klant beschadigingen aan de verpakking of aan
1.3 Indien de verpakking geopend werd door de douane, de de goederen zelf vaststelt, moet er onmiddellijk een
verpakking onmiddellijk weer sluiten of de goederen schade-expert aangesteld worden. Alle delen van de
opnieuw verpakken in overeenstemming met de verpakking en van de goederen, evenals de documenten
standaard normen van Schenck. Details hierover kunnen en in het bijzonder de transportdocumenten, die nodig
aangevraagd worden bij Schenck. Er dient hierbij vooral zijn voor de expertise moeten te zijner beschikking
gelet te worden op de goede staat van de gesteld worden en alle gegevens nuttig voor de
anti-corrosiebescherming (nagaan of de folieverpakking beoordeling dienen hem verstrekt te worden. Schenck
intact en luchtdicht is, de papieren bescherming tegen stelt zich enkel garant voor schade die volgens de
roest, de roestwerende verflaag en de werking van de expertise ontegenzeggelijk te wijten is aan een
dehydrerende middelen controleren). ontoereikende verpakking of die veroorzaakt zou zijn
2. Transport, opslagoperaties tijdens het transport naar de bestemming opgegeven in
de bestelling en/of opgetreden zou zijn vr de
2.1 Bij intern transport en opslagoperaties moet de klant de risico-overdracht. Schenck kan niet aansprakelijk gesteld
voorziene transporthulpmiddelen en de voorschriften van worden voor schade tijdens of tengevolge van de
Schenck in acht nemen en moet hij deze hierboven beschreven controle-operaties en
transporthulpmiddelen (bijv.hijsogen) desgevallend ook maatregelen, uitgevoerd door de klant.
gebruiken.
De iinspectiecyclus verkort al naargelang de
2.2 De klant draagt er zorg voor de schok- en omgevingsvoorwaarden. Na het uitvoeren van
trillingsgevoelige toestellen voorzichtig te behandelen bovengenoemde controles en de eventueel noodzakelijke
(vooral de meettoestellen, de weegtechnische werken (vervanging van dehydrerende middelen, folie,
inrichtingen). Schokken en stoten bij opslag en intern bijv. en het nemen van bewaringsmaatregelen) is een
transport dienen alleszins vermeden te worden. aansluitende opslag van 6 maanden toegelaten, met een
De symbolen aangebracht op de verpakking moeten maximum van 12 maanden, gerekend vanaf de levering
gerespecteerd worden. af fabriek.
2.2 Verbindingskabels zijn geen handgrepen ! Indien deze 3.9 Na afloop van de maximale opslagduur (art.3.7 en 3.8)
wel als dusdanig gebruikt worden is beschadiging dienen er eventueel bijkomende
onvermijdelijk. De verbindingskabels geleverd door conserveringsmaatregelen genomen te worden. In dit
Schenck zijn van degelijke kwaliteit en werden streng geval moeten in overleg met Schenck de nodige
gecontroleerd. Schenck kan dan ook niet maatregelen besproken worden. Zonder overleg met
verantwoordelijk gesteld worden voor schade door een Schenck vervalt de contractuele garantie, voor zover
foutieve behandeling. deze nog geldt.
3. Opslag 3.10 Vr het uitpakken van de goederen voor de montage of
3.1 Alle goederen moeten opgeslagen worden in hun het doorvoeren van de maatregelen volgens 3.8 en 4.5
originele verpakking , met uitzondering van deze die moeten de nog gesloten verpakkingseenheden zich
opnieuw verpakt werden volgens punt 1.3 of 3.8. minstens 24 uur in de ruimte, voorzien voor het uitpakken
bevinden, ter acclimatisering.
3.2 De goederen moeten rechtopstaand op een effen
oppervlak opgeslagen worden. De kisten zijn daartoe
gemerkt met het gebruikelijke symbool.
3.3 Bij de opslag moet er rekening gehouden worden met de
maximum toegelaten stapeldruk :
bij kartons : 0,2 t/m2
bij houten kisten : 2 t/m2
3.4 De opslag moet z gebeuren dat de goederen beschut
zijn tegen regen, dauw, condensatiewater en ander vocht
en een corrosiebevorderende omgeving. De toegelaten
opslagtemperatuur ligt tussen 5 en +45C. Grotere
temperatuurschommelingen moeten vermeden worden.
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 13

Schenck Process
4. Bijzondere voorschriften voor opslag en 5. Geldigheid en effect

behandeling 5.1 Deze richtlijnen voor de opslag gelden voor alle
4.1 Elektrische/elektronische delen, eenheden en installaties leveringen van Schenck, volgens de eerste alinea van
moeten in geclimatiseerde ruimtes opgeslagen worden. deze richtlijnen. Daarnaast gelden voor elk geval
4.2 Gegevensdragers (diskettes, CD, hard discs, afzonderlijk de technische fiches en inlichtingen die deel
magneetbanden, ...) moeten steeds in de voorziene uitmaken van de offertes, de orderbevestigingen of
beschermingsverpakking (originele verpakking) bewaard andere correspondentie.
worden zodra ze verwijderd werden uit de 5.2 Indien de klant kennis krijgt van een nieuwe
aandrijfeenheden of diskettelezer. Gegevensdragers opslagtechniek of indien deze kennis algmeen bekend
mogen niet geknikt, gevouwen of belast worden. wordt, moet de klant hiermee rekening houden en
Diskettes moeten rechtopstaand bewaard worden in eventueel maatregelen nemen om aan strengere
speciale boxen. Gegevensdragers moeten beschermd voorwaarden te voldoen.
zijn tegen magnetische velden (bijv. nettransformatoren) 5.3 Indien de klant niet kan bewijzen dat hij deze instructies
en tegen ferromagnetisch materiaal. Krachtige voor opslag nageleefd heeft, dan verliest hij elke
magneetvelden kunnen gegevens op gegevensdragers aanspraak op garantie voor schade die klaarblijkelijk het
wissen. Warmte en zonnestralen kunnen gevolg is van het niet naleven van deze instructies.
gegevensdragers beschadigen !
5.4 De omvang van de aansprakelijkheid van Schenck voor
4.3 Mechanische stukken en elementen schade is contractueel vastgelegd. Schenck kan in geen
Verpakkingen die zulke stukken bevatten moeten in een geval aansprakelijk gesteld worden voor schade anders
gesloten ruimte opgeslagen worden. dan aan het geleverde materiaal zelf (indirecte schade).
4.3.1 Transportbanden in rubber en andere delen in rubber Deze garantiebeperking geldt niet bij opzet of grove
Bij het verstrijken van de termijn volgens art.3.7 dienen nalatigheid. Ingeval van opzet of grove nalatigheid door
volgende bewaringsmaatregelen genomen te worden : medewerkers van Schenck die niet tot het kader behoren,
ontspannen van de transportbanden neemt Schenck echter enkel de verantwoordelijk-heid op
zich indien er een essentile contractuele verplichting
inwrijven van de transportbanden met glycerine geschonden werd. De aansprakelijkheidsbeperking geldt
de transportbanden aansluitend koel, droog en be- verder niet in gevallen, vastgelegd bij wet, waarbij een
schut tegen lichtinval opslaan leveringsfout aan de basis ligt van lichamelijke schade of
de rubberen delen beschermen tegen ozoninvloeden. van schade aan een voorwerp voor priv-gebruik. Zij
4.3.2 Draagrollen geldt ook niet bij het ontbreken van eigenschappen die
uitdrukkelijk gegarandeerd werden, wanneer deze
Na het verstrijken van de termijn volgens 3.7 moeten ze
garantie tot doel had de klant te beschermen tegen
met de hand doorgedraaid worden om het breken en het
schade die niet aan de geleverde goederen zelf
verharden van het smeermiddel tegen te gaan. De
berokkend werd. De schadeloosstelling van zuiver
beschermingslaag op de draagrollen en vooral op de
economische schade, zoals productiestilstand,
afgedraaide draagrolmantel moet gecontroleerd worden
productievermindering of winstderving wordt begrensd
en eventueel bijgewerkt worden.
volgens de algemeen geldende principes van wederzijds
4.3.3 Blanke delen vertrouwen, bijvoorbeeld wanneer het bedrag van de
De beschermlaag op blanke delen moet na het verstrijken schade onevenredig hoog is in verhouding tot de prijs van
van de termijn volgens art.3.7 gecontroleerd en indien het geleverde goed.
nodig bijgewerkt of opnieuw aangebracht worden, 6. Toepasselijk recht, bevoegde rechtbank;
bijv.Tectyl 506. varia
4.3.4 Reductoren 6.1 De rechtsrelaties tussen Schenck en de klant zijn
Deze worden normaal gezien geleverd met hun onderworpen aan het materile recht dat geldt in de
beschermingsproduct. Na het verstrijken van de termijn Duitse Bondsrepubliek, met uitzondering van de
volgens art.3.7 moet de reductor gespoeld worden met Conventie van de Verenigde Naties over contracten voor
een conserveringsmiddel, bijv. ENSIS 20 (Shell). de internationale verkoop van goederen.
4.4 Staalconstructies 6.2 Enkel de rechtbank van Darmstadt is bevoegd voor
mogen opgeslagen worden in overdekte ruimtes, voor geschillen. Schenk behoudt zich echter het recht voor
zover voldaan is aan de voorwaarden in de eerste regel een geding in te spannen in om het even welke andere
van art.3.4. Deze verpakkingseenheden moeten rechtbank waar rechtspraak over de klant mogelijk is.
opgeslagen worden op een verhoog ter bescherming 6.3 De gegevens die verstrekt werden aan Schenck worden
tegen bodemvochtigheid. verwerkt en opgeslagen met de computer. Persoonlijke
4.5 Gevaarlijke stoffen gegevens worden beschermd volgens de Duitse
moeten gescheiden van andere stoffen opgeslagen wetgeving ter bescherming van de privacy.
worden volgens de geldende reglementeringen.
4.6 Trillingsopwekkers
moeten binnen, verpakt in kisten opgeslagen worden. Bij
langdurige opslag moet de bescherming tegen corrosie
vernieuwd worden. De instructies in de technische
documentatie naleven !
4.7 Drukveren
ontspannen. Hierbij als volgt te werk gaan : de afstanden
tussen de veersteunen onderaan en bovenaan meten.
Vervolgens per veerplaats twee U-ijzers snijden die 30
mm langer zijn dan de gemeten afstand. De machine
neerlaten op de U-ijzers en zo de veren ontlasten.
14 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
SE Bestmmelser om frvaring och hantering 3.7 Maximal frvaringsperiod i originalfrpackningen r 6

av de levererade delarna och maskinerna mnader (frn det att varorna. levererats frn fabriken
Schenck). Frvaringen frlnger ej den avtalsenliga
Varor levererade av Schenck r avsedda fr omedelbar garantiperioden frn Schenck.
montering. Skulle det mellan ankomst till monteringsplatsen 3.8 Frpackningen skall kontrolleras regelbundet, minst varje
och monteringen i alla fall vara ndvndigt med mnad, avseende skador. Kontrollen efter 6 mnaders
mellanfrvaring, r bestllaren skyldig att meddela den frvaring sedan leverering frn fabriken omfattar
planerade frvaringen och om inte annat avtalats med ppnande av ytterfrpackningen, kontrollen av
Schenck flja dessa bestmmelser om frvaring. Drmed innerfrpackningen (foliens lufttthet) samt
rttar sig mjligheten fr frvaring bland annat efter valt funktionsfrmgan hos det fuktabsorberande medlet och
emballage. Om frvaring inte r mjligt meddelar Schenck eventuella ndvndiga konserveringstgrder (se ven
detta till bestllaren. art. 4.5). Efter denna kontroll och de eventuellt
1. Mottagningskontroll ndvndiga tgrderna samt efter att innerfolien tillslutits
luftttt, mste ytterfrpackningen stngas igen p
1.1 Bestllaren r skyldig att underska att erhllna kollin r
ursprungligt stt.
kompletta och inte har yttre synliga skador.
Om bestllaren upptcker skador p frpackningen eller
1.2 Om emballaget har yttre skador r bestllaren skyldig att
p sjlva varorna, skall bestllaren omedelbart kontakta
omedelbart reklamera detta till speditren och omgende
skaderegleraren med avseende p att denne skall avge
meddela Schenck om de skador som upptckts samt
ett utltande. Skaderegleraren skall ha frfogande ver
indraga ansvarig skadereglerare. vriga tgrder fr
alla de delar och varor som krvs fr utltandet, samt
bestllaren (frutom vid fara frde) endast inleda efter
dokumenten, i synnerhet transportdokument, samt alla
samrd med och i verensstmmelse med Schenck.
ndvndiga uppgifter fr utltandet. Schenck ptar sig
Ansvaret frn Schencks sida fr sdana skador rttar sig
endast ansvaret fr de skador som enligt utltandet frn
efter de avtalsenliga bestmmelserna.
skaderegleraren bevisligen och obestridligt har uppsttt
1.3 Om emballaget ppnats i tullen, r bestllaren skyldig att p grund av felaktig frpackning eller under transporten
omedelbart packa in eller tillsluta p nytt enligt Schenck fram till avtalad ort och/eller tiden dr ansvaret vergr till
standard. Detaljer angende detta fr bestllaren av kunden. Schenck ansvarar inte fr skador som uppstr
Schenck vid kontakt. Uppmrksamheten skall i synnerhet under eller med anledning av den beskrivna kontrollen
riktas p hur korrosionsskyddsmedlet fungerar (om och tgrder frn bestllarens sida.
foliefrpackningen r oskadad, i synnerhet lufttt
Inspektionscykeln frkortas allt efter de lokala
tillslutning av folien, rostskyddspapper skall finnas och
frhllandena. Efter utfrd kontroll och eventuellt
vara korrekt psatt, rostskyddsmlning, fuktabsorberande
ndvndiga tgrder avslutats (byte av fuktabsorberande
medel).
medel, folie etc. och konserveringstgrder) tillts en
2. Transport, frvaring och uppstllning efterfljande extra frvaring p 6 mnader i upp till max
2.1 Vid intern transport, frvaring och uppstllning r 12 mnader, rknat frn levereringen frn fabriken.
bestllaren skyldig att iaktta de freskrivna 3.9 Nr den maximala frvaringsperioden utlpt (artikel 3.7
transporthjlpmedlen och freskrifterna om detta frn och 3.8) kan frn fall till fall ytterligare
Schenck och dr som det anses lmpligt, anvnda dessa konserveringstgrder bli ndvndiga. I sdana fall skall
transporthjlpmedel (krokar etc.). bestllaren komma verens med Schenck om de
2.2 Bestllaren skall se till att stt- och vibrationsknsliga ndvndiga tgrderna. Utan en sdan
aggregat och anlggningar behandlas frsiktigt (i verenskommelse bortfaller den avtalsenliga garantin,
synnerhet mtapparater, vgningstekniska anordningar). om denna fortfarande gller.
Skakningar och sttar skall ovillkorligen undvikas vid 3.10 Innan varorna packas upp fr montering eller fr att utfra
frvaring och intern transport. tgrderna enligt avs. 3.8 och 4.5, mste de fortfarande
Symbolerna p frpackningen mste iakttas. stngda kollina vara i det fr uppackningen avsedda
2.3 Frbindelsekablar r inga handtag! Om de anvnds som rummet i minst 24 timmar fr aklimatisering.
handtag r skador oundvikligt. Frbindelsekablar 4. Srskilda freskrifter fr frvaring och
levererade frn Schenck har tillverkats felfritt och har hantering
kontrollerats. Schenck ptar sig inget ansvar fr skador 4.1 Elektriska/elektroniska delar, komponenter och
p grund av felaktig hantering. anlggningar mste frvaras i ventilerade rum.
3. Frvaring 4.2 Datamedier (disketter, CD, hrddisk, band,..) mste alltid
3.1 Alla varor skall frvaras i originalfrpackningen, utom de stoppas i de avsedda skyddsfrpackningarna
enligt 1.3 eller 3.8 p nytt inpackade. (originalfrpackning), s snart de tas ut ur drivenheten.
Datamedier fr inte knckas, vikas eller belastas.
3.2 Varorna skall frvaras upprttstende och p jmnt
Disketter br frvaras stende i en frvaringsbox.
underlag. Ldor r mrkta med den vanliga symbolen fr
Datamedier mste skyddas mot magnetflt (t ex
detta.
nttransformator) och mot ferromagnetiska material.
3.3 Vid frvaringen fr maximalt tilltet staplingstryck ej Kraftiga magnetflt kan radera data p datamedierna.
verskridas Vrme och solstrlning skadar datamedier!
vid kartonger: 0,2 t/m2 4.3 Mekaniska delar/komponenter Frpackningar, som
vid trldor: 2 t/m2 innehller sdana delar mste ovillkorligen frvaras
3.4 Varorna skall frvaras s att de r skyddade mot regn, inomhus.
dagg, lckvatten, andra typer av fukt och atmosfr som 4.3.1 Gummitransportband och andra gummidelar
gynnar korrosion. En frvaringstemperatur p mellan -5 Nr fristen utlpt enligt artikel 3.7 r fljande
och +45C r drmed tillten. Undvik strre konserveringstgrder ndvndiga:
temperatursvngningar. Maximalt tillten relativ Lossa transportbanden
luftfuktighet r 70% vid alla temperaturer.
Behandla transportbanden med glycerin
3.5 Bestllaren skall se till att varorna r tillrckligt skyddade
mot skadeinsektsangrepp. Det skall fstas avseende vid Efterfljande frvaring skall gras svalt, torrt och
skyddas mot ljus.
de lokala frhllandena.
3.6 Varorna skall frvaras s de r skyddade mot joniserande Skydda gummidelarna mot ozonpverkan
strlar (rntgenstrlar, radioaktivitet) samt 4.3.2 Brrullar
mikrovgsstrlning och magnetflt. Samma grnsvrden Nr fristen utlpt enligt art. 3.7 skall dessa vridas runt fr
som vid personskyddet gller. hand, fr att motverka att smrjmedlet avskiljs och
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 15

Schenck Process
drmed motverkas frhartsning. Skyddspstrykningen av 6. Tillmplig rtt, domstol och vrigt

brrullarna, i synnerhet de svarvade hljena p 6.1 Fr rttsfrhllandet mellan kontraktsparterna gller
brrullarna, skall kontrolleras och eventuellt frbttras. uteslutande den i Tyskland gllande materiella rtten
4.3.3 Blanka delar exklusive FN:s verenskommelse om avtal om
Skyddspstrykningen av blanda delar skall nr fristen internationell varuhandel .
utlpt enligt art. 3.7 kontrolleras och eventuellt frbttras 6.2 Domstol fr alla tvister r Darmstadt. Schenck frbehller
resp. nytt skydd skall strykas p t ex Tectyl 506. sig dock rtten att ven kunna vcka talan p en ort, som
4.3.4 Utvxling r laga domstol fr bestllaren.
levereras vanligtvis med en konservering. Nr fristen 6.3 Data som stllts till frfogande fr Schenck bearbetas och
utlpt enligt art. 3.7 skall utvxlingen spolas med ett sparas med hjlp av ADB. Personrelaterade data
konserveringsmedel t ex ENSIS 20 (Shell). skyddas mot missbruk enligt den gllande
4.4 Stlkonstruktioner dataskyddslagen.
kan drefter frvaras i uteslutande takvertckta
utrymmen, nr villkoren i 1. satsen i artikeln 3.4 uppfylls.
Dessa kollin mste frvaras hgt fr att skyddas mot
golvfukt.
4.5 Farligt gods
skall alltid frvaras tskilt frn vrigt gods enligt de
avtalsenliga freskrifterna.
4.6 Vibrationsalstrare
r konserverade inuti och frpackade i ldor.
Korrosionsskyddet mste frnyas vid lngre frvaring.
Flj den tekniska dokumentationen.
4.7 Tryckfjdrar
lossa. Detta grs p fljande stt: Mt avstnden mellan
fjderfstena upptill och nedtill. P varje fjderstlle skall
tv U-jrn kapas 30mm lngre n det uppmtta
avstndet. Stt ner maskinen p U-jrnen och avlasta p
s vis fjdrarna.
5. Giltighet och verkan
5.1 Dessa bestmmelser om frvaring gller fr alla
leveranser frn Schenck, enligt det 1. stycket i dessa
bestmmelser. Drutver gller de datablad, den
tekniska informationen och vriga anvisningar som getts i
de respektive offerterna, orderbekrftelserna eller vrig
skriftlig kommunikation fr varje enstaka fall.
5.2 Om bestllaren fr ny allmn information som motsvarar
de senaste tekniska rnen rrande frvaringen eller om
sdana nya uppfattningar blir allmnt knda, s skall
bestllaren iaktta dessa resp. uppfylla de respektive
strngare kraven.
5.3 Om bestllaren inte kan bevisa att han har fljt dessa
bestmmelser fr frvaringen, bortfaller bestllarens
avtalsenliga krav p garanti fr skador, som bevisligen
eller med vervgande sannolikhet kan fras tillbaka till
underltenheten att flja anvisningarna.
5.4 Ansvarets omfattning frn Schencks sida fr skador rttar
sig efter de avtalsenliga reglerna, dr det framgr att
Schenck inte ptar sig ansvaret fr skador, som inte har
uppsttt p sjlva den levererade varan.
Denna ansvarsbegrnsning gller inte vid uppst eller
grov vrdslshet. Fr uppst eller grov vrdslshet frn ej
ledande medarbetare hos Schenck ansvarar Schenck
dock endast om medarbetarna bryter mot en vsentlig
avtalsplikt. Ansvarsbegrnsningen gller inte i de fallen,
dr leverantren enligt produktansvarslagen r skyldig att
betala skadestnd fr felaktiga produkter som orsakar
skada p mnniskor eller egendom. Den gller inte heller
vid fel p egenskaper, som uttryckligen r frskrade, om
denna frskran just har syftat att garantera bestllaren
mot skador som inte uppsttt p sjlva den levererade
varan. Ersttning fr rena
frmgenhetsskador, dvs. fr t ex produktionsstopp,
produktionsminskning eller frlorad frtjnst, begrnsas
genom de allmnna principerna om tro och heder,
eventuellt i de fall dr det r oproportionerlighet mellan
storleken p leveranspriset och skadans storlek.
16 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
PL Wytyczne dla skadowania oraz 3.4 Magazynowanie musi si odbywa tak, by wyroby byy
postpowania z dostarczonymi czciami oraz zabezpieczone przed deszczem, ros, innymi rodzajami
urzdzeniami wilgoci i przed atmosfer sprzyjajc korozji. Przy tym
dopuszczalna jest temperatura magazynowania -5 do
Zasadniczo wyroby dostarczane przez Schencka +45C. Naley unika wikszych waha temperatury.
przeznaczone s do natychmiastowego montau. Jeli Maksymalna dopuszczalna wzgldna wilgotno
jednak od nadejcia dostawy do miejsca przeznaczenia powietrza wynosi 70% przy kadej temperaturze.
konieczne bdzie skadowanie, to nabywca jest zobowizany 3.5 Zamawiajcy dba o to, by zapewni dostateczn ochron
do powiadomienia Schencka o zaplanowanym przed robactwem. Przy tym naley uwzgldni lokalne
magazynowaniu i jeli dla danego przypadku Schenck nie realia.
ustali inaczej, to naley przestrzega tych wytycznych. Przy 3.6 Magazynowanie musi si odbywa tak, by wyroby byy
tym moliwo skadowania zaley midzy innymi od zabezpieczone przed jonizujcym promieniowaniem
wybranego opakowania. Jeli magazynowanie nie jest (promienie rentgena, radioaktywno) oraz przed
moliwe, Schenck zawiadomi o tym zamawiajcego. promieniowaniem mikrofalowym i polami magnetycznymi.
1. Kontrola odbioru dostawy Obowizuj takie same wartoci jak przy ochronie osb.
1.1 Zamawiajcy jest zobowizany do natychmiastowego 3.7 Maksymalny czas magazynowania w oryginalnym
sprawdzenia otrzymanych jednostek opakowaniowych na opakowaniu wynosi 6 miesicy (od ekspedycji z zakadu
kompletno i widoczne uszkodzenia. Schencka). Magazynowanie nie przedua kontraktowego
1.2 Jeli opakowanie wykazuje zewntrzne uszkodzenia, to okresu gwarancji Schencka.
nabywca jest zobowizany do zareklamowania u 3.8 Opakowanie naley regularnie, co najmniej raz w
spedytora i natychmiastowego i obszernego miesicu kontrolowa na uszkodzenia. Kontrola po 6
zawiadomienia Schencka o stwierdzonej szkodzie, oraz miesicach magazynowania od dostawy od zakadu
do wczenia kompetentnego komisarza awaryjnego. obejmuje otwarcie zewntrznego opakowania, kontrol
Dalsze posunicia (oprcz groby zwoki) zamawiajcy opakowania wewntrznego (hermetyczno folii) oraz
moe wprowadzi tylko po porozumieniu si i za zgod skuteczno rodkw osuszajcych i ewentualne
Schencka. Odpowiedzialno Schencka dla takich szkd posunicia konserwacyjne (patrz te art. 4.5). Po tej
zaley od regulacji kontraktowych. kontroli i ewentualnie koniecznych posuniciach oraz
1.3 Jeli opakowanie zostao otwarte w urzdzie celnym, to szczelnym zamkniciu wewntrznej folii opakowanie
zamawiajcy jest zobowizany do dostarczenia nowego zewntrzne musi zosta zamknite jak byo pierwotnie.
opakowania lub ponownego zamknicia opakowania Jeli zamawiajcy stwierdzi uszkodzenia na opakowaniu
wedug standardw Schencka. Odpowiednie szczegy lub na samym wyrobie, to natychmiast musi zleci
Schenck przekazuje zamawiajcemu na zamwienie. komisarzowi awaryjnemu ocen szkody. Naley mu da
Przy tym szczegln uwag naley zwrci na do dyspozycji wszystkie potrzebne do ekspertyzy czci
sprawno zastosowanych rodkw antykorozyjnych opakowania i towaru, oraz dokumenty, szczeglnie
(nienaruszone opakowanie z folii, szczeglnie dokumenty transportowe, oraz przekaza wszystkie dane
hermetyczno zamknicia, obecno i prawidowe niezbdne do oceny. Schenck odpowiada tylko za
uoenia papieru antykorozyjnego, powoki szkody, ktre wedug ekspertyzy komisarza awaryjnego
antykorozyjnej, rodkw pochaniajcych wilgo). w dowiedziony i bezsporny sposb powstay wskutek
wadliwego opakowania lub w czasie transportu do
kontraktowo uzgodnionego miejsca i/lub terminu przejcia
2. Transport, magazynowanie i odbir z ryzyka. Schenck nie odpowiada za szkody, ktre
magazynu
powstae podczas lub z powodu kontroli i posuni
2.1 Przy transporcie wewntrzzakadowym i dostarczaniu i zamawiajcego.
odbieraniu z magazynu zamawiajcy jest zobowizany Cykl inspekcji skraca si w zalenoci od lokalnych
do przestrzegania przewidzianych pomocniczych warunkw. Po kontroli i zakoczeniu ewentualnych
rodkw transportowych i odpowiednich przepisw posuni (wymiana lub zastpienie rodkw
Schencka i, gdzie mona, stosowa te rodki (ucha pochaniajcych wilgo, folii itd. i przeprowadzeniu
transportowe itd.). zabiegw konserwacyjnych) dopuszcza si potem dalsze
2.2 Zamawiajcy odpowiada za to, by urzdzenia i maszyny magazynowanie 6 miesicy do maksymalnie 12 miesicy,
czue na uderzenia i wibracje byy odpowiednio traktowane liczc od daty dostawy od zakadu.
(szczeglnie przyrzdy pomiarowe, urzdzenia wagowe). 3.9 Po upywie maksymalnego czasu magazynowania
Bezwzgldnie naley unika wstrzsw i udarw przy (artyku 3,7 i 3.8) dla danego przypadku mog by
skadowaniu i transporcie wewntrzzakadowym. potrzebne dalsze posunicia konserwacyjne. W takich
Naley przestrzega symboli umieszczonych na wypadkach zamawiajcy musi je uzgodni z Schenckiem.
opakowaniu. Bez takiego uzgodnienia traci wano kontraktowa
2.3 Kable czce nie s rkojeciami! Przy takim gwarancja, o ile jeszcze trwa.
traktowaniu nie do uniknicia s uszkodzenia. 3.10 Przed rozpakowaniem towaru do montau lub do
Dostarczone przez Schencka kable poczeniowe s przeprowadzenia posuni wedug ust. 3.8 i 4.5,
waciwie wykonane i sprawdzone. Za szkody wynike z zamknite jeszcze jednostki opakowaniowe musz by
niewaciwej manipulacji Schenck nie przyjmuje adnej przetrzymane przez co najmniej 24 godziny w
odpowiedzialnoci. przewidzianym pomieszczeniu do aklimatyzacji.
3. Skadowanie
3.1 Wszystkie wyroby naley przechowywa w oryginalnym 4. Specjalne przepisy magazynowania
opakowaniu, z wyjtkiem tych, ktre wedug 1.3 lub 3.8 i manipulacji
naley przepakowa.
4.1 Elektryczne/elektroniczne czci, podzespoy i
3.2 Przedmioty naley skadowa pionowo na paskim urzdzenia musz by przechowywane w
podou. Skrzynie s zaopatrzone w odpowiedni symbol. klimatyzowanym pomieszczeniu.
4.2 Noniki danych (dyskietki, CD, dyski stae, tamy, ...)
3.3 Przy magazynowaniu pamita o maksymalnym musz by zawsze woone do przewidzianego dla nich
dopuszczalnym nacisku stosu opakowania ochronnego (oryginalnego), gdy tylko
zostan wyjte z napdu. Nonikw danych nie wolno
przy kartonach: 0,2 t/m2 zgina, skada lub obcia. Dyskietki naley
przy skrzyniach drewnianych: 2 t/m2 przechowywa na stojco w skrzynce. Noniki danych
musz by chronione przed polami magnetycznymi (np.
transformator sieciowy) i ferromagnetycznymi
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 17

Schenck Process
materiaami. Silne pola magnetyczne mog zniszczy Schencka odpowiada Schenck tylko wtedy, gdy
dane na nonikach. Upa i promieniowanie soneczne naruszaj istotne obowizki kontraktowe. Ograniczenie
szkodz nonikom danych! odpowiedzialnoci nie dotyczy ponadto przypadkw, w
4.3 Mechaniczne czci/elementy konstrukcyjne ktrych odpowiada si wedug ustawy o
Opakowania, ktre zawieraj takie czci, musz by odpowiedzialnoci za produkty przy bdach w
bezwzgldnie przechowywane w zamknitych przedmiocie dostawy za szkody osobowe lub rzeczowe w
pomieszczeniach. prywatnie uytkowanych przedmiotach. Nie obowizuje
te przy braku waciwoci, ktre wyranie zostay
4.3.1 Gumowe tamy transportowe i inne elementy gumowe
przyrzeczone, gdy przyrzeczenie wanie miao na celu
Po upywie terminu wedug artykuu 3.7 konieczne s zabezpieczenie zamawiajcego przed szkodami, ktre
nastpujce zabiegi konserwacyjne: nie powstay na samym przedmiocie dostawy.
poluzowanie tam transportowych Rekompensata za czyste szkody majtkowe, tzn. np. za
natarcie tam transportowych gliceryn przestoje produkcyjne, zmniejszenie produkcji lub
utracony zysk, ograniczona jest przez oglne zasady
potem magazynowanie w chodnym i suchym, za- zaufania i wiary, w przypadkach nieproporcjonalnoci
bezpieczonym przed wiatem miejscu midzy wysokoci ceny dostawy a wysokoci szkody.
ochrona gumowych czci przed dziaaniem ozonu 6. Stosowane prawo, podsdno i inne
4.3.2 Rolki none
6.1 Do stosunkw prawnych midzy partnerami umowy
Po upywie terminu wedug art. 3.7 obrci je rk, by
odnosi si wycznie obowizujce w Republice
zapobiec odmieszaniu si rodka smarowego, a tym
Federalnej Niemiec prawo materialne z wyczeniem
samym zywiczeniu. Naley kontrolowa i ewentualnie
porozumienia Narodw Zjednoczonych o
naprawi powok ochronn rolek nonych, szczeglnie
midzynarodowym obrocie towarami.
toczonego paszcza rolki.
6.2 Sdem waciwym dla wszystkich sporw jest Darmstadt.
4.3.3 Czci goe
Jednak Schenck zastrzega sobie prawo wnoszenia skargi
Powok ochronn goych czci naley po upywie
rwnie tam, gdzie dla zamawiajcego prawnie
terminu wedug art. 3.7 skontrolowa i ewentualnie
uzasadniony jest sd waciwy.
poprawi lub pooy now np. Tectyl 506.
6.3 Dane bdce w dyspozycji Schencka przetwarzane s i
4.3.4 Przekadnie
przechowywane cyfrowo. Dane dotyczce osb
dostarcza si normalnie zakonserwowane. Po upywie
chronione s przed naduyciem wedug Federalnej
terminu wedug art. 3.7 przepuka rodkiem
Ustawy o Ochronie Danych.
konserwujcym np. ENSIS 20 (Shell).
4.4 Konstrukcje stalowe
mona skadowa w jedynie zadaszonych
pomieszczeniach, jeli zapewnione s warunki 1. zdania
artykuu 3.4. Te jednostki opakowaniowe musz by
skadowane na podwyszeniu dla ochrony przed wilgoci
gruntu.
4.5 Niebezpieczny materia
naley skadowa zasadniczo odrbnie od pozostaych
towarw zgodnie z przepisami prawnymi.
4.6 Wibratory
s wewntrz zakonserwowane i zapakowane w skrzynie.
Przy duszym magazynowaniu naley wymieni ochron
przeciwkorozyjn. Prosimy przestrzega wskazwek
dokumentacji technicznej.
4.7 Spryny naciskowe
odpry. W tym celu wykona: Zmierzy odstpy midzy
podporami spryn u gry i u dou. Na kade miejsce
sprynowania odci ceownik o 30 mm duszy ni
zmierzona odlego. Maszyn opuci na ceowniki, co
odciy spryny.
5. Wano i skuteczno
5.1 Te wytyczne magazynowania dotycz wszystkich dostaw
Schencka, wedug 1. ustpu tych wytycznych. Obok tego
dla danego przypadku wice s zawarte w ofertach,
potwierdzeniach kontraktu lub innej korespondencji
arkusze danych, informacje techniczne i inne wskazwki.
5.2 Jeli zamawiajcy zdobdzie now, odpowiedni dla
poziomu techniki wiedz dotyczc magazynowania,
albo taka wiedza stanie si oglnie znana, to jest on
zobowizany do przestrzegania jej lub do spenienia
odpowiednich ostrzejszych wymaga.
5.3 Jeli zamawiajcy nie moe da dowodu, e przestrzega
tych wytycznych dotyczcych magazynowania, to traci
kontraktowe roszczenia do gwarancji odnonie szkd,
ktre w udokumentowany sposb lub z przewaajcym
prawdopodobiestwem wynikn z nieprzestrzegania.
5.4 Zakres odpowiedzialnoci Schencka za szkody zaley
zasadniczo od regulacji kontraktowych, przy czym
Schenck nie odpowiada za szkody, ktre nie powstay na
samym dostarczonym towarze.
To ograniczenie odpowiedzialnoci nie istnieje przy
umylnoci lub powanym zaniedbaniu. Za umylno
lub powane zaniedbanie niekierowniczych pracownikw
18 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
HU Irnyelvek a leszlltott gpelemek s gpek 3.4 A trols gy trtnjen, hogy az ru estl, prtl,
raktrozshoz s kezelshez kondenzvztl, msfle nedvessgtl s a korrzit
elsegt krnyezettl vdve legyen. A megengedett
A Schenck cg ltalban gy szlltja a helysznre az rukat, raktrozsi hmrsklet-tartomny: -5...+45 C. Kerlni
hogy azok azonnal beszerelsre kerlnek. Ha a rendeltets kell a nagyobb mrtk hmrsklet-ingadozsokat. A
helyre val megrkezs s a szerels kztt mgis maximlisan megengedett pratartalom brmilyen
tmenetileg trolni kell a gpelemeket, akkor a megrendel hmrskleten 70 %.
kteles a Schenck cget tjkoztatni a tervezett raktrozsrl 3.5 Megrendel gondoskodik arrl, hogy a raktrhelyisgben
s amennyiben a Schenck a konkrt esetben ms kielgt legyen a rovarok elleni vdelem. Ezzel
rendelkezseket nem r el kteles a jelen raktrozsi kapcsolatosan a helyi sajtossgokat kell figyelembe
irnyelveket betartani. Ennek sorn a raktrozs lehetsgt venni.
egyebek mellett a vlasztott csomagols dnti el. Ha az ru 3.6 A raktrozs gy trtnjen, hogy az ru vdve legyen
raktrozsa nem lehetsges, akkor a Schenck ezt kzlni ionizl sugaraktl (rntgensugrzs, radioaktv
fogja a megrendelvel. sugarak), valamint mikrohullm sugrzstl s
1. Ellenrzs az ru berkezsekor mgneses erterek hatstl. Ugyanazok a hatrrtkek
1.1 A megrendel kteles a megrkezett csomagolsi rvnyesek, amelyek emberek vdelmre vonatkoznak.
egysgeket haladktalanul megvizsglni hinytalansg 3.7 A maximlis raktrozsi id eredeti csomagolsban 6
s a csomagolson klsleg felismerhet srlsek hnap (a Schenck gyrtmbl trtn kiszlltstl
szempontjbl. szmtva). A raktrozsi id nem hosszabbtja meg a
1.2 Ha a csomagolson klsleg felismerhet srlsek Schenck cg szerzds szerinti garanciavllalsi idejt.
tapasztalhatk, a megrendel kteles ezeket 3.8 A csomagolst rendszeresen, legalbb havonta egyszer
haladktalanul megreklamlni a szlltmnyoznl s a ellenrizni kell esetleges srlsekre. A gyrtmbl
Schenck cget ksedelem nlkl s tfogan tjkoztatni trtn kiszlltst kvet 6 hnap utn a vizsglat
a tapasztalt srlsekrl, illetve kteles bevonni az kiterjed a kls csomagols felbontsra, a bels
illetkes krszakrtt. A megrendel tovbbi csomagols (a flia lgmentes zrsa), valamint a
intzkedseket csak a Schenck cggel egyeztetve s a praelszv szerek hatsfoknak ellenrzsre s az
Schenck egyetrtsvel tehet (kivve azokat az eseteket, esetleg szksges konzervlsi intzkedsekre (lsd a
amikor a ksedelem veszlyes helyzeteket teremthet). 4.5 cikkelyt is). A fenti ellenrzs s az esetleg
Ilyen krok esetben a Schenck rszrl trtn szksges intzkedsek vgrehajtsa, valamint a bels
felelssg-vllalst a szerzds szablyozza. flia lgmentes visszazrsa utn a kls csomagolst
1.3 Ha a csomagolst a vm felbontotta, akkor megrendel eredeti llapotba kell visszalltani.
kteles haladktalanul az ru jracsomagolsrl vagy a FHa a megrendel srlseket tapasztal a csomagolson
csomagols lezrsrl gondoskodni a Schenck hzi vagy magn az run, haladktalanul krszakrtt kell
szabvnynak megfelelen. Az erre vonatkoz megbzni a kr szakvlemnyezsvel. A krszakrt
rszleteket a Schenck krsre kzli a megrendelvel. Itt rendelkezsre kell bocstani a szakvlemny
klnsen az alkalmazott korrzivd szerek elksztshez szksges csomagols- s rurszeket,
funkcijnak megrzsre kell tekintettel lenni (a flis valamint a megfelel okmnyokat, klns tekintettel a
csomagols maradjon srtetlen, klns figyelmet kell szlltsi okmnyokra, illetve kzlni kell a szakvlemny
fordtani a flia lgmentes lezrsra, a korrzivd elksztshez szksges adatokat. A Schenck cg csak
papr megltre s megfelel helyzetre, a korrzivd olyan krokrt vllal felelssget, amelyek a krszakrt
mzolsra, praelszv szerekre). szakvlemnye rtelmben bizonythatan s
2. Szllts, beraktrozs s kivtelezs a raktrbl vitathatatlanul hibs csomagols kvetkeztben vagy a
szerzdsben kijellt helysgig s/vagy a kockzat
2.1 A gyrterleten belli szlltsnl s raktri be- s thrulsnak idpontjig trtn szllts kzben
kivtelezsi mveleteknl a megrendel kteles az erre a keletkeztek. A Schenck cg nem tehet felelss a
clra szolgl szlltsi segdeszkzket (flek stb.) megrendel ltal a lersnak megfelelen vgrehajtott
ahol ezek erre a clra alkalmasak hasznlni s ellenrzsi tevkenysg s intzkedsek alatt vagy
betartani a Schenck erre vonatkoz elrsait. alkalmval keletkezett krokrt.
2.2 A megrendel gondoskodik az tdsre s vibrcira Az ellenrzsi ciklus a helyi sajtossgoknak
rzkeny kszlkek s berendezsek kml megfelelen lervidlhet. Az ellenrzs befejezse s az
bnsmdjrl (klnsen mrmszerek, esetleg szksges intzkedsek megttele utn
mrlegtechnikai berendezsek esetben). A (praelszv szerek, flia cserje illetve ptlsa stb. s a
rzkdsokat s tseket a raktrozs s a gyrterleten megfelel konzervlsi intzkedsek vgrehajtsa)
belli szllts folyamn felttlenl kerlni kell. tovbbi 6 hnapos raktrozs engedhet meg, ami a
Figyelmet kell fordtani a csomagolson lthat gyrtmbl trtn kiszllts napjtl szmtva
szimblumokra. maximum 12 hnapig terjedhet.
2.3 Az sszekt kbelek nem fogantyk! Ha ezeket mgis 3.9 A maximlis raktrozsi id (3.7 s 3.8 cikkely) leteltekor
fogantyknt hasznljk, akkor az ebbl ered srlsek esetenknt tovbbi konzervlsi lpsek vgrehajtsra
elkerlhetetlenek. A Schenck cg ltal leszlltott lehet szksg. Ilyen esetekben a megrendel kteles a
sszekt kbelek gyrtsa s vizsglata megfelel Schenck cggel egyeztetni a szksges intzkedseket.
mdon trtnt. Ezek helytelen kezelsbl ered krokrt Ilyen egyeztets nlkl a szerzdsben vllalt garancia
a Schenck semmilyen felelssget nem vllal. ha mg fennll rvnyt veszti.
3. Raktrozs 3.10 Az ru szerelsre vagy a 3.8 s 4.5 cikkelyben felsorolt
3.1 Minden rut eredeti csomagolsban kell trolni, az 1.3 lpsek vgrehajtsra trtn kicsomagolsa eltt a
vagy 3.8 szakasz szerint jracsomagolt termkek mg lezrt csomagolsi egysgeket az
kivtelvel. akklimatizldshoz legalbb 24 rn keresztl abban a
helyisgben kell trolni, amelyben a kicsomagols fog
3.2 A trols ll helyzetben sk felleten trtnjen. A ldkat trtnni.
ehhez megjelltk a hasznlatos szimblummal.
3.3 Raktrozsnl gyelni kell a maximlisan megengedett
mglyzsi nyomsra, ami
kartondobozoknl: 0,2 t/m2
faldknl: 2 t/m2
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 19

Schenck Process
egyb instrukcik rvnyesek az adott konkrt esetre

4. Specilis elrsok a raktrozshoz s vonatkozan.
kezelshez
4.1 Villamos/elektronikus gpelemeket, szerelsi egysgeket 5.2 Ha a megrendel a raktrozssal kapcsolatosan a
s berendezseket klimatizlt helyisgben kell trolni. technika legjabb llsnak megfelel j ismeretekre tesz
4.2 Az adathordozkat (hajlkonylemezek, CD, szert vagy az ilyen jelleg j ismeretek kztudott vlnak,
merevlemezek, szalagok,...) mindig az erre a clra akkor kteles ezeket betartani illetve mindig a szigorbb
szolgl vdtartba (eredeti csomagolsba) kell kvetelmnyeknek eleget tenni.
visszatenni, amikor kiveszik a meghajtbl. Az 5.3 Ha a megrendel nem tudja bizonytani, hogy betartotta a
adathordozkat nem szabad megtrni, hajtogatni vagy jelen raktrozsi irnyelveket, gy a megrendel elveszti
terhelni. Hajlkonylemezek trolsa ll helyzetben a szerzdsben rgztett garancilis ignyt olyan
tartdobozban trtnjen. Az adathordozkat mgneses krokra vonatkozan, amelyek bizonythatan vagy nagy
erterektl (pldul hlzati transzformtor) s valsznsggel az elrsok be nem tartsra
ferromgneses anyagoktl tvol kell tartani. Az ers vezethetk vissza.
mgneses erterek hatsra trldhetnek az 5.4 A Schenck cg krokkal kapcsolatos
adathordozkon lv adatok. Magas hmrsklet s felelssg-vllalsnak mrtke szempontjbl mindig a
kzvetlen napsugrzs hatsa krt okoz az szerzdses szablyozsok mrtkadk, ezzel szemben
adathordozkban! a Schenck nem vllal felelssget azokrt a krokrt, a
4.3 Mechanikus alkatrszek/szerkezeti elemek melyek nem magn a leszlltott run keletkeztek.
Az ilyen darabokat tartalmaz csomagokat felttlenl zrt Ez a felelssg-vllalsi korltozs nem rvnyes
helyisgben kell trolni. szndkossg vagy slyos mulaszts esetn. Ha
4.3.1 Gumi szlltszalagok vagy ms gumi alkatrszek azonban a szndkossgot vagy slyos mulasztst a
A 3.7 cikkely szerinti id letelte utn a kvetkez Schenck cg nem vezet beoszts munkatrsai
konzervlsi lpsek vgrehajtsa szksges: kvettk el, a Schenck csak abban az esetben vllal
A szlltszalagok feszltsgmentestse felelssget, ha fennll lnyeges szerzdses
ktelezettsgnek megszegse. A felelssg-vllalsi
A szlltszalagok bekense glicerinnel korltozs nem rvnyes tovbb olyan esetekben,
Ezutn a trols hvs, szraz s fnytl vdett hely- amikor a termkszavatossgrl szl trvny rtelmben
en trtnjen a szlltmny trgynak hibi esetn magnhasznlatban
A gumielemeket zon hatstl vni kell lv trgyakkal kapcsolatos szemlyi srlsekrt s
4.3.2 Szalaggrgk anyagi krokrt ktelez a felelssg-vllals.
A 3.7 cikkely szerinti id letelte utn a grgket kzzel Ugyancsak nem rvnyes ttelesen vllalt tulajdonsgok
megforgatjuk, hogy megakadlyozzuk a kenanyag hinya esetn, ha a tulajdonsgok garantlsnak ppen
sztosztlyozdst s az ezzel jr gyantsodst. az volt a clja, hogy bebiztostsa a megrendelt olyan
Ellenrizni kell s esetleg ki kell javtani a szalaggrgk, krokkal szemben, amelyek nem magn a szlltmny
klnsen az eszterglssal megmunklt grgkpenyek trgyn keletkeztek. Tisztn vagyoni jelleg krok,
vdmzolst. amilyen pldul a termelskiess, a termels cskkense
vagy elmulasztott nyeresg, megtrtsnek fels hatrt
4.3.3 Csupasz alkatrszek
a bizalom s becslet ltalnos alapelvei szabjk meg,
A 3.7 cikkely szerinti id letelte utn ellenrizni kell s
pl. ha arnytalansg ll fenn a szlltmny ra s a kr
esetleg ki kell javtani a csupasz alkatrszek
nagysga kztt.
vdmzolst illetve j vdmzolst kell felvinni,
pldul Tectyl 506 festkkel. 6. Alkalmazand jog, illetkes brsg s
klnfle rendelkezsek
4.3.4 Hajtmvek
A hajtmveket ltalban konzervlva szlltjuk ki. A 3.7 6.1 A szerzd felek jogviszonya tekintetben kizrlag a
cikkely szerinti id letelte utn a hajtmvet valamilyen Nmet Szvetsgi Kztrsasgban rvnyes anyagi jog
konzervlszervvel pl. ENSIS 20 (Shell) t kell rvnyes az Egyeslt Nemzetek nemzetkzi ruvsrlsi
blteni. szerzdsekre vonatkoz egyezmnynek kizrsa
mellett.
4.4 Aclszerkezetek
Fedett helyisgekben akkor trolhatk, ha teljeslnek a 6.2 Minden vits gyben darmstadti illetkessg brsg
3.4 cikkely 1. mondatban felsorolt felttelek. Ezeket a hoz dntst. A Schenck cg azonban jogot forml arra,
csomagolsi egysgeket a talajnedvessg elleni vdelem hogy a megrendel szkhelye szerint illetkes brsgnl
rdekben megemelve kell trolni. is keresetet nyjtson be.
4.5 Veszlyes anyagok
Ezeket minden esetben az egyb anyagoktl elklntve 6.3 A Schenck cg rendelkezsre bocstott adatok
kell trolni a vonatkoz jogszablyoknak megfelelen. feldolgozsa s trolsa szmtgpes ton trtnik. A
4.6 Lengsgerjesztk szemlyi jelleg adatokat a Szvetsgi adatvdelmi
A lengsgerjesztket belsleg konzervljuk s ldba trvnynek megfelelen vdjk illetktelen
csomagoljuk. Hosszabb ideig trtn trolsnl a felhasznlstl.
korrzivdelmet fel kell jtani. Ksrjk figyelemmel a
vonatkoz mszaki dokumentcit.
4.7 Nyomrugk
A nyomrugkat feszltsgmentes llapotba kell hozni.
Ehhez a kvetkezk szerint jrunk el: Megmrjk a rugk
fels s als tmaszkod felletei kztti tvolsgot.
Rugzsi pontonknt kt U-vasat a mrt tvolsgnl 30
mm-rel hosszabbra leszabunk. A gpet az U-vasra
engedjk s gy tehermentestjk a rugkat.
5. rvnyessg s hatly
5.1 Ezek a raktrozsi irnyelvek a Schenck cg valamennyi
szlltmnyra rvnyesek a jelen irnyelvek 1.
bekezdse rtelmben. Emellett a mindenkori
ajnlatokban, rendels-visszaigazolsokban vagy egyb
levelezsben szerepl adatlapok, mszaki informcik s
20 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
RU
RU 3.3
:
Schenck , : 0,2 /2
, . : 2 /2

3.4
,
, ,
Schenck , ,
, Schenck .
, 5 +45.
. , ,
. .
, Schenck 70%.
.
3.5
1. .
.
1.1
3.6
. ,
( ,
1.2
),
,
.

, .
Schenck
, 3.7
. 6 (
( - Schenck).
- ) - Schenck
.
Schenck. 3.8 ,
Schenck .
6-
. -
1.3 ,
( ),
(.
Schenck. . 4.5).
Schenck
.
, .
(
, , ,
.
, ).
,
2. , , , ,
2.1 , ,
. Schenck
,
Schenck -
( ..).
2.2 , -
/ .
( Schenck
)
. , .
.
, .
.
( , ..
2.3 )
! 6
.
Schenck 12 .
. Schenck
. 3.9 (. 3.7
3.8)
3.
3.1 .
, Schenck.
. 1.3 3.8.
, ,
.
3.2
3.10
.
. 3.8 4.5

.

24 .
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 21

Schenck Process
RU
4. 5.
5.1
4.1 / , Schenck,
1- .
. ,
4.2 (, -, ,
, ) ,
, -
(). .
, . 5.2 , ,
.

(, ,
) .
.
. 5.3
,
!
4.3 /. , ,

. .
4.3.1 . 5.4 Schenck
. 3.7 , ,
: , Schenk ,
,
Schenck.

, ,
. ,

4.3.2 Schenck ,
. 3.7
. ,
. ,
,
,
, .

4.3.3 .
,
. 3.7 ,
,
, , Tectyl 506. .
4.3.4 , ..
,
,
.
. 3.7
, , EN- .
SIS 20 ( SHELL).
6. , ,
4.4

,
6.1
1

3.4.

.

4.5 .
, 6.2. . . ,
. Schenck
4.6 ,
.
.
6.3 Schenck
. , , .
, .
.
4.7
.
:
.
30
.
,
.
22 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
RO Directive pentru depozitarea i manipularea 3.3 n cazul depozitrii trebuie respectat presiunea de sti-
pieselor i mainilor livrate vuire maxim admis
Principial, mrfurile livrate de firma Schenck sunt destinate la cartoane: 0,2 t/m2
montajului imediat. Dac ntre sosirea la locul de destinaie i la cutii din lemn: 2 t/m2
montaj este necesar totui o depozitare intermediar, atunci
beneficiarul este obligat s anune firma Schenck de 3.4 Depozitarea trebuie n aa fel realizat nct mrfurile s
depozitarea planificat i s respecte aceste directive de fie protejate de ploaie, rou, ap condensat, alte feluri
depozitare, dac nu au fost stabilite de firma Schenck alte de umiditate i atmosfer care intensific coroziunea. n
reglementri pentru cazul dat. Posibilitatea de depozitare acest caz este admis o temperatur de depozitare de -5
este n acest caz, printre altele, n funcie de ambalajul ales. pn la +45C. Variaiile mai mari de temperatur trebuie
Dac nu este posibil o depozitare, atunci firma Schenck evitate. Umiditatea relativ, maxim admis, a aerului este
comunic beneficiarului acest lucru. de 70% la orice temperatur.
1. Controlul recepiei mrfii 3.5 Beneficiarul rspunde de faptul c este asigurat o

protecie suficient mpotriva insectelor parazite i
1.1 Beneficiarul este obligat s verifice imediat unitile de roztorilor. n acest caz trebuie luate n consideraie
ambalaj, cuprine n volumul de livrare, n privina caracte- condiiile locale.
rului complet i deteriorrilor vizibile la exterior, ale am-
balajului. 3.6 Depozitarea trebuie s se realizeze n aa fel nct
mrfurile s fie protejate de radiaiile ionizante (radiaii X,
1.2 Dac ambalajul prezint deteriorri exterioare, atunci radioactivitate) precum i de radiaiile de microunde i
beneficiarul este obligat s reclameze imediat acest lucru cmpurile magnetice. Sunt valabile aceleai limite ca i
la firma de expediie i s informeze firma Schenck rapid protecia persoanelor.
i detaliat n privina deteriorrilor constatate, precum i
s apeleze la un expert de avarii competent. Beneficiarul 3.7 Durata maxim de depozitare n ambalajul original este
are voie s iniieze alte msuri numai dup nelegerea i de 6 luni (ncepnd cu data livrrii de la ntreprinderea
de comun acord cu firma Schenck (n afara cazului unui Schenck). Depozitarea nu prelungete perioada
pericol iminent). Rspunderea firmei Schenck pentru contractual de garanie a firmei Schenck.
astfel de daune este n funcie de reglementrile
contractuale. 3.8 Ambalajul trebuie verificat periodic, cel puin lunar, n
privina deteriorrilor. Verificarea dup o durat de depo-
1.3 Dac ambalajul a fost deschis de vam, atunci beneficia- zitare de 6 luni, de la data livrrii din ntreprindere, cup-
rul este obligat s efectueze imediat o nou ambalare rinde deschiderea ambalajului exterior, controlul
sau o renchidere a ambalajului potrivit standardului ambalajului interior (etaneitate la aer a foliei) precum i
Schenck. Amnuntele n aceast privin vor fie comuni- funcionalitatea agentului dehidrant i eventualele msuri
cate de firma Schenck beneficiarului la solicitare. n acest de conservare necesare (vezi i art. 4.5). Dup acest
caz trebuie avut n vedere funcionalitatea agentului de control i msurile eventual necesare precum i renchi-
protecie anticoroziv (nedeteriorarea ambalajului din fo- derea etan la aer a foliei interioare trebuie nchis din
lie, ndeosebi nchiderea etan la aer a foliei, prezena nou ambalajul exterior, aa cum a fost iniial.
i aplicarea corect a hrtiei de protecie antirugin, a
vopselei de protecie anticoroziv, a agentului dehidrant). Dac beneficiarul constat deteriorri la ambalaj sau chi-
ar i la marf, atunci trebuie nsrcinat imediat un expert
2. Transportul, operaia de depozitare de avarii pentru efectuarea unei expertize a pagubei.
i scoatere din depozit Acestui expert trebuie puse la dispoziie pentru expertiza
sa toate piesele de ambalaj i ale mrfii necesare pre-
2.1 n cazul transportului din ntreprindere i operaiilor de cum i documentele, ndeosebi documentele de trans-
depozitare i scoatere din depozit, beneficiarul este obli- port i trebuie totodat s i se comunice toate datele
gat s aib n vedere dispozitivele auxiliare de transport, necesare pentru o evaluare. Firma Schenck rspunde
prevzute, s respecte dispoziiile n vigoare i, unde numai pentru pagubele care au aprut, conform experti-
este adecvat, s utilizeze aceste dispozitive auxiliare de zei expertului de avarii, justificat i incontestabil datorit
transport (urechi etc.). ambalrii greite sau pe timpul transportului pn la locul
convenit contractual i/sau pn la termenul de transfer
2.2 Beneficiarul rspunde de faptul c aparatele i instalaiile
de risc. Firma Schenck nu este rspunztoare pentru pa-
sensibile la vibraii i impacturi mecanice sunt manipulate
gube aprute pe timpul sau cu ocazia activitii de con-
cu atenie (ndeosebi, aparatele de msur, dispozitivele
trol descrise i a msurilor ntreprinse de beneficiar.
tehnice de cntrit). Trebuie evitate neaprat zguduirile
i impacturile mecanice pe timpul depozitrii i transpor- Ciclul de inspecie se reduce n funcie de condiiile loca-
tului n cadrul ntreprinderii. le. Dup efectuarea controlului i ncheierea msurilor
eventual necesare (nlocuirea, respectiv schimbul agen-
Simbolurile aplicate pe ambalaj trebuie respectate.
tului dehidrant, a foliei etc. i executarea msurilor de
2.3 Cablurile de legtur nu sunt mnere! Deteriorrile sunt conservare) este admis o depozitare n continuare de 6
inevitabile n cazul utilizrii ca mnere. Cablurile de luni pn la maxim 12 luni, calculat ncepnd cu data
legtur livrate de firma Schenck sunt fabricate ire- livrrii din ntreprindere.
proabil i verificate. Firma Schenck nu preia
3.9 n cazul expirrii duratei maxime de depozitare (articolele
rspunderea pentru pagubele datorit manipulrii greite.
3.7 i 3.8) pot fi necesare de la caz la caz i alte msuri
3. Depozitarea de conservare. n aceste cazuri trebuie puse de acord
msurile necesare ntre beneficiar i firma Schenck. Fr
3.1 Toate mrfurile trebuie depozitate n ambalajul lor origi- o astfel de punere de acord se anuleaz garania
nal, cu excepia celor noi ambalate conform subcapitolu- contractual, n cazul n care aceasta mai exist.
lui 1.3 sau 3.8.
3.10 nainte de dezambalarea mrfurilor pentru montaj sau
3.2 Depozitarea trebuie s se realizeze n poziie vertical, pentru executarea msurilor conform alineatelor 3.8 i
pe o suprafa plan. Cutiile sunt marcate pentru acest 4.5, unitile de ambalaj nc nchise trebuie s se afle
lucru cu simbolul uzitat. cel puin 24 ore n ncperea prevzut pentru
dezambalare, pentru aclimatizare.
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 21

Schenck Process
4. Reglementri speciale pentru depozitare i 5. Valabilitate i efect

manipulare 5.1 Aceste directive pentru depozitare sunt valabile pentru
4.1 Piesele, componentele i instalaiile toate livrrile de la firma Schenck, conform alineatului 1 al
electrice/electronice trebuie s fie depozitate n ncperi acestor directive. Pe lng acestea au valabilitate pentru
climatizate. cazul separat, dat, foile de date, informaiile tehnice i
4.2 Suporturile de date (dischete, CD, uniti hard-disc, celelalte indicaii cuprinse n ofertele respective,
benzi,..) trebuie introduse ntotdeauna n ambalajul de confirmrile de comand sau celelalte corespondene.
protecie prevzute pentru ele (ambalajul original), 5.2 Dac beneficiarul obine cunotine noi, generale, despre
imediat dup scoaterea lor din unitatea hard. Suporturile depozitare, care corespund stadiului actual al tehnicii sau
de date nu au voie s fie ndoite, pliate sau solicitate devin cunoscute general astfel de cunotine noi, atunci
mecanic. Dischetele trebuie depozitate pe vertical, ntr-o el trebuie s le respecte, respectiv s ndeplineasc
cutie. Suporturile de date trebuie s fie protejate cerinele respective, mai riguroase.
mpotriva cmpurilor magnetice (de ex. transformatorul 5.3 Dac beneficiarul nu poate dovedi c el a respectat
de reea) i de materialul feromagnetic. Cmpurile directivele pentru depozitare, atunci beneficiarul pierde
magnetice puternice pot terge datele de pe suporturile dreptul contratual la garanie pentru pagube, care provin
de date. Cldura i radiaiile solare deterioreaz justificat sau cu o probabilitate majoritar de la
suporturile de date! nerespectarea directivelor.
4.3 Piesele/elementele componente mecanice 5.4 Volumul rspunderii firmei Schenck pentru pagube este
Pachetele, care conin astfel de piese, trebuie depozitate din principiu n funcie de reglementrile contractuale, iar
neaprat n ncperi nchise. firma Schenck nu rspunde pentru pagubele, care nu
4.3.1 Benzi de transport din cauciuc i alte piese din cauciuc apar la mrfurile livrate de ea.
Aceast limitare a rspunderii nu este valabil n cazul
Dup expirarea termenului conform articolului 3.7 sunt premeditrii sau neglijenei grave. Pentru premeditare
necesare urmtoarele msuri de conservare: sau neglijen grav a angajailor de la firma Schenck,
care nu fac parte din conducere, firma Schenck rspunde
Detensionarea mecanic a benzilor de transport, totui numai dac este nclcat o obligaie contractual
Ungerea benzilor de transport cu glicerin, esenial. Limita de rspundere nu este valabil nici n
Depozitarea ulterioar la rece, uscat i ntuneric, cazurile, n care, potrivit legii privind rspunderea pentru
produse, se rspunde pentru daune materiale i fizice la
Protecia pieselor din cauciuc mpotriva efectului ozo-
nului. obiecte folosite privat n cazul defectelor obiectului livrat.
Ea nu este valabil nici n cazul lipsei proprietilor, care
4.3.2 Rolele portante
sunt asigurate n mod expres, dac asigurarea are tocmai
Dup expirarea termenului conform articolului 3.7
ca scop asigurarea beneficiarului contra daunelor, care
acestea trebuie rsucite cu mna pentru a evita
nu au aprut la obiectul de livrare respectiv.
separarea lubrifiantului i a rezinificrii. Stratul aplicat de
Despgubirea pagubelor pur pecuniare, asta nseamn
protecie al rolelor portante, ndeosebi al mantalei
de ex. stagnarea produciei, scderea produciei sau
rsucite a rolelor portante, trebuie control i eventual
ctig pierdut, este limitat prin principiile generale ale
mbuntit.
ncrederii i bunei credine, i anume n cazurile
4.3.3 Piesele lucioase disproporiei dintre mrimea preului de livrare i cel al
Stratul aplicat de protecie al pieselor lucioase trebuie daunei.
controlat i eventual mbuntit, respectiv trebuie aplicat
6. Legislaia aplicabil, instana competent i
din nou de ex. Tectyl 506, dup expirarea termenului diverse
conform articolului 3.7.
6.1 Pentru raporturile legale ale partenerilor contractuali este
4.3.4 Angrenajele valabil numai dreptul material n vigoare n Republica
sunt de obicei livrate cu un agent de conservare. Dup Federal Germania prin excluderea Conveniei Naiunilor
expirarea termenului conform articolului 3.7 trebuie Unite n privina Contractelor pentru cumprarea
efectuat o splare a angrenajului cu un agent de internaional de mrfuri.
conservare, de ex. ENSIS 20 (Shell). 6.2 Instana competent pentru toate litigiile se afl n oraul
4.4 Construciile din oel Darmstadt. Firma Schenck i rezerv totui dreptul de a
pot fi depozitate n ncperi cu acoperi numai dac intenta acolo o aciune n justiie, unde este stabilit legal
condiiile de la fraza 1 a articolului 3.4 sunt asigurate. o instan competent pentru beneficiar.
Aceste uniti de ambalaj trebuie depozitate la nlime 6.3 Datele puse la dispoziia firmei Schenck sunt prelucrate i
pentru protecie mpotriva umiditii de la sol. memorizate computerizat. Datele personale sunt
4.5 Marfa periclitant protejate contra abuzurilor corespunztor legii federale
trebuie depozitat principial separat de celelalte mrfuri, privind protecia datelor.
corespunztor prescripiilor legale.
4.6 Excitatori de vibraii
sunt conservai la interior i ambalai n cutii. Protecia
anticoroziv trebuie rennoit n cazul depozitrii mai
ndelungate. V rugm s avei n vedere documentaia
tehnic.
4.7 Arcuri de comprimare
Trebuie detensionate. Detensionarea mecanic a
acestora se efectueaz n felul urmtor: msurai
distanele dintre suportul superior i cel inferior al
arcurilor. Pentru fiecare poziie de arc tiai cte un fier n
form de U, mai lung cu 30 mm dect distana msurat.
Cobori maina pe piesele din fier n form de U i prin
aceasta detensionai mecanic arcurile.
22 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process
UA
UA
3.4
, , ,
, ,
, Schenck, , .
. -5
+45 C. .
,
Schenck 70% - .
, Schenck 3.5 ,
, .
. .
3.6
. , ,
Schenck . ( ,
1. )
. ,
1.1
.

. 3.7
6 (
1.2 ,
Schenck).

Schenck.
Schenck ,
, 3.8 ,
. ( , .
, ) 6
Schenck.
,
Schenck . ( )
, ,
1.3 ,
(. . 4.5).

,

Schenck. Schenck

.
, .

(
, , , ,
, ,
, .
, .
, ,
2. ,
,

. Schenck
2.1 , ,
,
,
Schenck,
, , , /
( ..). . Schenck
2.2 , ,
, ,
( , .
, ).
.
(
. , ..
. )
2.3 ! 6 12 ,
.
. , 3.9
Schenck, . ( 3.7 3.8)
Schenck .
Schenck
. .
3. , , .
3.1 , 3.10
. 1.3 3.8. . 3.8 4.5
3.2
. 24
. .
3.3

: 0,2 /2
: 2 /2
BV-R 2000 AA/0408 23

Schenck Process
UA

4. .
5.2
4.1 / , , ,
. ,

4.2 (, -, ,
.
...)
( ), 5.3 ,
. ,
,
. , ,
,
. .
(, 5.4 Schenck
) .
, Schenck
. ,
! .
4.3 / ,
, .
.
4.3.1 . Schenck Schenck
3.7 ,
: . ,

,

,
,

.
,
4.3.2 ,
, . 3.7, ,
, .
. , , , ,
,
,
. ,
4.3.3
.
. 3.7 6. ,
,
, Tectyl 506.
6.1
4.3.4

. . 3.7 .

, , ENSIS 20 (Shell). 6.2 .
Schenck
4.4 ,
, .
, 1-
3.4. ,
, . 6.3 , Schenck,
4.5
. , ,
.

4.6
.
.

.
.
4.7
. :
.
U-
30 ,
. U-
.
5.
5.1
Schenck 1-
.
,
, ,
24 BV-R 2000AA/0408
schenck Process

Schenk

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Schenk

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Instructions

Customer F.L. Smidth A/S

file://C:\Dokumente und Einstellungen\csd3605\Lokale Einstellungen\Temp\wz9334\... 20.05.2010

Reg. 1 Manuals Mechanics

Reg. 2 Manuals Volumetric and Drive Controls

Reg. 3 Manuals Measuring and Automation Systems

Reg. 4 Techn. Spec. and Program Sheets

Reg. 5 Mechanical Drawings

Reg. 6 Electrical Diagrams

Reg. 8 Certificates, Compliance Information

Reg. 10 Order Specific Information

file://C:\Dokumente und Einstellungen\csd3605\Lokale Einstellungen\Temp\wz9334\... 20.05.2010

we make processes work

Sales: Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 10 28

Service: 24h Emergency hotline: +49 (0) 172 - 650 17 00

Heavy Duty Weighing & Feeding

Light Duty Weighing & Feeding

Transport & Logistics

Components & Spare Parts

Subject to change without prior notice.

BV-H2190 GB 0536 MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions

1 General Information ......................................................................... 1

MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions 0536 BV-H2190 GB

6 Single-idler Belt Weigher BED....................................................... 50

BV-H2190 GB 0536 MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions

1.1 Hints for Delivery

" Carefully inspect packaging for any damage during transit.

Additionally observe the

1.2 Information on Documentation

Single-idler belt weighers: BEM, BEP and BED types

Multi-idler belt weighers BMP, 2BMP and BMP2 types

" Operating Principle

MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions 0536 BV-H2190 GB

" Operating principle

" Load cell type

" Possible belt widths

" Feed rates

Before mounting, please read the

" Installation Instructions

" Operating and Setting Instructions

Speed measurement system: See chapter

Test weight system:: See chapter

BV-H2190 GB 0536 MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions

2 Belt Weighers Overview

Proper mounting is an important consideration for system accuracy.

" Throughput and consumption measurement in production plants

" Balancing of amounts fed in and out

" Reporting of load limits

" Batching in load-out stations

" Legal-for-trade weighing

" Prefeeder control

A standard belt weigher comprises:

" Overload protected load cell(s) with a high degree of protection

" Cable junction box for connection of sensors

" Fixing elements for the installation

MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions 0536 BV-H2190 GB

For accuracy data, please refer to the following documention:

2.1 Single-idler Belt Weighers

" Belt tension forces absorbed by leaf spring parallel guidances

" Suitable for handling feed rates up to 15,000 t/hr

" Accuracies of up to 0.5 %

2.1.1 BEM type

" Belt weigher of modular design, suitable for DIN

BV-H2190 GB 0536 MULTIBELT Belt Weighers Installation and Operating Instructions